Search the source libraries

حَدَّثَنَا أَحْمَدُ بْنُ عَبْدَةَ الضَّبِّيُّ، حَدَّثَنَا حَمَّادُ بْنُ زَيْدٍ، عَنْ ثَابِتٍ، عَنْ أَنَسٍ، قَالَ نَزَلَتْ هَذِهِ الآيَةُ ‏:‏ ‏(‏وتُخْفِي فِي نَفْسِكَ مَا اللَّهُ مُبْدِيهِ وَتَخْشَى النَّاسَ ‏)‏ فِي شَأْنِ زَيْنَبَ بِنْتِ جَحْشٍ جَاءَ زَيْدٌ يَشْكُو فَهَمَّ بِطَلاَقِهَا فَاسْتَأْمَرَ النَّبِيَّ صلى الله عليه وسلم فَقَالَ النَّبِيُّ صلى الله عليه وسلم ‏"‏ أَمْسِكْ عَلَيْكَ زَوْجَكَ وَاتَّقِ اللَّهَ ‏"‏ ‏.‏ قَالَ أَبُو عِيسَى هَذَا حَدِيثٌ حَسَنٌ صَحِيحٌ ‏.‏

Narrated Anas:"When this Ayah was revealed: 'But you did hide in yourself that which Allah will make manifest... (33:37)' about Zainab bint Jahsh, Zaid had come to the Prophet (ﷺ) complaining, and he wanted to divorce her, so he consulted with the Prophet (ﷺ). The Prophet (ﷺ) said: 'Keep your wife to yourself, and have Taqwa of Allah (33:)

consultationfull record with gradings →

حَدَّثَنَا عَبْدُ بْنُ حُمَيْدٍ، حَدَّثَنَا مُحَمَّدُ بْنُ الْفَضْلِ، حَدَّثَنَا حَمَّادُ بْنُ زَيْدٍ، عَنْ ثَابِتٍ، عَنْ أَنَسٍ، قَالَ نَزَلَتْ هَذِهِ الآيَةُ فِي زَيْنَبَ بِنْتِ جَحْشٍ ‏:‏ ‏(‏فلَمَّا قَضَى زَيْدٌ مِنْهَا وَطَرًا زَوَّجْنَاكَهَا ‏)‏ قَالَ فَكَانَتْ تَفْتَخِرُ عَلَى أَزْوَاجِ النَّبِيِّ صلى الله عليه وسلم تَقُولُ زَوَّجَكُنَّ أَهْلُكُنَّ وَزَوَّجَنِي اللَّهُ مِنْ فَوْقِ سَبْعِ سَمَوَاتٍ ‏.‏ قَالَ أَبُو عِيسَى هَذَا حَدِيثٌ حَسَنٌ صَحِيحٌ ‏.‏

Narrated Anas:"When this Ayah was revealed about Zainab bint Jahsh: 'So when Zaid had completed his aim with her, We gave her to you in marriage (33:37)' - he said: "She used to boast to the wives of the Prophet (ﷺ): 'Your families married you (to him) while Allah married me (to him) from above the Seven Heavens

full record with gradings →

Acute and long-term safety and tolerability of risperidone in children with autism.

Treatment-emergent adverse events (AEs) were monitored during an 8-week, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial of risperidone (0.5-3.5 mg/day) in 101 children and adolescents with a lifetime diagnosis of autistic disorder. In addition, 37 placebo nonresponders received open-label risperidone for another 8 weeks. Of all the risperidone responders (n=65), 63 entered an open extension of another 16 weeks (6 months total risperidone exposure), and 32 of them were rerandomized to either continued risperidone therapy (n=16) or gradual replacement with placebo (n=16) over 8 weeks. We collected the following measures of safety and tolerability: (1) laboratory blood assessments (CBC with differential, electrolytes, and liver function tests) and urinalyses, (2) vital signs, (3) Side Effects Review of AEs thought to be associated with risperidone, (4) sleep records, (5) Simpson Angus Neurological Rating Scale (SARS), (6) Abnormal Involuntary Movement Scale (AIMS), and (7) height and weight. No clinically significant changes were found on the lab tests. During the 8-week acute trial, the most common AEs on the Side Effects Review, scored as moderate or higher, were as follows (placebo and risperidone, respectively): Somnolence (12% and 37%), enuresis (29% and 33%), excessive appetite (10% and 33%), rhinitis (8% and 16%), difficulty waking (8% and 12%), and constipation (12% and 10%). "Difficulty falling asleep" and anxiety actually favored the risperidone condition at statistically significant levels. The same AEs tended to recur through 6 months of treatment, although often at reduced levels. Using Centers for Disease Control (CDC) standardized scores, both weight and body mass index (BMI) increased with risperidone during the acute trial (0.5 and 0.6 SDs, respectively, for risperidone; 0.0 and 0.1 SDs, respectively, for placebo) and into open-label extension (0.19 and 0.16 SDs, respectively), although the amount of gain decelerated with time. Extrapyramidal symptoms, as assessed by the SARS, were no more common for drug than placebo, although drooling was reported more often in the risperidone group. There were no differences between groups on the AIMS. Two subjects had seizures (one taking placebo), but these were considered unrelated to active drug. Most AEs were mild to moderate and failed to interfere with therapeutic changes; there were no unanticipated AEs. The side effects of most concern were somnolence and weight gain.

Journal of child and adolescent psychopharmacology · randomised controlled trial · 92 citationsread the source →

Digital Mental Health Interventions for Depression, Anxiety, and Enhancement of Psychological Well-Being Among College Students: Systematic Review.

Background: College students are increasingly reporting common mental health problems, such as depression and anxiety, and they frequently encounter barriers to seeking traditional mental health treatments. Digital mental health interventions, such as those delivered via the Web and apps, offer the potential to improve access to mental health treatment. Objective: This study aimed to review the literature on digital mental health interventions focused on depression, anxiety, and enhancement of psychological well-being among samples of college students to identify the effectiveness, usability, acceptability, uptake, and adoption of such programs. Methods: We conducted a systematic review using the Preferred Reporting Items for Systematic Reviews and Meta-Analyses guidelines (registration number CRD42018092800), and the search strategy was conducted by a medical research librarian in the following databases: MEDLINE (Ovid), EMBASE (Elsevier), PsycINFO (EbscoHost), the Cochrane Library (Wiley), and Web of Science (Thomson Reuters) from the date of inception to April 2019. Data were synthesized using a systematic narrative synthesis framework, and formal quality assessments were conducted to address the risk of bias. Results: A total of 89 studies met the inclusion criteria. The majority of interventions (71/89, 80%) were delivered via a website, and the most common intervention was internet-based cognitive behavioral therapy (28, 31%). Many programs (33, 37%) featured human support in the form of coaching. The majority of programs were either effective (42, 47%) or partially effective (30, 34%) in producing beneficial changes in the main psychological outcome variables. Approximately half of the studies (45, 51%) did not present any usability or acceptability outcomes, and few studies (4, 4%) examined a broad implementation of digital mental health interventions on college campuses. Quality assessments revealed a moderate-to-severe risk of bias in many of the studies. Conclusions: Results suggest that digital mental health interventions can be effective for improving depression, anxiety, and psychological well-being among college students, but more rigorous studies are needed to ascertain the effective elements of these interventions. Continued research on improving the user experience of, and thus user engagement with, these programs appears vital for the sustainable implementation of digital mental health interventions on college campuses.

Journal of medical Internet research · systematic review · 426 citationsread the source →

Social determinants of depression and suicidal behaviour in the Caribbean: a systematic review.

Background: Depressive disorder is the largest contributor to years lived with disability in the Caribbean, adding 948 per 100,000 in 2013. Depression is also a major risk factor for suicidal behaviour. Social inequalities influence the occurrence of depression, yet little is known about the social inequalities of this condition in the Caribbean. In support of the 2011 Rio Political Declaration on addressing health inequities, this article presents a systematic review of the role of social determinants on depression and its suicidal behaviours in the Caribbean. Methods: Eight databases were searched for observational studies reporting associations between social determinants and depression frequency, severity, or outcomes. Based on the PROGRESS-plus checklist, we considered 9 social determinant groups (of 15 endpoints) for 6 depression endpoints, totalling 90 possible ways ('relationship groups') to explore the role of social determinants on depression. Studies with ≥50 participants conducted in Caribbean territories between 2004 and 2014 were eligible. The review was conducted according to STROBE and PRISMA guidelines. Results were planned as a narrative synthesis, with meta-analysis if possible. Results: From 3951 citations, 55 articles from 45 studies were included. Most were classified as serious risk of bias. Fifty-seven relationship groups were reported by the 55 included articles, leaving 33 relationship groups (37%) without an evidence base. Most associations were reported for gender, age, residence, marital status, and education. Depression, its severity, and its outcomes were more common among females (except suicide which was more common among males), early and middle adolescents (among youth), and those with lower levels of education. Marriage emerged as both a risk and protective factor for depression score and prevalence, while several inequality relationships in Haiti were in contrast to typical trends. Conclusion: The risk of bias and few numbers of studies within relationship groups restricted the synthesis of Caribbean evidence on social inequalities of depression. Along with more research focusing on regional social inequalities, attempts at standardizing reporting guidelines for observational studies of inequality and studies examining depression is necessitated. This review offers as a benchmark to prioritize future research into the social determinants of depression frequency and outcomes in the Caribbean.

BMC public health · systematic review · 37 citationsread the source →

Donepezil for dementia with Lewy bodies: a randomized, placebo-controlled trial.

Objective: Because cholinergic deficits are prominent in dementia with Lewy bodies (DLB), we investigated the effects of a cholinesterase inhibitor, donepezil, in such patients in a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled exploratory phase 2 trial. Methods: One-hundred forty patients with DLB, recruited from 48 specialty centers in Japan, were randomly assigned to receive placebo or 3, 5, or 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride daily for 12 weeks (n = 35, 35, 33, and 37, respectively). Effects on cognitive function were assessed using the Mini-Mental State Examination (MMSE) and several domain-specific neuropsychological tests. Changes in behavior were evaluated using the Neuropsychiatric Inventory, caregiver burden using the Zarit Caregiver Burden Interview, and global function using the Clinician's Interview-Based Impression of Change-plus Caregiver Input (CIBIC-plus). Safety measures included the Unified Parkinson's Disease Rating Scale part III. Results: Donepezil at 5 and 10 mg/day was significantly superior to placebo on both the MMSE (5 mg: mean difference, 3.8; 95% confidence interval [CI], 2.3-5.3; p < 0.001; 10 mg: mean difference, 2.4; 95% CI, 0.9-3.9; p = 0.001) and CIBIC-plus (p < 0.001 for each); 3 mg/day was significantly superior to placebo on CIBIC-plus (p < 0.001), but not on the MMSE (p = 0.017). Significant improvements were found also in behavioral measures (p < 0.001) at 5 and 10 mg/day and caregiver burden (p = 0.004) at 10 mg/day. The safety results were consistent with the known profile of donepezil and similar among groups. Interpretation: Donepezil at 5 and 10mg/day produces significant cognitive, behavioral, and global improvements that last at least 12 weeks in DLB patients, reducing caregiver burden at the highest dose. Donepezil is safe and well tolerated.

Annals of neurology · randomised controlled trial · 173 citationsread the source →

Telephone-Based Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Insomnia in Perimenopausal and Postmenopausal Women With Vasomotor Symptoms: A MsFLASH Randomized Clinical Trial.

Importance: Effective, practical, nonpharmacologic therapies are needed to treat menopause-related insomnia symptoms in primary and women's specialty care settings. Objective: To evaluate the efficacy of telephone-based cognitive behavioral therapy for insomnia (CBT-I) vs menopause education control (MEC). Design, setting, and participants: A single-site, randomized clinical trial was conducted from September 1, 2013, to August 31, 2015, in western Washington State among 106 perimenopausal or postmenopausal women aged 40 to 65 years with moderate insomnia symptoms (Insomnia Severity Index [ISI] score, ≥12) and 2 or more daily hot flashes. Blinded assessments were conducted at baseline, 8, and 24 weeks postrandomization. An intent-to-treat analysis was conducted. Interventions: Six CBT-I or MEC telephone sessions in 8 weeks. Participants submitted weekly electronic sleep diaries and received group-specific written educational materials. The CBT-I sessions included sleep restriction, stimulus control, sleep hygiene education, cognitive restructuring, and behavioral homework; MEC sessions provided information about menopause and women's health. Main outcomes and measures: Primary outcome was scores on the ISI (score range, 0-28; scores ≥15 indicate moderate to severe insomnia). Secondary outcome was scores on the Pittsburgh Sleep Quality Index (score range, 0-21; higher scores indicate worse sleep quality). Additional outcomes included sleep and hot flash diary variables and hot flash interference. Results: At 8 weeks, ISI scores had decreased 9.9 points among 53 women receiving CBT-I (mean [SD] age, 55.0 [3.5] years) and 4.7 points among 53 women receiving MEC (age, 54.7 [4.7] years), a mean between-group difference of 5.2 points (95% CI, -6.1 to -3.3; P < .001). Pittsburgh Sleep Quality Index scores decreased 4.0 points in women receiving CBT-I and 1.4 points in women receiving MEC, a mean between-group difference of 2.7 points (95% CI, -3.9 to -1.5; P < .001). Significant group differences were sustained at 24 weeks. At 8 and 24 weeks, 33 of 47 women (70%) and 37 of 44 (84%) in the CBT-I group, respectively, had ISI scores in the no-insomnia range compared with 10 of 41 (24%) and 16 of 37 (43%) in the MEC group, respectively. The CBT-I group also had greater improvements in diary-reported sleep latency, wake time, and sleep efficiency. There were no between-group differences in frequency of daily hot flashes, but hot flash interference was significantly decreased at 8 weeks for the CBT-I group (-15.7; 95% CI, -20.4 to -11.0) compared with the MEC group (-7.1; 95% CI, -14.6 to 0.4) (P = .03), differences that were maintained at 24 weeks for the CBT-I group (-22.8; 95% CI, -28.6 to -16.9) and MEC group (-11.6; 95% CI, -19.4 to -3.8) (P = .003). Conclusions and relevance: Telephone-based CBT-I improved sleep in perimenopausal and postmenopausal women with insomnia and hot flashes. Results support further development and testing of centralized CBT-I programs for treating menopausal insomnia. Trial registration: clinicaltrials.gov Identifier: NCT01936441.

JAMA internal medicine · randomised controlled trial · 114 citationsread the source →

Do patients with bipolar disorder and subsyndromal symptoms benefit from functional remediation? A 12-month follow-up study.

We analyzed the efficacy of functional remediation, in a sample of patients with bipolar disorder who presented with subsyndromal symptoms. From a total sample of 239 patients with bipolar I and II disorder, according to DSM-IV-TR diagnostic criteria, entering a randomized clinical trial, those patients who presented with subsyndromal symptoms were selected based on a method already described by Berk and colleagues was applied. It consists of using the Clinical Global Impression-Bipolar version (CGI-BP) to establish the scores of the Hamilton Depression Rating Scale (HAM-D) and of the Young Mania Rating Scale (YMRS) that correspond with 1 in the CGI-BP. Functional outcome and mood symptoms were assessed at 6 and at 12-month follow-up. A total of 99 patients were selected for this post-hoc analysis, allocated as follows: functional remediation (n=33); psychoeducation (n=37) and treatment as usual (TAU,n=29). The repeated-measures analyses at 12-month follow-up revealed a significant group x time interaction in favour of the patients who received functional remediation when compared to psychoeducation and TAU (F=2.93; p=0.02) at improving psychosocial functioning. Finally, mood symptoms did not significantly change in any of the three groups at any time of follow-up, as shown by the non-significant group x time interaction effect in HAM-D scores (F=1.57; p=0.18) and YMRS scores (F=1.51; p=0.20). Bipolar patients with subsyndromal symptoms improve their functional outcome when exposed to functional remediation regardless of the persistence of mood symptomatology.

European neuropsychopharmacology : the journal of the European College of Neuropsychopharmacology · cohort or longitudinal · 24 citationsread the source →

A randomised worksite comparison of acceptance and commitment therapy and stress inoculation training.

In this comparative intervention study, 107 working individuals with above average levels of distress were randomly assigned to one of three conditions: acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT; n = 37); stress inoculation training (SIT; n = 37); or a waitlist control group (n = 33). The interventions were delivered to small groups in the workplace via two half-day training sessions. ACT and SIT were found to be equally effective in reducing psychological distress across a three month assessment period. Mediation analysis indicated that the beneficial impact of ACT on mental health resulted from an increase in psychological flexibility rather than from a change in dysfunctional cognitive content. Contrary to hypothesis, a reduction in dysfunctional cognitions did not mediate change in the SIT condition. Results suggest that the worksite may offer a useful, yet underutilised, arena for testing cognitive-behavioural theories of change.

Behaviour research and therapy · randomised controlled trial · 63 citationsread the source →

Exercise is more effective than health education in reducing fatigue in fatigued cancer survivors.

Introduction: Cancer-related fatigue is a most debilitating side effect reported by survivors, often lasting years following treatment. Purpose: To determine the effects of a 10-week exercise intervention compared with a health education intervention on fatigue, quality of life outcomes and functional fitness in cancer survivors with documented fatigue. Methods: This quasi-experimental study allocated 37 post-treatment fatigued cancer survivors (33 female, 30 breast cancer, aged 55 ± 2 years, time since treatment 2.3 ± 0.3 years; mean ± SEM) to an exercise group (EX, n = 19) or health education comparison group (HE, n = 18). The EX intervention emphasised brisk walking with progressive increments, stretching, exercise education and self-efficacy enhancement. The HE intervention emphasised sleep management, nutrition and cognitive behavioural therapy. All participants were evaluated at pre- and post-intervention with EX followed up at 26 W. Results: The intervention effect on fatigue (FACT-F) in EX was greater (p < 0.05) than that in HE, the difference being 4 times the recognised clinically important difference. The intervention also increased (p < 0.05) cognitive function, global quality of life and functional fitness scores. It reduced (p < 0.05) insomnia and fear of physical activity. All intervention effects were maintained to 26 W. The intervention effect on fatigue in EX was largely achieved by week 4. There was 100% retention rate at 10 W and no adverse events reported. Conclusions: There is a reduction of considerable magnitude in cancer fatigue from group-based exercise training, that is sustainable and attributable to exercise per se. Implications for cancer survivors: Exercise training is feasible for fatigued cancer survivors and should form part of tailored rehabilitation programmes.

Supportive care in cancer : official journal of the Multinational Association of Supportive Care in Cancer · clinical trial · 23 citationsread the source →

Medicinal plants used in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia: A gender perspective.

Ethnopharmacological relevance: Very few studies examining quantitatively gender differences in the knowledge and use of medicinal plants exist for the Arab world. Differences in ethnobotanical knowledge of medicinal plants between men and women in Jeddah are explored here for the first time. Aim of the study: Our study aims to document urban medicinal plant knowledge in Jeddah, and to answer the following questions: (1) What medicinal plants are used by Saudis in Jeddah? (2) To what extent do men and women use medicinal plants? (3) Are plants used by men significantly different to those used by women? And, (4) do men and women learn about medicinal plants in different ways? Given the gendered nature of space and relations in the Arab world, we hypothesise that men and women learn about plants in different ways and that this will contribute to explain any possible differences. Materials and methods: Ethnobotanical fieldwork took place in Jeddah from August 2018 to September 2019. Individual free-listing, semi-structured interviews and an online survey questionnaire were carried out to document local medicinal plant. In total, 50 men and 50 women were interviewed face-to-face and 344 people responded to the questionnaire, of which 154 were men and 190 were women. Results: A total of 94 medicinal plant vernacular names were documented representing 85 different plant species belonging to 37 families. Men cited 63 plants (33 plant families) and women 83 (36 plant families). Sixty-one plants were cited by both men and women, two only by men and 22 only by women. Men and women learn in similar ways, but generally use medicinal plants to treat different ailments. Women rely on medicinal plant use to a larger extent. Conclusion: Medicinal plant use is dependent on gendered social roles and experience, as well as preference for biomedicine or medicinal plant use. Men and women use similar plants, but women have greater knowledge that increases with age. Given the food-medicine continuum, women's double role of family food and care providers may explain their expertise in medicinal plant use.

Journal of ethnopharmacology · cohort or longitudinal · 21 citationsread the source →

Neurofeedback, sham neurofeedback, and cognitive-behavioural group therapy in adults with attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder: a triple-blind, randomised, controlled trial.

Background: Many studies suggest that electroencephalographic (EEG) neurofeedback might be beneficial in the treatment of attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD). However, numbers of well controlled studies are low and neurofeedback techniques are regarded as highly controversial. The present trial examined the efficacy (compared with sham neurofeedback) and efficiency (compared with meta-cognitive therapy) of a standard EEG neurofeedback protocol in adults with ADHD. Methods: We did a concurrent, triple-blind, randomised, controlled trial using authorised deception in adults with ADHD from one centre (University of Tübingen) in Tübingen, Germany. Participants were eligible if they fulfilled the DSM-IV-TR criteria for ADHD, were aged between 18 years and 60 years, and had no or stable use of medication for at least 2 months with no intention to change. We excluded participants who had comorbid schizophrenia or schizoaffective disorder, bipolar disorder, borderline personality disorder, epilepsy, or traumatic brain injury; substance abuse or dependence; or current or planned other psychological treatment. Those eligible were randomly assigned to three groups: a neurofeedback group which received 30 verum θ-to-β neurofeedback sessions over 15 weeks, a sham neurofeedback group which received 15 sham followed by 15 verum θ-to-β neurofeedback sessions over 15 weeks, or a meta-cognitive group therapy group which received 12 sessions over 12 weeks. Participants were assigned equally to one of the three interventions through a computerised minimisation randomisation procedure stratified by sex, age, and baseline symptom severity of ADHD. Participants were masked as to whether they were receiving neurofeedback or sham neurofeedback, but those receiving meta-cognitive therapy were aware of their treatment. Clinical assessors (ie, those assessing outcomes) and research staff who did the neurofeedback training were masked to participants' randomisation status only for neurofeedback and sham neurofeedback. The primary outcome was symptom score on the Conners' adult ADHD rating scale, assessed before treatment, at midtreatment (after 8 weeks), after treatment (after 16 weeks), and 6 months later. All individuals with at least one observation after randomisation were included in the analyses. This trial is registered with ClinicalTrials.gov, number NCT01883765. Findings: Between Feb 1, 2013, and Dec 1, 2015, 761 people were assessed for eligibility. 656 (86%) were excluded and 118 (15%) were eligible for participation in this study. Eligible participants were randomly assigned to neurofeedback (38 [32%]), sham neurofeedback (39 [33%]), or meta-cognitive therapy (41 [35%]). 37 (97%) individuals for neurofeedback, 38 (97%) for sham neurofeedback, and 38 (93%) for meta-cognitive therapy were included in analyses. Self-reported ADHD symptoms decreased substantially for all treatment groups (B=-2·58 [95% CI -3·48 to -1·68]; p<0·0001) between pretreatment and the end of 6 month follow-up, independent of treatment condition (neurofeedback vs sham neurofeedback B=-0·89 [95% CI -2·14 to 0·37], p=0·168; neurofeedback vs meta-cognitive therapy -0·30 [-1·55 to 0·95], p=0·639). No treatment-related or trial-related serious adverse events were reported. Interpretation: Our findings suggest that neurofeedback training is not superior to a sham condition or group psychotherapy. All three treatments were equivalently effective in reducing ADHD symptoms. This first randomised, sham-controlled trial did not show any specific effects of neurofeedback on ADHD symptoms in adults. Funding: German Research Foundation.

The lancet. Psychiatry · randomised controlled trial · 91 citationsread the source →

Factors Associated With Post-Stroke Physical Activity: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis.

Objective: To integrate the literature investigating factors associated with post-stroke physical activity. Data sources: A search was conducted from database inception to June 2016 across 9 databases: Cochrane, MEDLINE, ProQuest, Web of Science, PsycINFO, Scopus, Embase, CINAHL, and Allied and Complementary Medicine Database. The reference lists of included articles were screened for secondary literature. Study selection: Cohort and cross-sectional studies were included if they recruited community-dwelling stroke survivors and measured factors associated with physical activity. Data extraction: Risk of bias was evaluated using the Quality in Prognosis Studies checklist. A meta-analysis was conducted for correlates where there were at least 2 studies that reported a correlation value. Correlation values were used in an effect size measure and converted to a standardized unit with Fisher r to z transformation and conversion back to r method. Results were described qualitatively for studies that could not be pooled. Data synthesis: There were 2161 studies screened and 26 studies included. Age (meta r=-.17; P≤.001) and sex (meta r=-.01; P=.02) were the nonmodifiable factors that were found to be associated with post-stroke physical activity. The modifiable factors were physical function (meta r=.68-.73; P<.001), cardiorespiratory fitness (meta r=.35; P≤.001), fatigue (meta r=-.22; P=.01), falls self-efficacy (meta r=-.33; P<.001), balance self-efficacy (meta r=.37; P<.001), depression (meta r=-.58 to .48; P<.001), and health-related quality of life (meta r=.38-.43; P<.001). The effect of side of infarct, neglect, and cognition on post-stroke physical activity was inconclusive. Conclusions: Age, sex, physical function, depression, fatigue, self-efficacy, and quality of life were factors associated with post-stroke physical activity. The cause and effect of these relations are unclear, and the possibility of reverse causality needs to be addressed.

Archives of physical medicine and rehabilitation · meta-analysis · 223 citationsread the source →

Food pantry organizational features, nutrition environments, and partnerships: a community-engaged study in Southern California.

BACKGROUND: Charitable food organizations are critical community hubs for promoting food security and nutrition. Few studies have examined whether food pantry organizational features (e.g., setting and size) are associated with the use of health promotion strategies. METHODS: This cross-sectional study used a validated survey instrument (Nutrition Environment Food Pantry Assessment Tool+, NEFPAT+) in partnership with a southern California regional food bank to examine pantry consumer nutrition environments, including client choice models, marketing, and partnership/referral practices. Eligible pantries were: food bank partners, open at least 1/week for public distribution, and in high-poverty cities. We collected surveys from 27 of 35 eligible sites in 2024. We used descriptive statistics to summarize NEFPAT+ objective outcomes and conducted exploratory analyses to assess differences for specific objective results. Mann‒Whitney U tests and Kruskal‒Wallis tests were used to compare NEFPAT+ scores and objective results by pantry setting and size, respectively. RESULTS: Surveyed food pantries served a median of 450 households per month (range: 50 − 3,000). 52% were located in faith-based settings and 48% in other community settings. The median NEFPAT+ score was 39 out of 95 points (range: 8–61), indicating most pantries were classified as Silver (37%) or Gold (33%). Overall, 81% of pantries made nutritious foods easy to reach/identify, and 63% used client choice. Only 33% reported using certain marketing strategies. Few used local food sourcing or point-of-decision signage. Most pantries (78%) reported having external partnerships, and 74% referred clients to a local resource. Pantries located in other community settings used nutrition-focused strategies (i.e., client choice, healthy eating signage/recipes) and referred/partnered with community organizations (i.e., food, healthcare, employment assistance) at a significantly higher rate compared to pantries in faith-based settings. We did not find statistically significant differences by pantry size. CONCLUSIONS: This community-engaged study reveals how food pantries may function as multifaceted community health hubs for health promotion interventions. Results show both significant organizational strengths and targeted opportunities for improvement, with strategy use varying by food pantry setting type. Future research should evaluate whether pantries in faith-based settings need additional support, engagement, or technical assistance to promote community health in marginalized communities.

BMC public healthread the source →

COVID-19 pandemic effects on health worker's mental health: Systematic review and meta-analysis.

Background: Healthcare workers (HCWs) exposed to coronavirus 19 (COVID-19) are at high risk of developing mental health concerns across several domains. The aim of this study is to determine the updated, global frequency of these outcomes. Methods: A multistep literature search was performed from database inception until March 1, 2021. PRISMA/MOOSE-compliant systematic review and PROSPERO protocol were used to identify studies reporting on depression, anxiety, acute stress, post-traumatic symptoms, insomnia, and burnout in HCWs exposed to COVID-19. A quantitative meta-analysis with random effects was conducted to analyze the proportion rate of the mental health disorders. Sensitivity analyses were performed to investigate the effect of the different continents and scales. Meta-regression analyses were conducted to examine the effect of gender, age, and work position. Results: 239 articles were included (n = 271,319 HCWs, mean age = 36.08 ± 8.33 (66.99% female). 33% HCWs exposed to COVID-19 reported depressive symptoms (95% confidence intervals [CI] = 28-38%), 42% anxiety features (95% CI = 35-48), 40% acute stress (95% CI = 32-47), 32% post-traumatic symptoms (95% CI = 26-37%), 42% insomnia (95% CI = 36-48), 37% burnout (95% CI = 31-42). Sensitivity analyses did not show statistically significant differences. Meta-regressions found a statistically significant lower prevalence of post-traumatic symptoms in Asia. Conclusions: HCWs exposed to COVID-19 were found to have a significant prevalence of mental health concerns in all domains analyzed. The effects of COVID-19 on HCWs' mental health could be underestimated and the future consequences dismissed.

European psychiatry : the journal of the Association of European Psychiatrists · meta-analysis · 170 citationsread the source →

Educational and psychological interventions for managing atopic dermatitis (eczema).

Background: Atopic dermatitis (eczema), can have a significant impact on well-being and quality of life for affected people and their families. Standard treatment is avoidance of triggers or irritants and regular application of emollients and topical steroids or calcineurin inhibitors. Thorough physical and psychological assessment is central to good-quality treatment. Overcoming barriers to provision of holistic treatment in dermatological practice is dependent on evaluation of the efficacy and economics of both psychological and educational interventions in this participant group. This review is based on a previous Cochrane review published in 2014, and now includes adults as well as children. Objectives: To assess the clinical outcomes of educational and psychological interventions in children and adults with atopic dermatitis (eczema) and to summarise the availability and principal findings of relevant economic evaluations. Search methods: We searched the Cochrane Skin Specialised Register, CENTRAL, MEDLINE, Embase, APA PsycINFO and two trials registers up to March 2023. We checked the reference lists of included studies and related systematic reviews for further references to relevant randomised controlled trials (RCTs) and contacted experts in the field to identify additional studies. We searched NHS Economic Evaluation Database, MEDLINE and Embase for economic evaluations on 8 June 2022. Selection criteria: Randomised, cluster-randomised and cross-over RCTs that assess educational and psychological interventions for treating eczema in children and adults. Data collection and analysis: We used standard Cochrane methods, with GRADE to assess the certainty of the evidence for each outcome. Primary outcomes were reduction in disease severity, as measured by clinical signs, patient-reported symptoms and improvement in health-related quality-of-life (HRQoL) measures. Secondary outcomes were improvement in long-term control of symptoms, improvement in psychological well-being, improvement in standard treatment concordance and adverse events. We assessed short- (up to 16 weeks after treatment) and long-term time points (more than 16 weeks). Main results: We included 37 trials (6170 participants). Most trials were conducted in high-income countries (34/37), in outpatient settings (25/37). We judged three trials to be low risk of bias across all domains. Fifteen trials had a high risk of bias in at least one domain, mostly due to bias in measurement of the outcome. Trials assessed interventions compared to standard care. Individual educational interventions may reduce short-term clinical signs (measured by SCORing Atopic Dermatitis (SCORAD); mean difference (MD) -5.70, 95% confidence interval (CI) -9.39 to -2.01; 1 trial, 30 participants; low-certainty evidence) but patient-reported symptoms, HRQoL, long-term eczema control and psychological well-being were not reported. Group education interventions probably reduce clinical signs (SCORAD) both in the short term (MD -9.66, 95% CI -19.04 to -0.29; 3 studies, 731 participants; moderate-certainty evidence) and the long term (MD -7.22, 95% CI -11.01 to -3.43; 3 studies, 1424 participants; moderate-certainty evidence) and probably reduce long-term patient-reported symptoms (SMD -0.47 95% CI -0.60 to -0.33; 2 studies, 908 participants; moderate-certainty evidence). They may slightly improve short-term HRQoL (SMD -0.19, 95% CI -0.36 to -0.01; 4 studies, 746 participants; low-certainty evidence), but may make little or no difference to short-term psychological well-being (Perceived Stress Scale (PSS); MD -2.47, 95% CI -5.16 to 0.22; 1 study, 80 participants; low-certainty evidence). Long-term eczema control was not reported. We don't know whether technology-mediated educational interventions could improve short-term clinical signs (SCORAD; 1 study; 29 participants; very low-certainty evidence). They may have little or no effect on short-term patient-reported symptoms (Patient Oriented Eczema Measure (POEM); MD -0.76, 95% CI -1.84 to 0.33; 2 studies; 195 participants; low-certainty evidence) and probably have little or no effect on short-term HRQoL (MD 0, 95% CI -0.03 to 0.03; 2 studies, 430 participants; moderate-certainty evidence). Technology-mediated education interventions probably slightly improve long-term eczema control (Recap of atopic eczema (RECAP); MD -1.5, 95% CI -3.13 to 0.13; 1 study, 232 participants; moderate-certainty evidence), and may improve short-term psychological well-being (MD -1.78, 95% CI -2.13 to -1.43; 1 study, 24 participants; low-certainty evidence). Habit reversal treatment may reduce short-term clinical signs (SCORAD; MD -6.57, 95% CI -13.04 to -0.1; 1 study, 33 participants; low-certainty evidence) but we are uncertain about any effects on short-term HRQoL (Children's Dermatology Life Quality Index (CDLQI); 1 study, 30 participants; very low-certainty evidence). Patient-reported symptoms, long-term eczema control and psychological well-being were not reported. We are uncertain whether arousal reduction therapy interventions could improve short-term clinical signs (Eczema Area and Severity Index (EASI); 1 study, 24 participants; very low-certainty evidence) or patient-reported symptoms (visual analogue scale (VAS); 1 study, 18 participants; very low-certainty evidence). Arousal reduction therapy may improve short-term HRQoL (Dermatitis Family Impact (DFI); MD -2.1, 95% CI -4.41 to 0.21; 1 study, 91 participants; low-certainty evidence) and psychological well-being (PSS; MD -1.2, 95% CI -3.38 to 0.98; 1 study, 91 participants; low-certainty evidence). Long-term eczema control was not reported. No studies reported standard care compared with self-help psychological interventions, psychological therapies or printed education; or adverse events. We identified two health economic studies. One found that a 12-week, technology-mediated, educational-support programme may be cost neutral. The other found that a nurse practitioner group-education intervention may have lower costs than standard care provided by a dermatologist, with comparable effectiveness. Authors' conclusions: In-person, individual education, as an adjunct to conventional topical therapy, may reduce short-term eczema signs compared to standard care, but there is no information on eczema symptoms, quality of life or long-term outcomes. Group education probably reduces eczema signs and symptoms in the long term and may also improve quality of life in the short term. Favourable effects were also reported for technology-mediated education, habit reversal treatment and arousal reduction therapy. All favourable effects are of uncertain clinical significance, since they may not exceed the minimal clinically important difference (MCID) for the outcome measures used (MCID 8.7 points for SCORAD, 3.4 points for POEM). We found no trials of self-help psychological interventions, psychological therapies or printed education. Future trials should include more diverse populations, address shared priorities, evaluate long-term outcomes and ensure patients are involved in trial design.

The Cochrane database of systematic reviews · meta-analysis · 14 citationsread the source →

Effect of psychological therapy on disease activity, psychological comorbidity, and quality of life in inflammatory bowel disease: a systematic review and meta-analysis.

Background: Inflammatory bowel disease is associated with psychological comorbidity and impaired quality of life. Psychological comorbidity could affect the natural history of inflammatory bowel disease. Psychological therapies might therefore have beneficial effects on disease activity, mood, and quality of life in patients with inflammatory bowel disease. We did a systematic review and meta-analysis examining these issues. Methods: In this systematic review and meta-analysis, we searched MEDLINE, Embase, Embase Classic, PsychINFO, and the Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials for articles published between 1947 and Sept 22, 2016. Randomised controlled trials (RCTs) recruiting patients with inflammatory bowel disease aged at least 16 years that compared psychological therapy with a control intervention or usual treatment were eligible. We pooled dichotomous data to obtain relative risks of induction of remission in active disease or prevention of relapse of quiescent disease, with 95% CIs. We pooled continuous data to estimate standardised mean differences in disease activity indices, anxiety, depression, perceived stress, and quality-of-life scores in patients dichotomised into those with clinically active or quiescent disease, with 95% CIs. We extracted data from published reports and contacted the original investigators of studies for which the required data were not available. We pooled all data using a random-effects model. Findings: The search identified 1824 studies, with 14 RCTs of 1196 patients eligible for inclusion. The relative risk of relapse of quiescent inflammatory bowel disease with psychological therapy versus control was 0·98 (95% CI 0·77-1·24; p=0·87; I2=50%; six trials; 518 patients). We observed a significant difference in depression scores (standardised mean difference -0·17 [-0·33 to -0·01]; p=0·04; I2=0%; seven trials; 605 patients) and quality of life (0·30 [0·07-0·52]; p=0·01; I2=42%; nine trials; 578 patients) with psychological therapy versus control at the end of therapy for patients with quiescent disease. However, these beneficial effects were lost at final point of follow-up (depression scores -0·11 [-0·27 to 0·05], p=0·17, I2=0%, eight trials, 593 patients; quality of life 0·15 [-0·05 to 0·34], p=0·14, I2=22%, ten trials, 577 patients). When we assessed the effect of individual physiological therapies on quality of life, only cognitive behavioural therapy had any significant beneficial effect (0·37 [0·02-0·72]). We noted no effect on disease activity indices or other psychological wellbeing scores when compared with control in patients with quiescent disease. Dichotomous data for induction of remission and continuous data for change in clinical disease activity indices, depression, anxiety, and perceived stress scores were only reported in one RCT of patients with active disease. Quality of life was assessed in two RCTs of patients with active disease, but was not significantly different between intervention and control groups (0·27 [-0·05 to 0·59]). Interpretation: Psychological therapies, and cognitive behavioural therapy in particular, might have small short-term beneficial effects on depression scores and quality of life in patients with inflammatory bowel disease. Further RCTs of these interventions in patients with coexistent psychological distress are required. Funding: None.

The lancet. Gastroenterology & hepatology · meta-analysis · 163 citationsread the source →

Psychological therapies for women who experience intimate partner violence.

Background: Intimate partner violence (IPV) against women is prevalent and strongly associated with mental health problems. Women experiencing IPV attend health services frequently for mental health problems. The World Health Organization recommends that women who have experienced IPV and have a mental health diagnosis should receive evidence-based mental health treatments. However, it is not known if psychological therapies work for women in the context of IPV and whether they cause harm. Objectives: To assess the effectiveness of psychological therapies for women who experience IPV on the primary outcomes of depression, self-efficacy and an indicator of harm (dropouts) at six- to 12-months' follow-up, and on secondary outcomes of other mental health symptoms, anxiety, quality of life, re-exposure to IPV, safety planning and behaviours, use of healthcare and IPV services, and social support. Search methods: We searched the Cochrane Common Mental Disorders Controlled Trials Register (CCMDCTR), CENTRAL, MEDLINE, Embase, CINAHL, PsycINFO, and three other databases, to the end of October 2019. We also searched international trials registries to identify unpublished or ongoing trials and handsearched selected journals, reference lists of included trials and grey literature. Selection criteria: We included randomised controlled trials (RCTs), quasi-RCTs, cluster-RCTs and cross-over trials of psychological therapies with women aged 16 years and older who self-reported recent or lifetime experience of IPV. We included trials if women also experienced co-existing mental health diagnoses or substance abuse issues, or both. Psychological therapies included a wide range of interventions that targeted cognition, motivation and behaviour compared with usual care, no treatment, delayed or minimal interventions. We classified psychological therapies according to Cochrane Common Mental Disorders's psychological therapies list. Data collection and analysis: Two review authors extracted data and undertook 'Risk of Bias' assessment. Treatment effects were compared between experimental and comparator interventions at short-term (up to six months post-baseline), medium-term (six to under 12 months, primary outcome time point), and long-term follow-up (12 months and above). We used standardised mean difference (SMD) for continuous and odds ratio (OR) for dichotomous outcomes, and used random-effects meta-analysis, due to high heterogeneity across trials. Main results: We included 33 psychological trials involving 5517 women randomly assigned to experimental (2798 women, 51%) and comparator interventions (2719 women, 49%). Psychological therapies included 11 integrative therapies, nine humanistic therapies, six cognitive behavioural therapy, four third-wave cognitive behavioural therapies and three other psychologically-orientated interventions. There were no trials classified as psychodynamic therapies. Most trials were from high-income countries (19 in USA, three in Iran, two each in Australia and Greece, and one trial each in China, India, Kenya, Nigeria, Pakistan, Spain and UK), among women recruited from healthcare, community, shelter or refuge settings, or a combination of any or all of these. Psychological therapies were mostly delivered face-to-face (28 trials), but varied by length of treatment (two to 50 sessions) and staff delivering therapies (social workers, nurses, psychologists, community health workers, family doctors, researchers). The average sample size was 82 women (14 to 479), aged 37 years on average, and 66% were unemployed. Half of the women were married or living with a partner and just over half of the participants had experienced IPV in the last 12 months (17 trials), 6% in the past two years (two trials) and 42% during their lifetime (14 trials). Whilst 20 trials (61%) described reliable low-risk random-sampling strategies, only 12 trials (36%) described reliable procedures to conceal the allocation of participant status. While 19 trials measured women's depression, only four trials measured depression as a continuous outcome at medium-term follow-up. These showed a probable beneficial effect of psychological therapies in reducing depression (SMD -0.24, 95% CI -0.47 to -0.01; four trials, 600 women; moderate-certainty evidence). However, for self-efficacy, there may be no evidence of a difference between groups (SMD -0.12, 95% CI -0.33 to 0.09; one trial with medium-term follow-up data, 346 women; low-certainty evidence). Further, there may be no difference between the number of women who dropped out from the experimental or comparator intervention groups, an indicator of no harm (OR 1.04, 95% CI 0.75 to 1.44; five trials with medium-term follow-up data, 840 women; low-certainty evidence). Although no trials reported adverse events from psychological therapies or participation in the trial, only one trial measured harm outcomes using a validated scale. For secondary outcomes, trials measured anxiety only at short-term follow-up, showing that psychological therapies may reduce anxiety symptoms (SMD -0.96, 95% CI -1.29 to -0.63; four trials, 158 women; low-certainty evidence). However, within medium-term follow-up, low-certainty evidence revealed that there may be no evidence between groups for the outcomes safety planning (SMD 0.04, 95% CI -0.18 to 0.25; one trial, 337 women), post-traumatic stress disorder (SMD -0.24, 95% CI -0.54 to 0.06; four trials, 484 women) or re-exposure to any form of IPV (SMD 0.03, 95% CI -0.14 to 0.2; two trials, 547 women). Authors' conclusions: There is evidence that for women who experience IPV, psychological therapies probably reduce depression and may reduce anxiety. However, we are uncertain whether psychological therapies improve other outcomes (self-efficacy, post-traumatic stress disorder, re-exposure to IPV, safety planning) and there are limited data on harm. Thus, while psychological therapies probably improve emotional health, it is unclear if women's ongoing needs for safety, support and holistic healing from complex trauma are addressed by this approach. There is a need for more interventions focused on trauma approaches and more rigorous trials (with consistent outcomes at similar follow-up time points), as we were unable to synthesise much of the research.

The Cochrane database of systematic reviews · meta-analysis · 78 citationsread the source →

Skin-to-skin care for procedural pain in neonates.

Background: Skin-to-skin care (SSC), often referred to as 'kangaroo care' (KC) due to its similarity with marsupial behaviour of ventral maternal-infant contact, is one non-pharmacological intervention for pain control in infants. Objectives: The primary objectives were to determine the effect of SSC alone on pain from medical or nursing procedures in neonates compared to no intervention, sucrose or other analgesics, or additions to simple SSC such as rocking; and to determine the effects of the amount of SSC (duration in minutes), method of administration (e.g. who provided the SSC) of SSC in reducing pain from medical or nursing procedures in neonatesThe secondary objectives were to determine the safety of SSC care for relieving procedural pain in infants; and to compare the SSC effect in different postmenstrual age subgroups of infants. Search methods: For this update, we used the standard search strategy of the Cochrane Neonatal Review group to search the Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL; 2016, Issue 1); MEDLINE via PubMed (1966 to 25 February 2016); Embase (1980 to 25 February 2016); and CINAHL (1982 to 25 February 2016). We also searched clinical trials' databases, conference proceedings, and the reference lists of retrieved articles for randomized controlled trials and quasi-randomized trials. Selection criteria: Studies with randomisation or quasi-randomisation, double- or single-blinded, involving term infants (≥ 37 completed weeks' postmenstrual age (PMA) to a maximum of 44 weeks' PMA and preterm infants (< 37 completed weeks PMA) receiving SSC for painful procedures conducted by healthcare professionals. Data collection and analysis: The main outcome measures were physiological or behavioural pain indicators and composite pain scores. A mean difference (MD) with 95% confidence interval (CI) using a fixed-effect model was reported for continuous outcome measures. We included variations on type of tissue-damaging procedure, provider of care, and duration of SSC. Main results: Twenty-five studies (n = 2001 infants) were included. Nineteen studies (n = 1065) used heel lance as the painful procedure, one study combined venepuncture and heel stick (n = 50), three used intramuscular injection (n = 776), one used 'vaccination' (n = 60), and one used tape removal (n = 50). The studies were generally strong and had low or uncertain risk of bias. Blinding of the intervention was not possible, making them subject to high risk, depending on the method of scoring outcomes. Seventeen studies (n = 810) compared SSC to a no-treatment control. Although 15 studies measured heart rate during painful procedures, data from only five studies (n = 161) could be combined for a mean difference (MD) of -10.78 beats per minute (95% CI -13.63 to -7.93) favouring SSC. Meta-analysis of four studies (n = 120) showed no difference in heart rate following the painful procedure (MD 0.08, 95% CI -4.39 to 4.55). Two studies (n = 38) reported heart rate variability with no significant differences. Two studies (n = 101) in a meta-analysis on oxygen saturation at 30 and 60 seconds following the painful procedure did not show a difference. Duration of crying meta-analysis was performed on four studies (n = 133): two (n = 33) investigated response to heel lance (MD = -34.16, 95% CI -42.86 to -25.45), and two (n = 100) following IM injection (MD = -8.83, 95% CI -14.63 to -3.02), favouring SSC. Five studies, one consisting of two substudies (n = 267), used the Premature Infant Pain Profile (PIPP) as a primary outcome, which favoured SCC at 30 seconds (MD -3.21, 95% CI -3.94 to -2.47), at 60 seconds (3 studies; n = 156) (MD -1.64, 95% CI -2.86 to -0.43), and at 90 seconds (n = 156) (MD -1.28, 95% CI -2.53 to -0.04); but at 120 seconds there was no difference (n = 156) (MD 0.07, 95% CI -1.11 to 1.25). No studies on return of heart rate to baseline level, cortisol levels, and facial actions could be combined for meta-analysis findings. Eight studies compared SSC to another intervention with or without a no-treatment control. Two cross-over studies (n = 80) compared mother versus other provider (father, another female) on PIPP scores at 30, 60, 90, and 120 seconds with no significant difference. When SSC was compared to other interventions, there were not enough similar studies to pool results in an analysis. One study compared SSC (n = 640) with and without dextrose and found that the combination was most effective and that SSC alone was more effective than dextrose alone. Similarly, in another study SSC was more effective than oral glucose for heart rate (n = 95). SSC either in combination with breastfeeding or alone was favoured over a no-treatment control, but not different to breastfeeding. One study compared SSC alone and in combination with both sucrose and breastfeeding on heart rate (HR), NIPS scores, and crying time (n = 127). The combinations were more effective than SSC alone for NIPS and crying. Expressed breast milk was compared to SSC in one study (n = 50) and found both equally effective on PIPP scores. There were not enough participants with similar outcomes and painful procedures to compare age groups or duration of SSC. No adverse events were reported in any of the studies. Authors' conclusions: SSC appears to be effective as measured by composite pain indicators with both physiological and behavioural indicators and, independently, using heart rate and crying time; and safe for a single painful procedure. Purely behavioural indicators tended to favour SSC but with facial actions there is greater possibility of observers not being blinded. Physiological indicators were mixed although the common measure of heart rate favoured SSC. Two studies compared mother-providers to others, with non-significant results. There was more heterogeneity in the studies with behavioural or composite outcomes. There is a need for replication studies that use similar, clearly defined outcomes. Studies examining optimal duration of SSC, gestational age groups, repeated use, and long-term effects of SSC are needed. Of interest would be to study synergistic effects of SSC with other interventions.

The Cochrane database of systematic reviews · meta-analysis · 158 citationsread the source →

Depression and anxiety in patients with hepatitis C: prevalence, detection rates and risk factors.

Objective: We examined a group of patients awaiting interferon treatment for hepatitis C to estimate the prevalence and detection rates of and risk factors for mood disorders. Methods: The Structured Clinical Interview for DSM-IV Axis I Disorders: Clinician Version was used to detect psychiatric disorder. Self-completion instruments were used to rate symptom severity, subjective cognitive function, work and social adjustment, stigma, acceptance of illness and treatment satisfaction. Results: The 90 participants included 23 women (26%); 33 (37%) had contracted hepatitis C iatrogenically, 42 (47%) through injecting drug use and the remainder (17%) were of unknown origin. There was a 28% 1-month prevalence of depressive disorders, 72% of whom were previously undiagnosed, and a 24% prevalence of anxiety disorders, 86% previously undiagnosed. Current methadone maintenance was strongly associated with risk of depression (odds ratio, 5.0; 95% CI, 1.08-23.0). After adjustment for age and sex, depression was associated with poorer work and social adjustment, lower acceptance of illness, higher illness stigma, poorer reported thinking and concentration, and higher levels of subjective physical symptoms (all P < .05). Anxiety disorders were uncorrelated with any risk factor. Conclusions: Depression and anxiety have high prevalences in hepatitis C, and are largely undetected and treated. Depression, but not anxiety, is associated with adverse experiences of illness.

General hospital psychiatry · 129 citationsread the source →

Pharmacological and electronic cigarette interventions for smoking cessation in adults: component network meta-analyses.

Background: Tobacco smoking is the leading preventable cause of death and disease worldwide. Stopping smoking can reduce this harm and many people would like to stop. There are a number of medicines licenced to help people quit globally, and e-cigarettes are used for this purpose in many countries. Typically treatments work by reducing cravings to smoke, thus aiding initial abstinence and preventing relapse. More information on comparative effects of these treatments is needed to inform treatment decisions and policies. Objectives: To investigate the comparative benefits, harms and tolerability of different smoking cessation pharmacotherapies and e-cigarettes, when used to help people stop smoking tobacco. Search methods: We identified studies from recent updates of Cochrane Reviews investigating our interventions of interest. We updated the searches for each review using the Cochrane Tobacco Addiction Group (TAG) specialised register to 29 April 2022. Selection criteria: We included randomised controlled trials (RCTs), cluster-RCTs and factorial RCTs, which measured smoking cessation at six months or longer, recruited adults who smoked combustible cigarettes at enrolment (excluding pregnant people) and randomised them to approved pharmacotherapies and technologies used for smoking cessation worldwide (varenicline, cytisine, nortriptyline, bupropion, nicotine replacement therapy (NRT) and e-cigarettes) versus no pharmacological intervention, placebo (control) or another approved pharmacotherapy. Studies providing co-interventions (e.g. behavioural support) were eligible if the co-intervention was provided equally to study arms. Data collection and analysis: We followed standard Cochrane methods for screening, data extraction and risk of bias (RoB) assessment (using the RoB 1 tool). Primary outcome measures were smoking cessation at six months or longer, and the number of people reporting serious adverse events (SAEs). We also measured withdrawals due to treatment. We used Bayesian component network meta-analyses (cNMA) to examine intervention type, delivery mode, dose, duration, timing in relation to quit day and tapering of nicotine dose, using odds ratios (OR) and 95% credibility intervals (CrIs). We calculated an effect estimate for combination NRT using an additive model. We evaluated the influence of population and study characteristics, provision of behavioural support and control arm rates using meta-regression. We evaluated certainty using GRADE. Main results: Of our 332 eligible RCTs, 319 (835 study arms, 157,179 participants) provided sufficient data to be included in our cNMA. Of these, we judged 51 to be at low risk of bias overall, 104 at high risk and 164 at unclear risk, and 118 reported pharmaceutical or e-cigarette/tobacco industry funding. Removing studies at high risk of bias did not change our interpretation of the results. Benefits We found high-certainty evidence that nicotine e-cigarettes (OR 2.37, 95% CrI 1.73 to 3.24; 16 RCTs, 3828 participants), varenicline (OR 2.33, 95% CrI 2.02 to 2.68; 67 RCTs, 16,430 participants) and cytisine (OR 2.21, 95% CrI 1.66 to 2.97; 7 RCTs, 3848 participants) were associated with higher quit rates than control. In absolute terms, this might lead to an additional eight (95% CrI 4 to 13), eight (95% CrI 6 to 10) and seven additional quitters per 100 (95% CrI 4 to 12), respectively. These interventions appeared to be more effective than the other interventions apart from combination NRT (patch and a fast-acting form of NRT), which had a lower point estimate (calculated additive effect) but overlapping 95% CrIs (OR 1.93, 95% CrI 1.61 to 2.34). There was also high-certainty evidence that nicotine patch alone (OR 1.37, 95% CrI 1.20 to 1.56; 105 RCTs, 37,319 participants), fast-acting NRT alone (OR 1.41, 95% CrI 1.29 to 1.55; 120 RCTs, 31,756 participants) and bupropion (OR 1.43, 95% CrI 1.26 to 1.62; 71 RCTs, 14,759 participants) were more effective than control, resulting in two (95% CrI 1 to 3), three (95% CrI 2 to 3) and three (95% CrI 2 to 4) additional quitters per 100 respectively. Nortriptyline is probably associated with higher quit rates than control (OR 1.35, 95% CrI 1.02 to 1.81; 10 RCTs, 1290 participants; moderate-certainty evidence), resulting in two (CrI 0 to 5) additional quitters per 100. Non-nicotine/placebo e-cigarettes (OR 1.16, 95% CrI 0.74 to 1.80; 8 RCTs, 1094 participants; low-certainty evidence), equating to one additional quitter (95% CrI -2 to 5), had point estimates favouring the intervention over control, but CrIs encompassed the potential for no difference and harm. There was low-certainty evidence that tapering the dose of NRT prior to stopping treatment may improve effectiveness; however, 95% CrIs also incorporated the null (OR 1.14, 95% CrI 1.00 to 1.29; 111 RCTs, 33,156 participants). This might lead to an additional one quitter per 100 (95% CrI 0 to 2). Harms There were insufficient data to include nortriptyline and non-nicotine EC in the final SAE model. Overall rates of SAEs for the remaining treatments were low (average 3%). Low-certainty evidence did not show a clear difference in the number of people reporting SAEs for nicotine e-cigarettes, varenicline, cytisine or NRT when compared to no pharmacotherapy/e-cigarettes or placebo. Bupropion may slightly increase rates of SAEs, although the CrI also incorporated no difference (moderate certainty). In absolute terms bupropion may cause one more person in 100 to experience an SAE (95% CrI 0 to 2). Authors' conclusions: The most effective interventions were nicotine e-cigarettes, varenicline and cytisine (all high certainty), as well as combination NRT (additive effect, certainty not rated). There was also high-certainty evidence for the effectiveness of nicotine patch, fast-acting NRT and bupropion. Less certain evidence of benefit was present for nortriptyline (moderate certainty), non-nicotine e-cigarettes and tapering of nicotine dose (both low certainty). There was moderate-certainty evidence that bupropion may slightly increase the frequency of SAEs, although there was also the possibility of no increased risk. There was no clear evidence that any other tested interventions increased SAEs. Overall, SAE data were sparse with very low numbers of SAEs, and so further evidence may change our interpretation and certainty. Future studies should report SAEs to strengthen certainty in this outcome. More head-to-head comparisons of the most effective interventions are needed, as are tests of combinations of these. Future work should unify data from behavioural and pharmacological interventions to inform approaches to combined support for smoking cessation.

The Cochrane database of systematic reviews · systematic review · 114 citationsread the source →

Effects of length of abstinence on decision-making and craving in methamphetamine abusers.

Rationale: The majority of drug abusers are incapable of sustaining abstinence over any length of time. Accumulating evidence has linked intense and involuntary craving, Impulsive decision-making and mood disturbances to risk for relapse. However, little is known about temporal changes of these neuropsychological functions in methamphetamine (METH)-dependent individuals. Objectives: To investigate the effect of length of abstinence on decision-making, craving (baseline and cue-induced), and emotional state in METH-addicted individuals. Methods: In this cross-sectional study, 183 adult METH-dependent patients at an addiction rehabilitation center who were abstinent for 6 days (n = 37), 14 days (n = 33), 1 month (n = 31), 3 months (n = 30), 6 months (n = 26), or 1 year (n = 30) and 39 healthy subjects were administered the Iowa Gambling Task (IGT) to assess decision-making performance. Depression, anxiety, and impulsivity were also examined. One hundred thirty-nine METH abusers who were abstinent for the aforementioned times then underwent a cue session, and subjective and physiological measures were assessed. Results: METH dependent individuals who were abstinent for longer periods of time exhibited better decision-making than those who were abstinent for shorter periods of time. And self-reported emotional symptoms improved with abstinence. METH abusers' ratings of craving decreased with the duration of abstinence, while cue-induced craving increased until 3 months of abstinence and decreased at 6 months and 1 year of abstinence. Conclusions: We present time-dependent alterations in decision-making, emotional state, and the incubation of cue-induced craving in METH-dependent individuals, which might have significant clinical implications for the prevention of relapse.

PloS one · 158 citationsread the source →

The EMPOWER blended digital intervention for relapse prevention in schizophrenia: a feasibility cluster randomised controlled trial in Scotland and Australia.

Background: Early warning signs monitoring by service users with schizophrenia has shown promise in preventing relapse but the quality of evidence is low. We aimed to establish the feasibility of undertaking a definitive randomised controlled trial to determine the effectiveness of a blended digital intervention for relapse prevention in schizophrenia. Methods: This multicentre, feasibility, cluster randomised controlled trial aimed to compare Early signs Monitoring to Prevent relapse in psychosis and prOmote Well-being, Engagement, and Recovery (EMPOWER) with treatment as usual in community mental health services (CMHS) in Glasgow and Melbourne. CMHS were the unit of randomisation, selected on the basis of those that probably had five or more care coordinators willing to participate. Participants were eligible if they were older than 16 years, had a schizophrenia or related diagnosis confirmed via case records, were able to provide informed consent, had contact with CMHS, and had had a relapse within the previous 2 years. Participants were randomised within stratified clusters to EMPOWER or to continue their usual approach to care. EMPOWER blended a smartphone for active monitoring of early warning signs with peer support to promote self-management and clinical triage to promote access to relapse prevention. Main outcomes were feasibility, acceptability, usability, and safety, which was assessed through face-to-face interviews. App usage was assessed via the smartphone and self-report. Primary end point was 12 months. Participants, research assistants and other team members involved in delivering the intervention were not masked to treatment conditions. Assessment of relapse was done by an independent adjudication panel masked to randomisation group. The study is registered at ISRCTN (99559262). Findings: We identified and randomised eight CMHS (six in Glasgow and two in Melbourne) comprising 47 care coordinators. We recruited 86 service users between Jan 19 and Aug 8, 2018; 73 were randomised (42 [58%] to EMPOWER and 31 [42%] to treatment as usual). There were 37 (51%) men and 36 (49%) women. At 12 months, main outcomes were collected for 32 (76%) of service users in the EMPOWER group and 30 (97%) of service users in the treatment as usual group. Of those randomised to EMPOWER, 30 (71%) met our a priori criterion of more than 33% adherence to daily monitoring that assumed feasibility. Median time to discontinuation of these participants was 31·5 weeks (SD 14·5). There were 29 adverse events in the EMPOWER group and 25 adverse events in the treatment as usual group. There were 13 app-related adverse events, affecting 11 people, one of which was serious. Fear of relapse was lower in the EMPOWER group than in the treatment as usual group at 12 months (mean difference -7·53 (95% CI -14·45 to 0·60; Cohen's d -0·53). Interpretation: A trial of digital technology to monitor early warning signs blended with peer support and clinical triage to detect and prevent relapse appears to be feasible, safe, and acceptable. A further main trial is merited. Funding: UK National Institute for Health Research Health Technology Assessment programme and the Australian National Health and Medical Research Council.

The lancet. Psychiatry · randomised controlled trial · 50 citationsread the source →

Trajectories of relapse in randomised, placebo-controlled trials of treatment discontinuation in major depressive disorder: an individual patient-level data meta-analysis.

Background: Understanding patterns of relapse in patients who respond to antidepressant treatment can inform strategies for prevention of relapse. We aimed to identify distinct trajectories of depression severity, assess whether similar or different trajectory classes exist for patients who continued or discontinued active treatment, and test whether clinical predictors of trajectory class membership exist using pooled data from clinical trials. Methods: We analysed individual patient data from four double-blind discontinuation clinical trials of duloxetine or fluoxetine versus placebo in major depression from before 2012 (n=1462). We modelled trajectories of relapse up to 26 weeks during double-blind treatment. Trajectories of depression severity, as measured by the Hamilton Depression Rating Scale score, were identified in the entire sample, and separately in groups in which antidepressants had been continued or discontinued, using growth mixture models. Predictors of trajectory class membership were assessed with weighted logistic regression. Findings: We identified similar relapse trajectories and two trajectories of stable depression scores in the normal range on active medication and on placebo. Active treatment significantly lowered the odds of membership in the relapse trajectory (odds ratio 0·47, 95% CI 0·37-0·61), whereas female sex (1·56, 1·23-2·06), shorter length of time with clinical response by 1 week (1·10, 1·06-1·15), and higher Clinical Global Impression score at baseline (1·28, 1·01-1·62) increased the odds. Overall, the protective effect of antidepressant medication relative to placebo on the risk of being classified as a relapser was about 13% (33% vs 46%). Interpretation: The existence of similar relapse trajectories on active medication and on placebo suggests that there is no specific relapse signature associated with antidepressant discontinuation. Furthermore, continued treatment offers only modest protection against relapse. These data highlight the need to incorporate treatment strategies that prevent relapse as part of the treatment of depression. Funding: National Institutes of Health, the US Department of Veterans Affairs Alcohol Research Center, and National Center for Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder.

The lancet. Psychiatry · randomised controlled trial · 49 citationsread the source →

Psychological morbidity and quality of life of ethnic minority patients with cancer: a systematic review and meta-analysis.

Background: Ethnic minority is associated with higher cancer incidence and poorer survival than is being in the majority group. We did a systematic review and meta-analysis to assess whether psychological morbidity and health-related quality of life (HRQoL) were affected by minority status. Methods: We searched Medline, AMED, PsycINFO, Embase, CENTRAL, CINAHL, PubMed, Sociological Abstracts, and Web of Science for English-language articles published between Jan 1, 1995, and October, 2009. Articles were eligible if they reported original data on anxiety, depression, distress (for psychological morbidity), or HRQoL in minority and majority cancer patients or survivors. Minority status was defined as being an immigrant or having an ethnic, linguistic, or religious background different to the majority of the population in the country where the research was done. We excluded African Americans and indigenous groups. Eligible articles were rated for quality of reporting, external validity, internal validity, sample size, and power. Each quality criterion was rated independently by two reviewers until inter-rater reliability was achieved. In a meta-analysis we compared mean scores adjusted for socioeconomic status and other sociodemographic and clinical variables, where available. Effect sizes greater than 0·5 and 95% CI that included 0·5 or -0·5 were deemed clinically important, with negative values indicating worse outcomes in minority patients. We assessed publication bias by estimating the number of potential unpublished studies and the number of non-signficant studies with p=0·05 required to produce a non-significant overall result. Findings: We identified 21 eligible articles that included 18 datasets collected in the USA and one in each of Canada, Romania, and the UK. Ethnic minority groups were Hispanic, Asian or Pacific Islander, or Hungarian (one dataset). Overall, we found minority versus majority groups to have significantly worse distress (mean difference -0·37, 95% CI -0·46 to -0·28; p<0·0001), depression (-0·23, -0·36 to -0·11; p=0·0003), and overall HRQoL (-0·33, -0·58 to -0·07; p=0·013). Further analyses found disparities to be specific to Hispanic patients in the USA, in whom poorer outcomes were consistent with potentially clinically important differences for distress (effect size -0·37, 95% CI -0·54 to -0·20; p<0·0001), social HRQoL (-0·45, -0·87 to -0·03; p=0·035), and overall HRQoL (-0·49, -0·78 to -0.20; p=0·0008). Results were significantly heterogeneous for overall HRQoL and all domains. Tests for interaction, for adjusted versus unadjusted and comparisons of high-quality, medium-quality, and low-quality articles, were generally non-significant, which suggests no bias. We found no evidence of any substantive publication bias. Interpretation: Hispanic cancer patients in the USA, but not other ethnic minority groups, report significantly worse distress, depression, social HRQoL, and overall HRQoL than do majority patients, of which all but depression might be clinically important. Heterogeneous results might, however, have limited the interpretation. Data for other minority groups and for anxiety are scarce. More studies are needed from outside the USA. Future reports should more clearly describe their minority group samples and analyses should control for clinical and sociodemographic variables known to predict outcomes. Understanding of why outcomes are poor in US Hispanic patients is needed to inform the targeting of interventions. Funding: Prince of Wales Hospital, Sydney, Australia.

The Lancet. Oncology · meta-analysis · 152 citationsread the source →

The Social Epidemiology of Human Immunodeficiency Virus/Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome

Social epidemiology is defined as the study of the distribution of health outcomes and their social determinants (1). It builds on the classic epidemiologic triangle of host, agent, and environment to focus explicitly on the role of social determinants in infectious disease transmission and progression. These determinants are the “features of and pathways by which societal conditions affect health” (2, p. 697). Early studies of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS) focused on individual characteristics and behaviors in determining HIV risk, an approach that Fee and Krieger (3) refer to as “biomedical individualism.” Biomedical individualism is the basis of risk factor epidemiology; by contrast, the social epidemiology perspective emphasizes social conditions as fundamental causes of disease (4) (table 1). Social epidemiologists examine how persons become exposed to risk or protective factors and under what social conditions individual risk factors are related to disease. Social factors are thus the focus of analysis and are not simply adjusted for as potentially confounding factors or used as proxies for unavailable individual-level data. Social factors are indeed critical to understanding nonuniform infectious disease patterns that emerge as a result of the dependent nature of disease transmission or the idea that an outcome in one person is dependent upon outcomes and exposures in others (5, 6). Contact patterns that enhance HIV/AIDS vulnerability may be conceptualized at multiple levels. Figure 1 distinguishes determinants of HIV/AIDS at three levels: individual, social, and structural. Individual factors include biologic, demographic, and behavioral risk factors that may influence the risk of HIV acquisition and disease progression. Social-level factors include critical pathways by which community and network structures link persons to society. These structures are central to understanding the diffusion and differential distribution of HIV/AIDS in population subgroups. Structural-level factors include social and economic factors, as well as laws and policies. These factors, in turn, affect HIV transmission dynamics and the differential distribution of HIV/AIDS. Infectious disease epidemiology provides models of the mechanisms through which social determinants affect HIV transmission (7). For example, the basic reproductive number of an infectious disease, R0 (8), describes secondary infections that arise from a primary infection. In the equation R0 = βCD, β is the probability of infection per contact, C is the number of contacts, and D is the duration of infectivity. The goal of intervention efforts is to reduce the empirical value of these terms by modifying the social conditions under which individual risk factors lead to disease. Examples of factors that affect the component terms of R0 in HIV epidemiology are presented in table 2. In this review, we present existing evidence linking social and structural determinants to HIV/AIDS. In addition, we discuss the implications of these findings for future social epidemiology research on HIV/AIDS as well as the design of more effective HIV/AIDS interventions. We searched the published literature to identify conceptual and empirical research reports on the social epidemiology of HIV/AIDS. Five databases were searched: PsycINFO (American Psychological Association, Washington, DC), PubMed (MEDLINE; National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Maryland), Social Science Citation Index (Web of Science; Thomson ISI, Stamford, Connecticut), Sociological Abstracts (CSA, Bethesda, Maryland), and Digital Dissertations (ProQuest; UMI, Ann Arbor, Michigan). Searches were designed to include the factors we specified in our framework as social or structural factors (figure 1). Searches were limited to published articles in the English language for the period 1981–2003. The following keywords were included in each search: AIDS/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome, HIV, and epidemiol*. Additional searches were conducted by using combinations of keywords listed in Appendix table 1 corresponding with our framework. We identified four categories of social-level factors of importance to HIV/AIDS epidemiology: cultural context, social networks, neighborhood effects, and social capital. Each uses different conceptual and methodological approaches to examine the effects of social forces on population HIV/AIDS vulnerability. Anthropologist Edward Tylor defined culture as “that complex whole which includes knowledge, belief, art, law, morals, custom, and any other capabilities and habits acquired by man as a member of society” (9, p. 1). Anthropologic and epidemiologic approaches may be integrated in a variety of ways to identify features of the social environment that affect HIV/AIDS risk. One way to explore how the social environment affects HIV/AIDS epidemiology is through the use of mixed research methods. Mixed-methods study designs integrate qualitative and quantitative research methods either sequentially or concurrently (10). In sequential study designs, qualitative methods may be used to explore a topic under study or to explain quantitative epidemiologic findings. Concurrent study designs are meant to confirm, cross-validate, or corroborate findings within a single study. A common type of concurrent mixed methods study is “triangulation,” and this approach has been used extensively in rapid assessments of illicit drug use and HIV/AIDS (11–13). Mixed methods approaches are particularly well suited to the investigation of the often hidden and stigmatizing behavioral and social factors underlying HIV epidemics. One exemplary study combining qualitative methods with quantitative methods was conducted by Beyrer et al. (14) to examine the role of overland heroin trafficking routes in shaping explosive HIV/AIDS epidemics among injection drug users in Southeast Asia. Piecing together data from a variety of sources, including existing epidemiologic data, key informant interviews, and laboratory data, this study revealed that distinct HIV subtypes emerged and recombined along drug trafficking routes originating in Myanmar, one of the world’s largest heroin producers. Along these trafficking routes, communities of injection drug users formed, facilitating the spread of HIV into local communities in Laos, Thailand, Vietnam, India, and China (refer, for example, to Panda et al. (15)). This illustration highlights the broader understanding of HIV/AIDS epidemiology that can be achieved by examining the interplay between contextual factors and social and behavioral factors. Investigation of social networks in HIV/AIDS began with the mapping of relationships between one of the first identified AIDS cases, an airline steward, and a large number of his male sex partners in the early 1980s (16). Social network analysis generates measures of the quality, density, position, and structure of relationships between persons, including dyads (partnerships), personal networks (“egocentric” networks), and larger communities (“sociometric” networks) (17, 18). Social networks can influence health outcomes in direct and indirect ways, including 1) social influence, 2) social engagement and participation, 3) prevalence of infectious disease and network member mixing, 4) access to material goods and informational resources, and 5) social support (19). Researchers have demonstrated that patterns in the structure of relationships—rather than differences in individual risk behaviors alone—explain observed HIV patterns (20, 21). The theoretical foundation for examining social networks in HIV research is closely tied to advances in sexually transmitted disease (STD) epidemiology. A key concept from STD epidemiology is the notion of the “core group,” a small group of disease transmitters responsible for a large proportion of cases (22). Friedman et al. (23) found that individuals’ locations within sociometric risk networks were associated with HIV risk among a group of injection drug users in New York City. Other concepts from STD epidemiology, such as partner concurrency, bridging, and mixing patterns, are also important in understanding HIV risk (24–29). Specific network characteristics that have been associated with HIV/AIDS include the size of subgroups and their distribution in a network (23), the centrality of HIV-positive persons within networks (30), partner selection patterns (24, 31–33), and concurrent sexual partnerships (28). Inclusion of these variables has been shown to improve transmission estimates in mathematical modeling (34, 35). Social and normative influences have also been associated with individual HIV risks (36, 37). Network-related social and normative influences are predictive of illicit drug use (38) and condom use behavior (37, 39), highlighting the importance of network-based interventions for HIV prevention (18). Kelly et al. (40, 41) developed a popular opinion leader model that has been effective in reducing HIV risk in several populations, including men who have sex with men and women in low-income housing (42). The success of this model has led to its adaption for international use by the National Institute of Mental Health Collaborative HIV/STD Prevention Trial in China, India, Peru, Russia, and Zimbabwe. Neighborhoods represent the intersection of social networks and physical spatial locations, a confluence Wallace (43) has called the “sociogeographic networks” through which infectious diseases spread. Early interest in the role of neighborhood social environment in disease transmission was sparked by a study in Colorado Springs, Colorado, in which researchers found that gonorrhea was highly focused geographically in core residential neighborhoods (44). Both direct and indirect mechanisms may determine how neighborhood-level factors shape population HIV/AIDS patterns. Direct mechanisms are those that increase the likelihood of a person coming into contact with someone who is HIV positive, for example, through residential segregation and the social isolation of marginalized populations. Indirect mechanisms include those that increase population vulnerability to HIV/AIDS, such as exposure to poor socioeconomic conditions, high unemployment, or the proliferation of illicit drug markets. A range of neighborhood-level factors have been examined in relation to infectious disease, including poverty and income (45, 46), residential segregation (47), and neighborhood physical environment (48, 49). Current research in neighborhood and area effects on health emphasizes the importance of moving beyond documentation of associations to analyze the social and epidemiologic mechanisms through which neighborhood effects might operate (50–54). Increasing concentrations of affluence and poverty are contributing to what demographer Douglas Massey has called “a radical change in the geographic basis of human society” (55, p. 395). Powerful social and economic forces in US cities are increasing neighborhood segregation by class and race/ethnicity (56, 57). Resulting social disorganization and loss of resources and services in poor neighborhoods are in turn shaping HIV/AIDS patterns at the neighborhood level. In a number of studies in New York City, for example, Wallace (58–63) has examined the complex interplay of public policies such as “planned shrinkage” with HIV epidemic dynamics in the Bronx, documenting the “synergy of plagues” that has accompanied rapid social change and the destruction of essential protective networks in poor communities. Using AIDS surveillance data, ecologic studies conducted in various US cities have also consistently found significant associations between income and poverty measures and neighborhood-level AIDS incidence and prevalence rates, and these findings have been consistent across census block groups (46), census tracts (64), and zip codes (65, 66). Length of survival an AIDS has also been with neighborhood measures of income and the of highly a of health at the population may also a role in shaping HIV/AIDS patterns, associations between HIV/AIDS and income at the neighborhood have not been well segregation by race/ethnicity is neighborhood-level that may an important role in HIV/AIDS may affect infectious disease patterns through the and isolation of persons in one increasing the probability of transmission within that For example, found that measures of residential isolation were protective for at risk of disease. Indirect effects of segregation are associated with of neighborhood and with for those in poor neighborhoods segregation may to understanding disease we of studies examining neighborhood segregation in relation to HIV/AIDS that have been The physical environment of neighborhoods has also been examined in relation to infectious disease. et al. examined gonorrhea and neighborhood physical environment in New by using an of physical to explore and to this the of physical such as and a in social in a of community this concept to public et al. found a significant between neighborhood physical and gonorrhea rates, a by a ecologic study of US physical environment may HIV risk by illicit drug use such as injection behaviors and of the mechanisms through which the observed associations may be and associations between the physical environment and HIV/AIDS is research is to support the design of neighborhood-level HIV/AIDS interventions. has differences are not result from social and economic by policies. are and to p. The of evidence ecologic associations between neighborhood-level factors and infectious disease that to be to identify of and defined social as of social structures that that is the of that in its not be p. Social may affect health through 1) the of 2) access to services and 3) of in a and 4) participation, to policies that are more to published studies have explicitly examined social in the of HIV/AIDS. In the and examined income and social as of STD and AIDS found social to be the of STD and AIDS In et al. examined one of social participation, as a for understanding community influences on HIV infection. found that in of and was in other social groups groups with high of social HIV risk. findings from these studies are and We identified categories of factors to HIV/AIDS epidemiology: structural and the and and Each is in the that highlights a of by often and forces that through as is more the the of p. is in patterns of on sexual and HIV A of how structural might influence HIV/AIDS risk is presented in 2. The and uses of race/ethnicity in epidemiologic research have been the of analysis and Social epidemiologists race/ethnicity as an of social forces than physical has that race/ethnicity is a for exposure to which may be defined as the and individual that and of p. The study of disease is of central importance in the study of HIV/AIDS In the for example, the of HIV HIV/AIDS and of also high HIV/AIDS with of behavioral risk factors at the individual have not observed HIV/AIDS or STD by race/ethnicity individual pathways by which HIV/AIDS in a group complex of economic and social patterns, of illicit and health Social epidemiology is and evidence as to what factors and these HIV/AIDS and found that sexual networks for in sexually transmitted infection in the National Health and Social et al. found that risk network structure in a of injection drug users in differences in HIV prevalence between and and structural factors key in shaping the patterns that to HIV/AIDS For example, the effects of sex from the of men may be relationships and sexual segregation by race/ethnicity also to shape social and risk networks in ways that to disease patterns. residential segregation was and associated with gonorrhea at the in the patterns might be observed for HIV/AIDS. is in the proportion of women among HIV/AIDS cases the for of HIV-positive in through and for of HIV-positive in HIV infections in women are at an and women are and more to HIV infection. theoretical for understanding in HIV/AIDS have been including and human beyond as a risk these approaches structural for in HIV/AIDS. focus has been on women in the of sex or transmission women HIV from their partner and reducing acquisition of HIV among men is key to reducing the spread of HIV to women the of and and than their male partners upon of HIV-positive in of of and HIV risks by women The effects of include individual to HIV and a of to HIV prevention The for and Prevention estimates that one of those with HIV not their HIV and have central in shaping to HIV/AIDS the effects of these social forces on the differential distribution of HIV/AIDS have not been well has been examined at the individual in studies of and and to of and in a that the of to p. et al. have defined as and that are at to have AIDS or HIV and at the and communities with which these are p. and have that a conceptual framework for understanding is our of and to as social that can be in relation to broader of and p. in et al. that HIV transmission and with AIDS the of or structural interventions change the in which and communities HIV infection The effective have been those in which communities have to and by increasing community of HIV Social interventions to and to affect community The for this is found in diffusion which on social networks, opinion and change these are by cultural through the in social networks within communities are essential for and behavior change to to HIV/AIDS structures refer to as well as to the and with their and et al. that laws can affect health in 1) may be a through which social determinants affect health direct and 2) may to social conditions associated with health outcomes indirect of direct effects of on HIV risk are on access to injection which have been associated with HIV incidence of an indirect of structures is the of laws on income which may social conditions that increase HIV vulnerability. key social determinants of HIV/AIDS, including poverty and income and community social change may affect HIV/AIDS patterns through population and and the and structures of Each of these factors may be as modifying between and persons in populations. the HIV infection than populations, of HIV prevalence in the or and may affect HIV transmission studies of have into 1) studies of the spread of HIV along and 2) studies of the that vulnerability to HIV/AIDS can the spread of HIV subtypes and to patterns of and evidence linking patterns and Beyrer et al. (14) found that distinct HIV subtypes were associated with different illicit drug trafficking routes in Southeast Asia. has to the spread of HIV in India, and In addition, studies have identified the importance of in the of for HIV/AIDS is a classic of an health have examined the role of in population HIV/AIDS patterns that might for the effects of on HIV/AIDS patterns include sexual and drug use patterns to in patterns, and of and persons, and on the health sex that men have also been associated with high HIV/AIDS prevalence at the This ecologic is to be by the effects of cultural at the local of the effects might have on and network patterns. the of resources in the public and and the environment a central role in the and of HIV/AIDS epidemics. of importance to HIV/AIDS include health social and illicit drug HIV/AIDS is a high on the health of and policies are to be contributing to increasing HIV/AIDS The complex and between policies and HIV/AIDS are to be policies affect health and by poverty in the distribution of and health have that structural designed to and in have a on the HIV/AIDS by increasing and and reducing in the health and social services as to how policies can be designed to to in HIV/AIDS Structural-level health policies and can to in HIV/AIDS HIV prevention have on individual behavior the of the HIV prevention is with of the for that the social and economic of HIV/AIDS The condom is an exemplary of an effective structural HIV prevention to the environment in which HIV risk behaviors the of may also affect in HIV/AIDS transmission by reducing among HIV-positive Social policies a critical role in the of those to HIV/AIDS, such as or Social policies such as and public affect access to resources and can also affect HIV transmission and access to quantitative research has social change to population health outcomes qualitative research has the importance of social in shaping risk In for example, et al. the effects of the and of which Social and Social on the basis of drug and in this study into the drug of income of and in behaviors in an to HIV to studies of the associations between social policies and HIV/AIDS are to the human of policies of with the of those to HIV/AIDS and to identify drug also has a significant on HIV/AIDS. drug particularly of is HIV epidemics in the The on has focused on to the of which of prevention and measures policies for those trafficking or illicit have in of persons for drug The direct of patterns to be For example, et al. found that on policies such as the of and of those with use from Social were associated with in is a risk factor for HIV risk behaviors have been shown to associated with of and HIV risk of in have access to can increase HIV/AIDS risk and by social and risk networks, or and increasing poverty and social in in risk behaviors in of have been For example, et al. found that the in was associated with among injection drug users in of the of heroin trafficking from In the of the of has also been associated with HIV/AIDS forces are often and of men from In a study for the found that a in the size of the from to as a proportion of population reduce HIV among by 1 to the of in are to reduce HIV in with HIV/AIDS prevention and for The of social epidemiology to the HIV/AIDS have in This is in to a that from a that risk factors for disease to one that the that patterns of disease in p. and methodological in the have this our understanding of multiple causes of risk in modeling geographic and databases linking public health data with on social factors enhance our to and in ways that more closely the of HIV/AIDS epidemics. social epidemiology research in HIV/AIDS determine how we can design more effective of interventions at multiple of social A number of key which of the larger social environment in HIV/AIDS transmission and disease are model complex and be has these include data variables and of analysis at multiple contextual effects, and complex with and p. approaches are for the effective of social-level interventions. persons are with HIV/AIDS, and an HIV infections in effective are high drug and in are to of an HIV more These the to underlying social and structural determinants of HIV/AIDS through policies and This was by from the National Institute on The of the New York of for for and A framework for the social epidemiology of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome The the the nature of the between of In are between factors at that to observed epidemic patterns. sexually transmitted infection. 2. through which various of structural might influence the risk of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome of how epidemiology is examined by using different research HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency In this a is between three approaches to social epidemiology: a a social of disease and an This table is on by Krieger of how epidemiology is examined by using different research HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency In this a is between three approaches to social epidemiology: a a social of disease and an This table is on by Krieger terms in the equation for the basic reproductive and factors that affect the empirical estimates of the terms in the of HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency terms in the equation for the basic reproductive and factors that affect the empirical estimates of the terms in the of HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency keywords used to databases for published literature on the social epidemiology of of Bethesda, HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency keywords used to databases for published literature on the social epidemiology of of Bethesda, HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency

Epidemiologic Reviews · meta-analysis · 394 citationsread the source →

Alliance in couple and family therapy.

Couple and family therapy (CFT) is challenging because multiple interacting working alliances develop simultaneously and are heavily influenced by preexisting family dynamics. An original meta-analysis of 24 published CFT alliance-retention/outcome studies (k = 17 family and 7 couple studies; N = 1,416 clients) showed a weighted aggregate r = .26, z = 8.13 (p < .005); 95% CI = .33, .20. This small-to-medium effect size is almost identical to that reported for individual adult psychotherapy (Horvath, Del Re, Flückiger, & Symonds, this issue, pp. 9-16). Analysis of the 17 family studies (n = 1,081 clients) showed a similar average weighted effect size (r = .24; z = 6.55, p < .005; 95% CI = .30, .16), whereas the analysis of the 7 couple therapy studies (n = 335 clients) indicated r = .37; z = 6.16, p < .005; 95% CI = .48, .25. Tests of the null hypothesis of homogeneity suggested unexplained variability in the alliance-outcome association in both treatment formats. In this article we also summarize the most widely used alliance measures used in CFT research, provide an extended clinical example, and describe patient contributions to the developing alliance. Although few moderator or mediator studies have been conducted, the literature points to three important alliance-related phenomena in CFT: the frequency of "split" or "unbalanced" alliances, the importance of ensuring safety, and the need to foster a strong within-family sense of purpose about the purpose, goals, and value of conjoint treatment. We conclude with a series of therapeutic practices predicated on the research evidence.

Psychotherapy (Chicago, Ill.) · meta-analysis · 52 citationsread the source →

Outcomes of childhood epilepsy at age 33 years: a population-based birth-cohort study.

Purpose: There is uncertainty about health and socioeconomic outcomes of children with epilepsy, knowledge of adult outcomes, and factors associated with adverse outcomes are essential to guide prognosis, improve management, and determine appropriate allocation of resources. Methods: A subgroup of 101 children with epilepsy (onset ≤ age 16 years) were previously identified and reported from the 1958 National Child Development Study (NCDS), a national United Kingdom birth cohort study. In the current study we examine outcomes of this unique childhood epilepsy subgroup at age 33 compared to unaffected NCDS cohort members in mental and general health, education and employment, marriage, and parenthood. Multivariable regression analyses were used to investigate factors (including etiology, cognitive development, parental interest, and childhood anxiety/depression at age 11 years) associated with adverse outcomes. key findings: Sixty-five (66%) were still participating at 33 years. Median follow-up after epilepsy onset was 28 years (range 17-33 years). Thirty participants [46%, 95% confidence interval (CI) 35-58] had epilepsy onset <5 years, 32 (49%, 95% CI 37-61) had "symptomatic" epilepsy, and 33 (51%, 95% CI 39-63) had idiopathic epilepsy. Thirty-one participants (48%) reported being seen by their doctor for epilepsy in the preceding year, 27 (42%) were registered disabled, 39 (60%) had a drivers license, and 42 (65%) thought their epilepsy made it harder to get/keep a paid job. People who had childhood epilepsy had an increased risk of death [standardized mortality rate (SMR) 3.1, 95% CI 1.1-6.1]. Childhood epilepsy was associated with poor general and mental health at 33 years on univariable analyses, but not after adjusting for childhood cognitive development/comorbidities and anxiety over acceptance by peers/adults at age 11. Childhood epilepsy was an independent risk factor for not being married [odds ratio (OR) 0.45, 95% CI 0.05-0.94] or being a parent (OR 0.67, 95% CI 0.42-0.91). People with childhood epilepsy and poor cognitive development compared to those with poor cognitive development without epilepsy had a greater proportion with subsequent poor mental health (56% vs. 24%, difference in proportion 33%, 95% CI 12-50), and a lesser proportion who married (39% vs. 78%, difference in proportion -39%, 95% CI -56 to -19). Significance: Compared to the unaffected population, children with epilepsy with good cognitive development/without comorbidities have similar adult health, educational, and employment outcomes but have difficulties with establishing and maintaining personal relationships. A combination of having childhood epilepsy plus poor cognitive development is more likely to be associated with adverse outcomes compared to having poor cognitive development without childhood epilepsy. Children with epilepsy have increased risk of death compared to the rest of the population. Pharmacologic management alone is inadequate and long-term psychosocial support is needed.

Epilepsia · 46 citationsread the source →

Treatment of acute stress disorder: a randomized controlled trial.

Context: Recent trauma survivors with acute stress disorder (ASD) are likely to subsequently develop chronic posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD). Cognitive behavioral therapy for ASD may prevent PTSD, but trauma survivors may not tolerate exposure-based therapy in the acute phase. There is a need to compare nonexposure therapy techniques with prolonged exposure for ASD. Objective: To determine the efficacy of exposure therapy or trauma-focused cognitive restructuring in preventing chronic PTSD relative to a wait-list control group. Design, setting, and participants: A randomized controlled trial of civilians who experienced trauma and who met the diagnostic criteria for ASD (N = 90) seen at an outpatient clinic between March 1, 2002, and June 30, 2006. Intervention: Patients were randomly assigned to receive 5 weekly 90-minute sessions of either imaginal and in vivo exposure (n = 30) or cognitive restructuring (n = 30), or assessment at baseline and after 6 weeks (wait-list group; n = 30). Main outcome measures: Measures of PTSD at the 6-month follow-up visit by clinical interview and self-report assessments of PTSD, depression, anxiety, and trauma-related cognition. Results: Intent-to-treat analyses indicated that at posttreatment, fewer patients in the exposure group had PTSD than those in the cognitive restructuring or wait-list groups (33% vs 63% vs 77%; P = .002). At follow-up, patients who underwent exposure therapy were more likely to not meet diagnostic criteria for PTSD than those who underwent cognitive restructuring (37% vs 63%; odds ratio, 2.10; 95% confidence interval, 1.12-3.94; P = .05) and to achieve full remission (47% vs 13%; odds ratio, 2.78; 95% confidence interval, 1.14-6.83; P = .005). On assessments of PTSD, depression, and anxiety, exposure resulted in markedly larger effect sizes at posttreatment and follow-up than cognitive restructuring. Conclusions: Exposure-based therapy leads to greater reduction in subsequent PTSD symptoms in patients with ASD when compared with cognitive restructuring. Exposure should be used in early intervention for people who are at high risk for developing PTSD.

Archives of general psychiatry · randomised controlled trial · 64 citationsread the source →

Randomized trial of telephone-delivered acceptance and commitment therapy versus cognitive behavioral therapy for smoking cessation: a pilot study.

Objective: We conducted a pilot randomized trial of telephone-delivered acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) versus cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) for smoking cessation. Method: Participants were 121 uninsured South Carolina State Quitline callers who were adult smokers (at least 10 cigarettes/day) and who wanted to quit within the next 30 days. Participants were randomized to 5 sessions of either ACT or CBT telephone counseling and were offered 2 weeks of nicotine replacement therapy (NRT). Results: ACT participants completed more calls than CBT participants (M = 3.25 in ACT vs. 2.23 in CBT; p = .001). Regarding satisfaction, 100% of ACT participants reported their treatment was useful for quitting smoking (vs. 87% for CBT; p = .03), and 97% of ACT participants would recommend their treatment to a friend (vs. 83% for CBT; p = .06). On the primary outcome of intent-to-treat 30-day point prevalence abstinence at 6 months postrandomization, the quit rates were 31% in ACT versus 22% in CBT (odds ratio [OR] = 1.5, 95% confidence interval [CI] = 0.7-3.4). Among participants depressed at baseline (n = 47), the quit rates were 33% in ACT versus 13% in CBT (OR = 1.2, 95% CI = 1.0-1.6). Consistent with ACT's theory, among participants scoring low on acceptance of cravings at baseline (n = 57), the quit rates were 37% in ACT versus 10% in CBT (OR = 5.3, 95% CI = 1.3-22.0). Conclusions: ACT is feasible to deliver by phone, is highly acceptable to quitline callers, and shows highly promising quit rates compared with standard CBT quitline counseling. As results were limited by the pilot design (e.g., small sample), a full-scale efficacy trial is now needed.

Nicotine & tobacco research : official journal of the Society for Research on Nicotine and Tobacco · randomised controlled trial · 68 citationsread the source →

A randomized controlled trial of the tumor necrosis factor antagonist infliximab for treatment-resistant depression: the role of baseline inflammatory biomarkers.

Context: Increased concentrations of inflammatory biomarkers predict antidepressant nonresponse, and inflammatory cytokines can sabotage and circumvent the mechanisms of action of conventional antidepressants. Objectives: To determine whether inhibition of the inflammatory cytokine tumor necrosis factor (TNF) reduces depressive symptoms in patients with treatment-resistant depression and whether an increase in baseline plasma inflammatory biomarkers, including high-sensitivity C-reactive protein (hs-CRP), TNF, and its soluble receptors, predicts treatment response. Design: Double-blind, placebo-controlled, randomized clinical trial. Setting: Outpatient infusion center at Emory University in Atlanta, Georgia. Participants: A total of 60 medically stable outpatients with major depression who were either on a consistent antidepressant regimen (n = 37) or medication-free (n = 23) for 4 weeks or more and who were moderately resistant to treatment as determined by the Massachusetts General Hospital Staging method. Interventions: Three infusions of the TNF antagonist infliximab (5 mg/kg) (n = 30) or placebo (n = 30) at baseline and weeks 2 and 6 of a 12-week trial. Main outcome measures: The 17-item Hamilton Scale for Depression (HAM-D) scores. Results: No overall difference in change of HAM-D scores between treatment groups across time was found. However, there was a significant interaction between treatment, time, and log baseline hs-CRP concentration (P = .01), with change in HAM-D scores (baseline to week 12) favoring infliximab-treated patients at a baseline hs-CRP concentration greater than 5 mg/L and favoring placebo-treated patients at a baseline hs-CRP concentration of 5 mg/L or less. Exploratory analyses focusing on patients with a baseline hs-CRP concentration greater than 5 mg/L revealed a treatment response (≥50% reduction in HAM-D score at any point during treatment) of 62% (8 of 13 patients) in infliximab-treated patients vs 33% (3 of 9 patients) in placebo-treated patients (P = .19). Baseline concentrations of TNF and its soluble receptors were significantly higher in infliximab-treated responders vs nonresponders (P < .05), and infliximab-treated responders exhibited significantly greater decreases in hs-CRP from baseline to week 12 compared with placebo-treated responders (P < .01). Dropouts and adverse events were limited and did not differ between groups. Conclusions: This proof-of-concept study suggests that TNF antagonism does not have generalized efficacy in treatment-resistant depression but may improve depressive symptoms in patients with high baseline inflammatory biomarkers. Trial registration: clinicaltrials.gov Identifier: NCT00463580.

JAMA psychiatry · randomised controlled trial · 1228 citationsread the source →

Why substitute decision makers provide or decline consent for ICU research studies: a questionnaire study.

Purpose: Consent for research participation in the intensive care unit (ICU) is often obtained from a substitute decision maker (SDM). In this study we explored SDMs' reasons for declining or providing consent for research studies for critically ill adult family members. Methods: Two questionnaires were developed, one directed at SDMs who agreed to have their relative participate in a research study (AGREE group), and another for SDMs who declined participation (DECLINE group). The questionnaires explored SDMs' opinions about research in general, timing of research approach, the informed consent process, and reasons for agreeing or declining participation. Results: Ninety-six SDMs completed the questionnaire (68 AGREE, 27 DECLINE). There were no differences between AGREE and DECLINE groups with respect to SDM demographics, perceived severity of illness of the patient, or the research study approach. The most common reasons for providing consent were potential for research to help others (91%), research is important for medical progress (88%), and trust in the medical team (87%). The most common reasons for declining consent were SDM was too anxious to consider research (67%), fear that patient would receive experimental treatment (37%), and concern about risks of the study (33%). Conclusions: SDMs who agree to have a relative participate in an ICU research study are motivated by the potential benefit to the patient and altruism. SDMs who decline research participation, while not generally opposed to research, are fearful of study-related harm or discomfort for the patient, and are too anxious to consider a research study at that time.

Intensive care medicine · 48 citationsread the source →

Predicting nonmarital romantic relationship dissolution: A meta-analytic synthesis

A meta-analysis of predictors of nonmarital romantic relationship dissolution was conducted, including data collected from 37,761 participants and 137 studies over 33 years. Individual, relationship, and external variables were investigated, and results suggest that commitment, love, inclusion of other in the self, and dependence were among the strongest predictors of dissolution. Other relational variables such as satisfaction, perceptions of alternatives, and investments were modest predictors of breakup, and the external factor of social network support was also a robust predictor. Personality measures were found to have limited predictive utility, with small effects found for dimensions relational in nature (e.g., adult attachment orientations). Theoretical and methodological implications are discussed within the context of future research on nonmarital relationship dissolution.

Personal Relationships · 532 citationsread the source →

Vagus nerve stimulation for depression: efficacy and safety in a European study.

Background: Vagus nerve stimulation (VNS) therapy is associated with a decrease in seizure frequency in partial-onset seizure patients. Initial trials suggest that it may be an effective treatment, with few side-effects, for intractable depression. Method: An open, uncontrolled European multi-centre study (D03) of VNS therapy was conducted, in addition to stable pharmacotherapy, in 74 patients with treatment-resistant depression (TRD). Treatment remained unchanged for the first 3 months; in the subsequent 9 months, medications and VNS dosing parameters were altered as indicated clinically. Results: The baseline 28-item Hamilton Depression Rating Scale (HAMD-28) score averaged 34. After 3 months of VNS, response rates (> or = 50% reduction in baseline scores) reached 37% and remission rates (HAMD-28 score <10) 17%. Response rates increased to 53% after 1 year of VNS, and remission rates reached 33%. Response was defined as sustained if no relapse occurred during the first year of VNS after response onset; 44% of patients met these criteria. Median time to response was 9 months. Most frequent side-effects were voice alteration (63% at 3 months of stimulation) and coughing (23%). Conclusions: VNS therapy was effective in reducing severity of depression; efficacy increased over time. Efficacy ratings were in the same range as those previously reported from a USA study using a similar protocol; at 12 months, reduction of symptom severity was significantly higher in the European sample. This might be explained by a small but significant difference in the baseline HAMD-28 score and the lower number of treatments in the current episode in the European study.

Psychological medicine · cohort or longitudinal · 125 citationsread the source →

The health and well-being of caregivers of children with cerebral palsy.

Objective: Most children enjoy healthy childhoods with little need for specialized health care services. However, some children experience difficulties in early childhood and require access to and utilization of considerable health care resources over time. Although impaired motor function is the hallmark of the cerebral palsy (CP) syndromes, many children with this development disorder also experience sensory, communicative, and intellectual impairments and may have complex limitations in self-care functions. Although caregiving is a normal part of being the parent of a young child, this role takes on an entirely different significance when a child experiences functional limitations and possible long-term dependence. One of the main challenges for parents is to manage their child's chronic health problems effectively and juggle this role with the requirements of everyday living. Consequently, the task of caring for a child with complex disabilities at home might be somewhat daunting for caregivers. The provision of such care may prove detrimental to both the physical health and the psychological well-being of parents of children with chronic disabilities. It is not fully understood why some caregivers cope well and others do not. The approach of estimating the "independent" or "direct" effects of the care recipient's disability on the caregiver's health is of limited value because (1) single-factor changes are rare outside the context of constrained experimental situations; (2) assumptions of additive relationships and perfect measurements rarely hold; and (3) such approaches do not provide a complete perspective, because they fail to examine indirect pathways that occur between predictor variables and health outcomes. A more detailed analytical approach is needed to understand both direct and indirect effects simultaneously. The primary objective of the current study was to examine, within a single theory-based multidimensional model, the determinants of physical and psychological health of adult caregivers of children with CP. Methods: We developed a stress process model and applied structural equation modeling with data from a large cohort of caregivers of children with CP. This design allowed the examination of the direct and indirect relationships between a child's health, behavior and functional status, caregiver characteristics, social supports, and family functioning and the outcomes of caregivers' physical and psychological health. Families (n = 468) of children with CP were recruited from 19 regional children's rehabilitation centers that provide outpatient disability management and supports in Ontario, Canada. The current study drew on a population available to the investigators from a previous study, the Ontario Motor Growth study, which explored patterns of gross motor development in children with CP. Data on demographic variables and caregivers' physical and psychological health were assessed using standardized, self-completed parent questionnaires as well as a face-to-face home interview. Structural equation modeling was used to test specific hypotheses outlined in our conceptual model. This analytic approach involved a 2-step process. In the first step, observed variables that were hypothesized to measure the underlying constructs were tested using confirmatory factor analysis; this step led to the so-called measurement model. The second step tested hypotheses about relationships among the variables in the structural model. All of the hypothesized paths in the conceptual model were tested and included in the structural model. However, only paths that were significant were shown in the final results. The direct, indirect, and total effects of theoretical constructs on physical and psychological health were calculated using the structural model. Results: The most important predictors of caregivers' well-being were child behavior, caregiving demands, and family function. A higher level of behavior problems was associated with lower levels of both psychological (beta = -.22) and physical health (beta = -.18) of the caregivers, whereas fewer child behavior problems were associated with higher self-perception (beta = -.37) and a greater ability to manage stress (beta = -.18). Less caregiving demands were associated with better physical (beta = .23) and psychological (beta = .12) well-being of caregivers, respectively. Similarly, higher reported family functioning was associated with better psychological health (beta = .33) and physical health (beta = .33). Self-perception and stress management were significant direct predictors of caregivers' psychological health but did not directly influence their physical well-being. Caregivers' higher self-esteem and sense of mastery over the caregiving situation predicted better psychological health (beta = .23). The use of more stress management strategies was also associated with better psychological health of caregivers (beta = .11). Gross income (beta = .08) and social support (beta = .06) had indirect overall effects only on psychological health outcome, whereas self-perception (beta = .22), stress management (beta = .09), gross income (beta = .07), and social support (beta = .06) had indirect total effects only on physical health outcomes. Conclusions: The psychological and physical health of caregivers, who in this study were primarily mothers, was strongly influenced by child behavior and caregiving demands. Child behavior problems were an important predictor of caregiver psychological well-being, both directly and indirectly, through their effect on self-perception and family function. Caregiving demands contributed directly to both the psychological and the physical health of the caregivers. The practical day-to-day needs of the child created challenges for parents. The influence of social support provided by extended family, friends, and neighbors on health outcomes was secondary to that of the immediate family working closely together. Family function affected health directly and also mediated the effects of self-perception, social support, and stress management. In families of children with CP, strategies for optimizing caregiver physical and psychological health include supports for behavioral management and daily functional activities as well as stress management and self-efficacy techniques. These data support clinical pathways that require biopsychosocial frameworks that are family centered, not simply technical and short-term rehabilitation interventions that are focused primarily on the child. In terms of prevention, providing parents with cognitive and behavioral strategies to manage their child's behaviors may have the potential to change caregiver health outcomes. This model also needs to be examined with caregivers of children with other disabilities.

Pediatrics · cohort or longitudinal · 552 citationsread the source →

Telemedicine Applications for Cancer Rehabilitation: Scoping Review.

Background: Cancer is a significant public health issue worldwide. Treatments such as surgery, chemotherapy, and radiation therapy often cause psychological and physiological side effects, affecting patients' ability to function and their quality of life (QoL). Physical activity is crucial to cancer rehabilitation, improving physical function and QoL and reducing cancer-related fatigue. However, many patients face barriers to accessing cancer rehabilitation due to socioeconomic factors, transportation issues, and time constraints. Telerehabilitation can potentially overcome these barriers by delivering rehabilitation remotely. Objective: The aim of the study is to identify how telemedicine is used for the rehabilitation of patients with cancer. Methods: This scoping review followed recognized frameworks. We conducted an electronic literature search on PubMed for studies published between January 2015 and May 2023. Inclusion criteria were studies reporting physical therapy telerehabilitation interventions for patients with cancer, including randomized and nonrandomized controlled trials, feasibility studies, and usability studies. In total, 21 studies met the criteria and were included in the final review. Results: Our search yielded 37 papers, with 21 included in the final review. Randomized controlled trials comprised 47% (n=10) of the studies, with feasibility studies at 33% (n=7) and usability studies at 19% (n=4). Sample sizes were typically 50 or fewer participants in 57% (n=12) of the reports. Participants were generally aged 65 years or younger (n=17, 81%), with a balanced gender distribution. Organ-specific cancers were the focus of 66% (n=14) of the papers, while 28% (n=6) included patients who were in the posttreatment period. Web-based systems were the most used technology (n=13, 61%), followed by phone call or SMS text messaging-based systems (n=9, 42%) and mobile apps (n=5, 23%). Exercise programs were mainly home based (n=19, 90%) and included aerobic (n=19, 90%), resistance (n=13, 61%), and flexibility training (n=7, 33%). Outcomes included improvements in functional capacity, cognitive functioning, and QoL (n=10, 47%); reductions in pain and hospital length of stay; and enhancements in fatigue, physical and emotional well-being, and anxiety. Positive effects on feasibility (n=3, 14%), acceptability (n=8, 38%), and cost-effectiveness (n=2, 9%) were also noted. Functional outcomes were frequently assessed (n=19, 71%) with tools like the 6-minute walk test and grip strength tests. Conclusions: Telerehabilitation for patients with cancer is beneficial and feasible, with diverse approaches in study design, technologies, exercises, and outcomes. Future research should focus on developing standardized methodologies, incorporating objective measures, and exploring emerging technologies like virtual reality, wearable or noncontact sensors, and artificial intelligence to optimize telerehabilitation interventions. Addressing these areas can enhance clinical practice and improve outcomes for remote rehabilitation with patients.

JMIR cancer · review · 17 citationsread the source →

Stigma as a barrier to recognizing personal mental illness and seeking help: a prospective study among untreated persons with mental illness.

It is unclear to what extent failure to recognize symptoms as potential sign of a mental illness is impeding service use, and how stigmatizing attitudes interfere with this process. In a prospective study, we followed a community sample of 188 currently untreated persons with mental illness (predominantly depression) over 6 months. We examined how lack of knowledge, prejudice and discrimination impacted on self-identification as having a mental illness, perceived need, intention to seek help, and help-seeking, both with respect to primary care (visiting a general practitioner, GP) and specialist care (seeing a mental health professional, MHP). 67% sought professional help within 6 months. Fully saturated path models accounting for baseline depressive symptoms, previous treatment experience, age and gender showed that self-identification predicted need (beta 0.32, p < 0.001), and need predicted intention (GP: beta 0.45, p < 0.001; MHP: beta 0.38, p < 0.001). Intention predicted service use with a MHP after 6 months (beta 0.31, p < 0.01; GP: beta 0.17, p = 0.093). More knowledge was associated with more self-identification (beta 0.21, p < 0.01), while support for discrimination was associated with lower self-identification (beta - 0.14, p < 0.05). Blaming persons with mental illness for their problem was associated with lower perceived need (beta - 0.16, p < 0.05). Our models explained 37% of the variance of seeking help with a MHP, and 33% of help-seeking with a GP. Recognizing one's own mental illness and perceiving a need for help are impaired by lack of knowledge, prejudice, and discrimination. Self-identification is a relevant first step when seeking help for mental disorders.

European archives of psychiatry and clinical neuroscience · 118 citationsread the source →

AIDS as a chronic illness: psychosocial implications

Introduction Early in the epidemic, the public perception of AIDS as a highly fatal acute illness with a rapid downward trajectory was crystallized. Nevertheless, as early as 1991 in the nursing and medical sociology literature, a few investigators were already discussing HIV/AIDS as a chronic illness (for example [1,2]). Shortly thereafter, a number of psychosocial investigations of small groups of long-term AIDS survivors appeared in the literature, although these cases were still seen as infrequent exceptions (see [3] for a review). It was not until the advent of protease inhibitors in 1996, which ushered in the era of highly active antiretroviral therapy (HAART), that the view of AIDS as a chronic illness became widely accepted. These medications were touted in the mass media as ‘miraculous’ because they reduced the risk of opportunistic infections and extended survival by suppressing viral replication and increasing CD4 cell counts. Their availability was said to have “reinserted the word ‘hope’ into the discussion about AIDS for the first time in a decade of treatment trials” [4] (p. 161), and to have offered infected individuals the opportunity for a “second life” [5]. Among those at advanced stages of the disease, recoveries have often been so dramatic that the phenomenon has been dubbed the ‘Lazarus Syndrome’, referring to the seeming rising from the dead made possible by these new medications [6]. While in the United States recent treatment advances have had a profound impact on the illness trajectory and thus life expectancy of many infected individuals [7], AIDS-related mortality continues to rise unabated in parts of the world where access to the new therapies is limited. The prohibitively high prices of antiretrovirals coupled with inadequate and inefficient health delivery systems have allowed AIDS to reach catastrophic levels in many developing countries [8]. Even in the United States, however, not all infected persons have access to or choose to adopt the new treatments. Some physicians are less likely to offer HAART to patients they assume to be at risk for poor adherence, such as those with a history of drug use, the homeless, and the mentally ill [9–11], although the evidence supporting their actions remains inconclusive [12, 13]. Other research indicates that women, African-Americans, and those with low levels of education are less likely to have ever used the new therapies [14–17]. These findings have been attributed not only to a lack of access to these medications among these socio-economically disadvantaged groups, but also to their own reluctance to use them due to such factors as fear of medication side-effects and distrust of physicians. Similar issues were identified as barriers to antiretroviral use and medication adherence before HAART became available [18,19]. Chronic illness and AIDS Chronic illnesses are typically incurable, and thus the goals of medical care are usually containment, slowing disease progression and symptom management rather than cure. Beyond this, chronic diseases tend to share a variety of characteristics [20–23]. Frequently, they have an uncertain course or disease trajectory often characterized by alternating periods of remission and recurrence, or stable periods interrupted by episodic exacerbations of symptoms. Most require adherence to a treatment regimen, although these differ significantly across diseases in complexity and efficacy. Chronic disease also typically requires considerable self-care (including self-monitoring of symptoms) on the patient's part, since most of the day-to-day management of the illness takes place outside formal health institutions or facilities. As illness is a form of deviance and thus an undesirable state, chronic conditions also carry some degree of stigma. However, this varies greatly across diseases and depends on a variety of factors, such as whether the individual is perceived as being responsible for having acquired the illness, whether the illness is contagious and whether there is visible disfigurement. In addition, changes in roles and relationships are common. Illness almost always necessitates some degree of dependency, at least at the more advanced stages of a disease. Roles and responsibilities in relationships and families typically must be re-negotiated in light of the patient's limitations or disabilities. Finally, chronic diseases often bring about identity changes as the patient attempts to integrate the illness into his/her life and self-perception over the long haul. Psychological distress is a prevalent concomitant of living with chronic conditions, because of the uncertainty inherent in many of these illness characteristics. Each of these aspects of chronic disease posses an adaptive task or challenge (e.g., tolerating uncertainty, managing stigma, adhering to treatment) that is stressful for the individual to confront. How well the chronically ill individual will adapt to one's disease will depend in large part on his/her ability to master, or at least successfully manage, these tasks. Today, AIDS meets the criteria for a chronic illness [24]. While available treatments can render a viral load undetectable, they cannot fully eradicate it from the body and, left untreated, the viral load will rebound. Consequently, there is still no cure for the disease. Furthermore, while the natural history of the disease has been delineated, the course of HIV disease progression varies considerably among individuals [25]. Current multi-drug regimens remain complex, often requiring that many pills be taken on a rigid schedule while following strict dietary guidelines. Yet, similar to many other chronic illnesses, the regimens for HIV infection are not equally effective for all patients [26]. It is also well recognized that HIV/AIDS has a profound impact on intimate and social relationships. The fact that the disease can be transmitted through sexual behaviors renders intimate relationships fraught with anxiety and ambivalence. Moreover, infected adults often feel that others are unwilling to enter into long-term relationships with them for fear of having to assume care-giving responsibilities when the disease progresses. Additionally, self-care is a component of living with HIV. Many patients engage in self-initiated strategies (e.g., diet, relaxation exercises, stress avoidance) aimed at managing illness or treatment-related symptoms, boosting their immune system, or alleviating stress. In the present paper, we discuss several of the principal characteristics of chronic illnesses, reviewing in each case the relevant available literature. In each section, we attempt to highlight continuities and discontinuities between the pre-HAART and the HAART eras. In addition, we discuss prevention in the context of AIDS as a chronic illness. We conclude with some suggestions for future research in the field of HIV/AIDS and chronic illness. Emotional distress From the outset of the AIDS epidemic, there has been considerable documentation of the adverse psychological consequences of knowing one is infected. When AIDS was viewed as a highly fatal illness with an inexorable downhill course, much of this work focused on assessing depression (depressive symptomatology or clinical depression) and suicidal ideation or acts. While the findings of studies sometimes differed, the preponderance of evidence from the pre-HAART era suggested that depression was prevalent and that suicidal ideation and risk were elevated [27–30]. Infected individuals seemed particularly emotionally vulnerable shortly after diagnosis, when HIV-related symptoms first appeared, in the later stages of the disease, and after suffering multiple AIDS-related losses in their social network. It is a widely held, although largely unexamined, assumption that the experience of living with HIV infection in the HAART era is significantly less distressing compared with the past because of the prospects for extended survival and enhanced quality of life offered by the new treatments. Only recently, however, has this issue begun to be empirically investigated. Rabkin et al. [31] followed a sample of gay and bisexual men with symptomatic illness over a period that included the time before and after the availability of protease inhibitors. On all measures of psychological distress employed, the sample as a whole showed a statistically significant, although clinically modest, decline over time (when CD4 cell count, HIV symptoms, physical limitations, and social support were included as co-variates). However, when they further compared subjects whose status on medical markers had improved and had not improved, no significant differences in decline in hopelessness or improvement in quality of life were observed. In another study [32], changes in depressive symptomatology were investigated among 456 HIV-infected individuals (433 men) receiving antiretroviral treatment who were asked to complete a self-administered questionnaire annually. All study participants had completed at least one survey before and one after using protease inhibitors. The investigators found that, between assessment points, the percentage of individuals with a score indicative of probable clinical depression declined from 52 to 46%. While this change was not statistically significant, there were improvements in the total score of the Center for Epidemiological Studies—Depression scale, as well as on the depressive mood, positive affect and somatic symptom subscales. Similarly, in another study [33], changes in depressive symptomatology among 125 HIV-infected adults (most homosexual/bisexual males) assessed at 6-month intervals over a 2-year period were examined. The investigators found a pattern of declining scores on the Beck Depression Inventory over time, especially after the third assessment (12 months after baseline), when 51% of study participants were receiving HAART. There was, however, substantial drop-out before the 6-month assessment, and the number of cases included at each assessment point varied. It thus seems that the evidence on whether living with HIV infection is less psychologically distressing since the availability of HAART remains inconclusive. If ultimately it is shown to be so, this could have implications for needed mental health services. Catalan et al. [34], for example, suggest that as AIDS becomes a more manageable disease there will be a diminished need for acute mental health services (e.g., psychiatric hospitalization, crisis intervention), and a greater need for interventions assisting individuals in adjusting long-term to chronic-illness-related psychosocial stressors. While this may be true among gay and bisexual men and drug users who can recall infected individuals’ bleaker prospects in the pre-HAART era, the need for acute psychiatric services may grow among more recently impacted populations, such as infected adults living in rural America, adolescents, and heterosexual women without a history of drug use. Members of these populations often do not recognize that they were at risk for infection, making diagnosis a more psychologically disruptive event. Uncertainty Individuals living with HIV/AIDS have always confronted uncertainty. Early in the epidemic, this uncertainty revolved around issues such as when one had become infected, where one was in the disease trajectory, how long one was likely to survive, and whether any effective treatments for slowing or halting progression of one's disease would be developed. With the advent of zidovudine and other drugs of the pre-HAART era, uncertainty centered on issues such as whether to get tested, when to initiate treatment, and whether one would have a positive response to treatment. With the availability of HAART, new uncertainties have emerged [35] while old ones persist. For example, many infected individuals who realize extended survival as a result of new treatment regimens may confront emerging opportunistic infections that, in the past, patients did not live long enough to experience. Also, because these medications are new, there is uncertainty about their long-term safety. There is also a lack of clarity about how functional a restored immune system is likely to be [36,37]. The meaning of an improved CD4 cell count, a fundamental disease marker, is also ambiguous. For instance, is an individual who was diagnosed earlier as having AIDS solely on the basis of a CD4 cell count below 200 and who now has a count above that threshold still considered as having AIDS [35]? Those with advanced disease who had expected to die, but have now experienced a ‘reprieve’ on protease inhibitors, may feel insecure about their new-found well-being. While no longer imminently facing death, and possibly they recognize that they could experience a at any time, and The of many is by the fact that they have been to significant in their Finally, as in the pre-HAART era, and uncertainty to the of the time to initiate medication use Those who have not HAART recognize that not or can the Furthermore, those who have experienced recognize that they may be over an extended period of time adherence to the [26]. another of uncertainty is the risk of developing drug with Roles and relationships health has allowed infected individuals to the assumption of new social roles or the to old ones (e.g., For example, the in that zidovudine treatment could significantly of the from an infected to allowed infected women to more With the advent of HAART, more may now as a significant in viral load further the risk of survival and improved health due to HAART may also earlier about not being to or long enough to a However, the adverse of on their health to be of HIV-infected women the and of in the HAART Many infected individuals from HAART are also to work to their to become more to feel more and to however, uncertainty the impact of the stress of work their their after a long period of and their ability to their their health decline Many also about and in the Moreover, not all those using the new treatments feel to but may feel to do so the public perception of the new therapies as infected persons may that others view them as The of extended survival has also many infected individuals to the they have made their relationships Those a many of the confronted before HAART, the anxiety of one's HIV one's and Moreover, in an era of viral the of and may a considerable in relationships. The of living longer and may those who have in relationships because of about health and to the of these relationships Furthermore, the of of and sexual relationships may be anxiety when infected individuals do not feel for these changes The diagnosis of a chronic illness typically necessitates identity work Infected individuals differ in how they integrate their illness in their one are those who their life around their illness. These individuals may work or for AIDS are in or social on of infected and largely their social to other infected the other are those who have to and their illness while as much as possible with their to the illness from a in their In the era, many living with HIV/AIDS now have the opportunity to as living with a chronic illness rather than from a disease. Furthermore, new treatments have patients to feel and to their for longer periods of time, thus the and of the illness and the of the patient However, patients may feel their medication regimens are a of their patient From the outset of the epidemic, infected individuals have been and by have been to and social among physicians and in the United States to care for HIV-infected individuals has been well since early in the reluctance to care for these patients between 1991 and in HIV-related in the United States some but also some of stigma, support for (e.g., had significantly in almost of the that those with AIDS were responsible for the illness. Furthermore, significant they would be or having their with a with AIDS or having an with AIDS or at a where the had AIDS substantial also in that HIV could be transmitted through with AIDS on the a with them and using public all likely to be with to and HIV-infected has also that AIDS is on the it may be and at infected groups and of infected individuals may be greater in developing countries where there has been public education about the disease study of HIV-infected women in rural their that the to them at the time of delivery because of their infected that the medical were infected patients to the were also by study and so was their fear that their would or them Many infected individuals and the and feel and however, the and the and to public patients to remain for longer periods of time, the new treatments have made it possible for them to their illness longer and to as Their social identity as is thus and the many infected individuals experience with their distressing consequences are Yet, they may the psychological of having to a identity and possibly needed adherence The by of the of protease inhibitors was by the that adherence to these and regimens was often a task has been attributed to the to medication fear of the high that medication use will to of illness, and the of For these many individuals treatment or have been unwilling to use protease inhibitors from their physicians to do so While the of the recently regimens for treatment are being the impact of these of treatment on adherence remains to be While the of intervals may adherence because patients can to these treatment they also may adherence by patients to initiate their own who are to adherence to treatment regimens may engage in and have a of Those adhering to but not the dramatic health that early media with the ‘miraculous’ new medications may experience a of anxiety and fear and have also that, before HAART, all infected individuals a from the illness. However, now that some from treatment while others do of and has been by one of as becomes more that can be by and individual but also the to and (p. Finally, because many will not from HAART, those who do may experience a of similar to that in gay men who and to AIDS earlier in the care an part of the management of most chronic Many individuals living with HIV/AIDS engage in a variety of self-care to their immune system, to disease to stress and to symptoms. may be as as that their in a that for periods of so as to manage, for instance, remains a although we have an study infected individuals’ self-initiated for managing symptoms that they to the illness or to antiretroviral The research has focused on the use of and the of the new treatment use by HIV-infected persons has not diminished in the HAART era and and and or are used by infected adults in an to their immune system, to symptoms or medication and to stress. However, as most research has been on gay men with high levels of these findings may not be to other more disadvantaged populations, such as and In own we have found that infected adults often to when they cannot the side-effects of antiretrovirals or they Furthermore, most as than treatments. to these therapies is also by since the of many of are not by health in the era of HAART There is a that the of the new HAART and the availability of may to an in for a variety of the that AIDS is a chronic illness may significantly the of infection that has the of risk with considerably extended for may be a task for especially they feel well and become in relationships. some that having an viral load the of the to a on the impact of the new therapies on infected and although that the new treatments are about the of and sometimes also behaviors In a study of women and of heterosexual were asked about their and sexual behaviors the of viral and the new treatments. While many study that they were not as about being HIV positive because of the improved and they viewed AIDS as a less illness in the protease inhibitors era, they also that viral load and the new therapies (including have not them from Other however, evidence that the new treatments are in of sexual especially among gay and bisexual In one investigators found that, among active gay and bisexual those having sexual were more likely to the that having a who protease inhibitors or whose viral load is is less Additionally, a study of and heterosexual found that gay and bisexual men were more likely to sexual with or status in the HAART era while the sexual of heterosexual Finally, in a study of men and women who were and in more since the new therapies became available for future research for future research are suggested by the present that in survival and quality of life made possible by HAART can only be by those to these we must the treatment are the characteristics and of infected individuals who choose to remain antiretroviral to to their disease through or some other form or The phenomenon of long-term survivors be a one as treatments to the life expectancy of infected How is the of of later impacted by this illness. How HIV/AIDS or In the United States, HIV/AIDS has been a health in rural however, the of research on the disease has been on where health and social are more available and infected individuals may be more research whether the of living with HIV/AIDS in rural the rapid into rural among adolescents, heterosexual women, and future prevention and studies need to these more recently of risk behaviors and interventions behaviors were from work with gay and often these and interventions are in and long-term adherence to among the more recently populations be investigated. The of the epidemic, extended and new of AIDS as a manageable chronic illness may the of new prevention of the consequences that the new of AIDS as a manageable disease will have on and active of HIV-infected individuals is also As the treatment advances the and the health of will the fear and with the disease and, will social of those infected The issue of also be examined. HIV-infected individuals feel less about their illness, and are they more to their HIV status to in light of recent treatment advances and their consequences for those living with the As the present there are many continuities as well as discontinuities in the experience of living with HIV/AIDS over the past There is to feel by the that has been made since the of the in the diagnosis, treatment and clinical management of this disease. however, are still many of the psychosocial as in the pre-HAART era, in While we AIDS as a chronic illness, we to and we have about to with the illness, since many of the issues remain as the

AIDS · review · 178 citationsread the source →

Heart rate variability

IN FOCUSHeart rate variabilityHarald M. StaussHarald M. StaussDepartment of Exercise Science, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa 52242Published Online:01 Nov 2003https://doi.org/10.1152/ajpregu.00452.2003MoreSectionsPDF (59 KB)Download PDF ToolsExport citationAdd to favoritesGet permissionsTrack citations the rhythm of the heart has not only fascinated cardiologists but also inspired poets and musicians. Indeed, the periodic beat of the heart was used to define the speed of music. In music notation, the traditional Italian term "moderato" originally referred to one beat of the measure per walking pace (76-80 paces/min) or heartbeat (∼72 beats/min). The use of the heartbeat to define the speed of music may imply that the periodicity of the beat of the heart is very constant. However, this is not necessarily the case. In fact, loss of heart rate variability can indicate severe cardiovascular diseases and reliably predict poor outcome of such conditions (18, 22, 27, 47a). This In Focus article reviews sources of heart rate variability, its role as a prognostic marker for cardiovascular diseases, and its application in estimation of cardiac autonomic nervous system activity. All of these topics have been addressed intensely in articles published in the American Journal of Physiology-Regulatory, Integrative and Comparative Physiology during the last two years. In healthy subjects, the sinoatrial node located at the posterior wall of the right atrium initiates each beat of the heart. Due to the unstable membrane potential of the myocytes located in this region, action potentials are generated periodically at a fairly constant frequency. This relatively constant frequency generated by the autorhythmicity of the sinoatrial node is modulated by many factors that add variability to the heart rate signal at different frequencies. According to the Task Force of The European Society of Cardiology and The North American Society of Pacing and Electrophysiology (47a) these frequencies are classified into 1) ultra-low frequencies (ULF; >5-h cycle length) that include the circadian rhythm (6, 9, 34, 54); 2) very low frequencies (VLF; >25-s cycle length) that are supposed to be affected by temperature regulation (1, 7, 34, 52, 54) and humoral systems (9, 36); 3) low frequencies (LF; >6-s cycle length in humans) that are sensitive to changes in cardiac sympathetic (and presumably parasympathetic) nerve activity (27, 30); and 4) high frequencies (HF; 2.5- to 6.0-s cycle length in humans) that are synchronized to the respiratory rhythm (5) and are primarily modulated by cardiac parasympathetic innervation (38).The most prominent oscillation in the ULF band of the heart rate spectrum is the circadian rhythm. The autonomic nervous system contributes significantly to circadian heart rate variability. Using long-term recordings in conscious rabbits, Barrett et al. (6) demonstrated a strong circadian rhythm in heart rate, mean arterial blood pressure, renal blood flow, and renal sympathetic nerve activity. The importance of this study is that it clearly demonstrates that sympathetic nerve discharges exhibit a strong circadian rhythmicity. The paraventricular nucleus of the hypothalamus (PVN) appears to play a central role in mediating the circadian rhythm of autonomic nervous system activity. First, GABAergic and glutamatergic neurons project from the suprachiasmatic nuclei of the hypothalamus (SCN) to spinal-projecting neurons of the PVN (12). The SCN is the major central oscillator that triggers the day/night cycle. It receives photic input from the retina (47) and drives many neuroendocrine, metabolic, autonomic, and behavioral circadian rhythms (14, 16, 21, 31, 35, 44, 46, 50). In addition, microinjections of the inhibitory neurotransmitter GABA into the PVN of anesthetized rats elicit dose-dependent decreases in renal sympathetic nerve activity, whereas bicuculline (a GABA antagonist) increases renal sympathetic nerve activity (56). Second, from the PVN, neurons project to the nucleus of the solitary tract (that integrates inputs from the baroreceptors), the nucleus ambiguus (origin of preganglionic parasympathetic neurons to the heart), the rostroventrolateral medulla (location of sympathetic premotor neurons), and the intermediolateral cell column of the thoracolumbar spinal cord (location of preganglionic sympathetic neurons). Thus PVN neurons can modulate autonomic nervous system activity by sending inputs to major sites of autonomic nervous system regulation. As an example, a pivotal role of the PVN for sympathoexcitation during parturition was recently demonstrated in sheep. The increase in sympathetic nerve activity that accompanies birth in maternal animals was prevented by stereotactic lesioning of the PVN (43). Taken together, a major component of the circadian heart rate variability is elicited by diurnal fluctuations in autonomic nervous system activity, generated by corresponding fluctuations of neuronal activity within the PVN, which depend on circadian inputs originating from the SCN.It has been suggested that thermoregulation affects VLF heart rate variability (10, 26). Cooling the heart causes bradycardia, a mechanism used in heart surgeries. Conversely, fever is known to increase heart rate. Raising body core temperature from 36.0 to 36.6°C caused an increase in heart rate by almost 40 beats/min in male subjects (1), whereas acutely reducing ambient temperature from thermoneutral conditions (35°C) to 29, 23, and 17°C, reduced heart rate from 400 to 250 beats/min in 8-day-old rats (7). In addition, lowering temperature in the isolated working rat heart from 37 to 31°C reduced heart rate from 332 to 215 beats/min and markedly increased heart rate variability (28), indicating that parts of the temperature effects on heart rate and heart rate variability are independent from the autonomic nervous system. In contrast to the tachycardia that accompanies acute elevations in temperature, chronically raising ambient temperature in adult rodents from a standard housing temperature of 21-23°C to thermoneutral conditions (29-30°C) reduced heart rate by roughly 50 beats/min in rats (34) and by 200-300 beats/min in mice (54). The authors of these articles (34, 54) suggested that standard housing temperatures are associated with cold stress that causes parallel activation of brown adipose tissue, cardiac, and vasomotor sympathetic drives that elicits nonshivering thermogenesis and tonically elevates heart rate and arterial blood pressure. These and other studies indicate that both direct effects of temperature on pacemaker activity of the sinus node (28) and indirect effects mediated via the autonomic nervous system (11, 25, 51, 55) mediate temperature effects on heart rate and heart rate variability. Thus fluctuation in temperature is an important source of heart rate variability that should not be underestimated. In a more recent study, this was taken into account by core body temperature correction of heart rate variability (3).Endocrine factors affecting heart rate variability include thyroxine, reproductive hormones, the renin-angiotensin system, steroids, and others. Chronic subcutaneous infusion of angiotensin II in rats markedly increased blood pressure and heart rate variability, expressed as standard deviation (9). In contrast, chronic corticosterone treatment is likely to reduce baroreflex-mediated heart rate variability, because baroreceptor-heart rate (39) and baroreceptor-renal sympathetic nerve activity reflex sensitivity (41) were blunted in chronically corticosterone-treated rats. Furthermore, an interaction between angiotensin II and glucocorticoids was recently described. Intracerebro-ventricular microinjections of angiotensin II AT1 receptor antagonists caused marked decreases in mean blood pressure and heart rate in rats chronically treated with corticosterone but not in control animals (40). This interaction is likely to take place in the central nervous system, because peripheral angiotensin II AT1 receptor blockade did not alter the effects of betamethasone treatment on blood pressure, heart rate, and baroreceptor-heart rate reflex sensitivity in newborn lambs (42).Adenosine is a substance less known to affect heart rate variability. It is produced locally in the heart (53) and binds to A1-adenosinergic receptors, which are among the earliest expressed G protein-coupled receptors in the heart (36). The A1-adenosinergic agonist N6-cyclopentyladenosine dose dependently reduced heart rate in murine embryos, whereas 1,3-dipropyl-8-cyclopentylxanthine, an A1-adenosinergic antagonist, increased heart rate (36). Adenosine also exerts central nervous system effects in various brain areas (15, 20). Microinjections of adenosine into the nucleus of the solitary tract of awake rats caused dose-dependent changes in heart rate: low doses (0.01 nmol) produced a bradycardic response, whereas high doses (2.5-5.0 nmol) elicited a tachycardic response (15). Thus adenosine may indeed be involved in the regulation of heart rate and modulate heart rate variability via local cardiac and central nervous system effects. It has been proposed that the intrinsic cardiac nervous system plays an active role in regulating cardiac function (4, 37, 45, 57). This nervous system consists of sympathetic and parasympathetic neurons and interconnecting local circuits (37). Neurons in the canine right atrial ganglionated plexus (RAGP) spontaneously generate activity even after chronic cardiac autonomic denervation (45). Right atrial neurons in patients undergoing coronary artery bypass surgery generated spontaneous activity that was unrelated to the cardiac cycle but sensitive to changes in systemic arterial pressure, indicating that these neurons receive pressure-sensitive sensory inputs (4). In addition, it has been suggested that substance P acts as a neuromodulator and neurotransmitter in intracardiac ganglia of the guinea pig, modulates the response to vagal inputs, and triggers action potentials at the site of parasympathetic ganglia independent of acetylcholine (57). Furthermore, the right atrial (RAGP) and the posterior atrial ganglionated plexus (PAGP) appear to have different functions. Ablation of the PAGP reduced vagally mediated bradycardia by 26%, whereas RAGP ablation completely abolished this response. Inhibition of sympathetically mediated tachycardia by vagal stimulation was attenuated by ablation of either plexus (37). Thus parasympathetic efferent neurons are primarily located in the RAGP, whereas prejunctional parasympathetic-sympathetic interactions also involve neurons within the PAGP (37). The spontaneous activity of neurons in the intrinsic cardiac nervous system, even after cardiac denervation (45), suggests an active role of this system in regulating heart rate. However, the impact of the intrinsic cardiac nervous system on heart rate variability remains to be elucidated. The importance of the autonomic nervous system for heart rate variability in humans becomes apparent in patients following cardiac transplantation, in whom heart rate variability is markedly reduced (49). Although reinnervation is possible after months and years, initially transplanted hearts can be considered to be denervated. Thus the reduced heart rate variability in cardiac transplanted patients (49) underlines the importance of an intact autonomic innervation for spontaneously occurring heart rate variability. A major component of the chronotropic effect of the autonomic nervous system is linked to cAMP. Intracellular cAMP increases the inward current of Na+ (funny current, If), which determines the rate of the slow diastolic depolarization that precedes each action potential. The activity of adenylate cyclase and thus intracellular cAMP levels are increased by stimulation of sympathetic β1-adrenergic receptors and decreased (via a Gi protein) by stimulation of parasympathetic muscarinic receptors. Thus cardiac sympathetic innervation increases the rate of the slow diastolic depolarization and accelerates heart rate, while cardiac parasympathetic innervation elicits opposite effects. Interestingly, parasympathetic-mediated changes in heart rate occur much faster than sympathetic-mediated effects on heart rate (27, 30, 47a). As a result, cardiac sympathetic nervous system activity can only affect LF components of heart rate variability, whereas the parasympathetic nervous system can also modulate HF components. A hitherto unsolved question in this context is if the rapid heart rate response to parasympathetic stimulation compared with the slow effect of sympathetic inputs is due to 1) different kinetics of β1-adrenergic vs. muscarinic receptors, 2) different kinetics of adenylate cyclase vs. phosphodiesterase, the enzyme that cleaves cAMP, or 3) fast parasympathetic-mediated opening of KACh channels (via muscarinic receptors and a GK protein). Support for the latter possibility comes from experiments in the rabbit sinoatrial node that demonstrated that activation of KACh channels contributes to the initial slowing of heart rate as a result of vagal stimulation (8).On the basis of the different frequency response characteristics of sympathetic and parasympathetic modulation of heart rate, frequency analysis of heart rate variability is often used as a tool to determine "autonomic balance" or sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system activity (27, 47a). As an example, the wavelet transform was recently used to determine cardiac autonomic responses to reperfusion in patients with thrombolysis after coronary thrombosis. Depending on the location of the infarct, marked alterations in LF or HF spectral power of heart rate or in the LF/HF ratio was observed in all successful reperfusions (48).The HF component corresponds to the frequency of respiration and is driven by the vagus as indicated by the strong respiratory pattern of cardiac vagal motoneurons in the nucleus ambiguus (38). The LF component has been ascribed to sympathetic modulation of cardiac pacemaker activity, because a variety of studies demonstrated that acute interventions that increase sympathetic nervous system activity, such as orthostatic perturbations (17, 19, 33), mental stress (32), or handgrip exercise (13, 24) increases LF spectral power of heart rate (27, 30). In addition to acute perturbations of cardiac sympathetic nerve activity, feedback oscillations generated by the baroreceptor reflex also appear to contribute to LF spectral power of heart rate as it was demonstrated that sinoaortic denervation markedly reduces the LF component (27, 30). Despite the strong modulation of heart rate by the autonomic nervous system, the LF and HF spectral components of heart rate variability may not always be very reliable markers for cardiac sympathetic and parasympathetic "tone" (30). In a recent study, muscle sympathetic nerve activity was recorded together with heart rate variability during application of lower body negative pressure that is known to increase muscle sympathetic nerve activity (17, 33). At higher levels of lower body negative pressure (-15 mmHg), both muscle sympathetic nerve activity and relative LF spectral power of heart rate increased significantly, whereas HF spectral power decreased (17). These findings suggest that LF spectral power reflects cardiac sympathetic "tone." However, no correlation within subjects was found between changes in LF/HF ratio and muscle sympathetic nerve activity (17). Thus heart rate variability does not reliably reflect the sympathetic response to orthostatic stress. Respiration-related fluctuation of heart rate (respiratory sinus arrhythmia) is probably the most often investigated component of heart rate variability, as it is believed that this component reflects respiration-driven vagal modulation of sinus arrhythmia (27). In a recent study, Rentero et al. (38) recorded the electrical activity from cardiac vagal motoneurons in the nucleus ambiguus. Firing of these neurons was modulated by the central respiratory cycle. This and other studies support the view that respiratory sinus arrhythmia is generated by central coupling of the respiratory oscillator with autonomic centers in the brain stem. However, a mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling as a source of respiration-related heart rate variability has also been suggested (5). The Bainbridge reflex causes a tachycardia in response to hypervolemia. This reflex is initiated by atrial mechanoreceptors and uses efferent sympathetic and parasympathetic pathways to modulate heart rate in response to changes in central venous pressure (23). Thus respiratory changes in central blood volume cause corresponding respiratory fluctuations in cardiac autonomic nervous system activity via the Bainbridge reflex. Only the parasympathetic component of the efferent pathway of the reflex can contribute to respiratory sinus arrhythmia, because sympathetic actions on heart rate are too damped to follow the respiratory frequency. The gain and phase of the transfer function between respiratory changes in lung volume and R-R intervals of the ECG were calculated in human subjects during graded changes in central blood volume (5). At the respiratory frequency, the phase was -180 degree, indicating that an inspiratory increase in central blood volume was associated with a decrease in R-R interval (increase in heart rate). Furthermore, the gain of the transfer function at the respiratory frequency steadily increased with increasing central volumes (except at the highest volume). Both of these findings confirm the presence of the Bainbridge reflex in humans (5). Thus, in addition to the central coupling of respiratory oscillators with cardiovascular centers, the Bainbridge reflex may contribute to respiration-related heart rate variability by mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling. There is general agreement that low heart rate variability is an unfavorable prognostic marker for cardiovascular diseases, such as diabetic autonomic neuropathy, hypertension, myocardial infarction, and heart failure (18, 22, 27, 29, 47a). Heart rate variability (variance of R-R intervals) was reduced in patients with mild hypertension (29) compared with normal values (1,134 ± 202 vs. 3,466 ± 1,018 ms2) provided by the Task Force (47a). In the rat model of myocardial infarction-induced congestive heart failure, Francis and colleagues (18) reported loss of spontaneous heart rate variability 6 wk after coronary artery ligation. Interestingly, reduced heart rate variability was also observed in a rat model of depression that is based on chronic (4 wk) mild stress application (22). Because depression is an independent risk factor for coronary artery disease, this finding may realistically model a human disease process. The reduction in heart rate variability was abolished by β-adrenergic receptor blockade, indicating that the reduced heart rate variability in this model of depression is related to elevated cardiac sympathetic tone (22).In summary, heart rate variability is generated by multiple factors not exclusively limited to the autonomic nervous system. Specific frequency components of heart rate variability mirror acute perturbations of the autonomic nervous system but do not always reflect autonomic nervous system activity. Simple statistics of heart rate variability, such as the standard deviation of R-R intervals in the ECG, can reliably predict the prognosis of cardiovascular diseases.I thank Dr. R. McAllen for critically reviewing the manuscript. References 1 Aoki K, Stephens DP, and Johnson JM. Diurnal variation in cutaneous vasodilator and vasoconstrictor systems during heat stress. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: R591-R595, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar3 Aoyagi N, Ohashi K, and Yamamoto Y. Frequency characteristics of long-term heart rate variability during constant-routine protocol. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 285: R171-R176, 2003.Link | ISI | Google Scholar4 Arora RC, Hirsch GM, Johnson Hirsch K, Hancock Friesen C, and Armour JA. Function of human intrinsic cardiac neurons in situ. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: R1736-R1740, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar5 Barbieri R, Triedman JK, and Saul JP. Heart rate control and mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling to assess central volume: a systems analysis. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: R1210-R1220, 2002.Link | ISI | Google Scholar6 Barrett CJ, Navakatikyan MA, and Malpas SC. Long-term control of renal blood flow: what is the role of the renal nerves? Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: R1534-R1545, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar7 Blumberg MS, Knoot TG, and Kirby RF. Neural and hormonal control of arterial pressure during cold exposure in un-anesthetized week-old rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: R1514-R1521, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar8 Boyett MR, Kodama I, Honjo H, Arai A, Suzuki R, and Toyama J. Ionic basis of the chronotropic effect of acetylcholine on the rabbit sinoatrial node. Cardiovasc Res 29: 867-878, 1995.Crossref | PubMed | ISI | Google Scholar9 Braga and of on fluctuations and changes in blood pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and elicited of heart rate variability. J Physiol | ISI | Google and modulation of sympathetic nerve activity to muscle in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and and GABA mediate suprachiasmatic nucleus inputs to spinal-projecting paraventricular Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and is not associated with of the exercise reflex in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google C, and Y. The effect of on the circadian control of human core body temperature is Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and of adenosine receptors in the does not affect the in awake rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google JK, A, and circadian and during two Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and sympathetic nerve and heart rate spectral effects of lower body negative pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google Francis Johnson and of heart failure after myocardial in the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google A, and of lower body pressure on muscle sympathetic nerve activity response to Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Adenosine initial depression of in the rat in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google R, and and circadian phase in a diurnal the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Johnson alterations and autonomic in an model of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google MA, and The interaction of the Bainbridge and in the conscious Res | ISI | Google A, and handgrip exercise arterial control of sympathetic in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and nerve regulation to is in rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and in heart rate variability. J Physiol | ISI | Google and function and cardiovascular interactions and Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and interval variability in isolated working rat hearts at various conditions and Res | PubMed | Google A, A, and and autonomic of in patients with mild Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google Malpas SC. Neural on cardiovascular and Am J Physiol Heart Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and thermoregulation in and rats in a Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and effects on reflex responses to mental stress in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and reflex during orthostatic in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and and responses to and are in rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and and in a by cycle. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and of humoral heart rate regulation in the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google Armour and within the intrinsic cardiac nervous system contribute to chronotropic regulation. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 285: 2003.Link | ISI | Google Rentero N, A, and McAllen of cardiac vagal motoneurons in rat nucleus ambiguus. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and modulate control of heart rate in conscious rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and central actions of angiotensin to increase arterial pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and modulate control of renal sympathetic nerve activity. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and modulation of cardiovascular and autonomic function in role of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Inhibition of sympathetic responses at birth in by of the paraventricular Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and JP. pattern of during acute and chronic in conscious adult rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google Armour and of chronic cardiac on of canine intracardiac neurons in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and levels and circadian rhythm of activity in the a model of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and nerve response of suprachiasmatic nucleus and Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google

American Journal of Physiology-Regulatory, Integrative and Comparative Physiology · review · 309 citationsread the source →

Inflammation and Schizophrenia

An association between inflammatory abnormalities and schizophrenia has been found repeatedly. The purposes of this special feature are to clarify the key findings on inflammation in schizophrenia, identify major gaps in the literature, and suggest priorities for research in this area. Inflammation is one of the body’s first lines of defense in response to injury or infection, and increased inflammation is found in many diseases. Acute inflammation is a nonspecific response characterized by warmth, pain, and swelling. Leukocytes migrate to the area of injury and become activated, the blood supply to the area increases, and blood vessels become more permeable, allowing cells and molecules to leave blood vessels and enter the injured tissue. The inflammatory response also involves the complement system, a group of proteins that, when activated, combine to form a complex molecular structure that kills cells, usually bacteria and parasites. Cytokines are key molecules that regulate inflammation; they also have important roles in the immune system. They are produced by a wide variety of immune cells and cells outside of the immune system. The term cytokine derives from their ability to influence the movement of inflammatory cells, but they also have other functions. Chronic inflammation is usually a lower grade response, lacks the grossly visible signs of acute inflammation, and may be systemic rather than localized. Chronic inflammation plays a role in the pathophysiology of many chronic diseases, including cardiovascular and cerebrovascular disease, diabetes, Alzheimer’s disease, and some cancers. The characteristics of chronic inflammation differ somewhat in the brain from what occurs in other tissues. An important component of neuroinflammation is the microglial activation. The brain contains relatively few of the inflammatory cells that are found outside the brain. Microglia, which are related to the peripheral inflammatory cells, serve some of the protective functions such cells play in the rest of the body. Microglia are involved in other brain functions, including the pruning and maintenance of synapses, trafficking of neurotransmitters, and devouring—phagocytosis—of cell fragments and damaged cells. Activated microglia produce inflammatory cytokines and the phagocytose cells or proteins that provoke the inflammatory response. Microglial activation and subsequent proinflammatory cytokine production may disrupt the blood-brain barrier (BBB). An intact BBB usually tightly controls the entry of cytokines and leukocytes into brain tissue. Damage to the BBB impairs its ability to control which inflammatory cells and molecules enter the brain; other substances leak into brain tissue, and the brain is unable to function normally. A discussion of prenatal inflammation as a risk factor for schizophrenia is beyond the scope of the present special feature, and the reader is referred to previous reviews of human1,2 and animal studies.3–6 Numerous studies have found that people with schizophrenia have increased blood concentrations of inflammatory cytokines.7 Two important themes emerge from these studies. First, inflammatory abnormalities are present in subjects with first-episode, drug-naive psychosis (FEP) compared with controls, suggesting an association that may be independent of the effects of antipsychotic medications. Second, the concentrations of some inflammatory molecules may vary with the clinical status of patients: ie, there appear to be separate groups of state and trait markers. The state-related markers include interleukin (IL) 1-beta, IL-6, and transforming growth factor-beta. People with schizophrenia have higher concentrations of these cytokines than controls during an exacerbation of symptoms, but there is no difference during periods of clinical stability. IL-12, interferon-gamma, and tumor necrosis factor-alpha (TNF-alpha) appear to be trait markers. Concentrations of these cytokines are higher in patients with FEP than in controls, and in patients with chronic illness, during both periods of symptomatic worsening, than in controls. C-reactive protein (CRP), another proinflammatory molecule, also appears to be a state marker,8 and specific lymphocyte populations may also segregate into state and trait markers.9 Additional evidence for potential state-related markers in schizophrenia has been reviewed elsewhere.10 Two studies suggest that inflammatory molecules may predict subsequent relapse.11,12 Other studies have found abnormal levels of inflammatory parameters in the central nervous system (CNS) in schizophrenia, including cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) cytokine11 and leukocyte levels,13,14 CNS microglia and lymphocytes,15–19 CSF and CNS oxidative stress,20,21 and anti-N-methyl-D-aspartate receptor autoantibodies.22 There is also evidence suggesting that infections may be associated with illness relapse.23 Within schizophrenia, blood cytokine abnormalities have been associated with poorer cognitive function and measures of regional brain volume24–26 and negative symptoms.27–30 There are several randomized clinical trials of the nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) celecoxib and aspirin as adjuncts to antipsychotics.31 Interpretation of this evidence is complex, as these studies have not consistently distinguished relapsed from clinically stable patients. Furthermore, if inflammation plays a role in psychotic relapse, the efficacy of anti-inflammatory treatments may “disappear” in a lengthy trial because the treatment would not have any effect once patients have returned to their clinical baseline. However, an adjunctive agent that accelerates a patient’s antipsychotic response would be valuable. Agents other than NSAIDs that have anti-inflammatory properties, used in adjunct to antipsychotics, have been found to be superior to placebo. There have been two trials of minocycline,32,33 a second-generation tetracycline with anti-inflammatory and antimicrobial effects, that were superior to placebo. The efficacy of minocycline may have “disappeared” over the course of one trial,33 raising the possibility of an effect restricted to relapsed patient and not in those at a stable baseline. Adenosine is a purine nucleoside that modulates many physiological processes and has anti-inflammatory effects. A meta-analysis found that adjunctive treatment with adenosine-modulating drugs is superior to the effects of placebo.34 These drugs were associated with significant symptomatic improvement in inpatients, but not in outpatients, supporting the concept that state/trait differences may be an important predictor of antipsychotic response to adjunctive agents. Oxidative stress refers to an increase in free radicals, highly reactive molecules generated from metabolism and environmental exposures that can damage cell membranes. Inflammation and oxidative stress strongly influence each other.35 Antioxidant drugs decrease oxidative stress. One trial found that adjunctive treatment with the antioxidant N-acetylcysteine significantly reduced psychopathology in schizophrenia.36 A trial of fish oil, which also has significant anti-inflammatory effects, was conducted in adolescents and young adults with subthreshold psychotic symptoms,37 ie, “prodromal” patients. Patients receiving fish oil were significantly less likely to progress to a psychotic disorder than subjects receiving a placebo. Interestingly, fish oil was prescribed for 12 weeks, but the protective benefits with regards to transition to psychosis remained significant for 40 weeks after cessation of treatment. Inflammation may be a common mediator of diverse prenatal risk factors for schizophrenia, including preterm labor; preeclampsia (pregnancy-induced hypertension); neonatal birth asphyxia; and maternal gestational diabetes, stress, and depression.2 Maternal serum concentrations of the cytokines IL-838 and TNF-alpha39 during pregnancy were associated with an increased risk of schizophrenia in the offspring. Animal studies suggest that inflammation during critical periods of neurodevelopment may permanently alter the “set-point” of the inflammatory system, with increased inflammation in adult offspring.40–45 Meta-analyses have confirmed the presence of other abnormalities in schizophrenia that are associated with inflammation: increased autoantibodies,22 oxidative stress,46 CRP,8 and circulating lymphocytes.9 Antibodies are crucial “weapons” the immune system uses against foreign proteins. Autoantibodies, antibodies against a person’s own proteins, are associated with cytokine abnormalities.47 Lymphocytes, a group of white blood cells that combat infections, produce antibodies, and are an important source of cytokines, are increased in schizophrenia.9 Some subsets of lymphocytes may be state markers for acute psychosis, whereas others may be trait markers.9 CRP is a protein synthesized by the liver in response to inflammation, particularly IL-6 and other cytokines. Inflammation and oxidative stress may contribute to the decreased blood and CNS membrane levels of polyunsaturated fatty acids observed in schizophrenia.48 There are other disorders outside of schizophrenia in which peripheral inflammation appears to impact brain function. Inflammation is a risk factor for Alzheimer’s disease and mild cognitive impairment,49 rheumatoid arthritis is a risk factor for dementia,50 and “sickness behavior” is induced by peripheral cytokines.51,52 Depression is also associated with increased inflammation.53 The effects in depressed patients of an antibody against the cytokine TNF-alpha54 support the concept that brain function is impacted by peripheral cytokines. There are other mechanisms by which peripheral inflammation might cause or reflect brain dysfunction in schizophrenia. Cytokines may directly modulate dopaminergic neurotransmission55–57 or indirectly modulate glutamatergic neurotransmission through tryptophan metabolism.58–61 There is also some movement of peripheral leukocytes into the brain parenchyma, and the interaction of cytokines with the vagus nerve influences brain function.62 Blood cytokines induce cytokine production in the cells that form the BBB, and cytokines may move into the brain via the circumventricular organs, which lack a BBB.62 Inflammation may also disrupt the BBB, resulting in abnormal trafficking of cells and inflammatory molecules between blood and brain. Some have suggested that the increase in blood concentrations of the protein S100-beta in schizophrenia63 is consistent with abnormal function of the BBB in people with schizophrenia, resulting in abnormal trafficking of cells and inflammatory molecules between blood and brain. However, circulating S100-beta has sources other than the brain.64,65 Several potentially confounding variables are important to consider in studies of inflammation. Antipsychotics increase the risk of weight gain and diabetes, which are associated with inflammation. However, there is evidence from meta-analyses of abnormal inflammatory parameters in FEP,8,9,22,46 suggesting that the association between schizophrenia and inflammation is not solely due to antipsychotics. Antipsychotic-naïve relatives of people with schizophrenia also have increased inflammation compared with controls.66–68 Other potentially confounding variables include body mass index, age, gender, smoking, alcohol and illicit drug use, and whether patients are fasting at the time of sampling.69 The proportion of studies that either matched patients and controls, or statistically controlled for many of these potential confounders, has been low.8,9,22,46 Inflammation is comorbid with other physiological abnormalities, including hypertension, impaired glucose tolerance (fasting blood glucose [FBG] 100–126mg/dl), diabetes (FBG > 126, or a random blood glucose >200mg/dl), and increased oxidative stress. The associations with these other conditions also support the plausibility of increased inflammation in schizophrenia. However, the comorbidity of these physiological measures in schizophrenia complicates the interpretation of adjunctive treatment trials: what is the best therapeutic target? Another complicating issue is the relationship of inflammation to neurotropic viruses. One study found that treatment of patients with antibodies to herpes simplex 1 virus with a herpes-specific antiviral drug improved cognition with impressive effect sizes, suggesting the presence of an ongoing problem related to the virus.70 The association of other infectious agents with schizophrenia also raises the question of what relationship might exist between inflammation and either chronic infections or the expression of genes derived from an infectious agent and integrated into human DNA. The background presented above can be used to guide future research. Attempts to replicate current findings in well-matched patients and controls would be helpful. Cytokine levels in subjects with prodromal psychosis have not been investigated. We would hypothesize that these subjects should have abnormal trait markers compared with controls; within prodromal subjects, those who develop clinical psychosis should have abnormal state markers compared with high-risk subjects who do not. The effects of fish oil in preventing conversion to psychosis in high-risk subjects should be investigated in relationship to its effects on inflammation. The therapeutic anti-inflammatory agents that have been studied to date, such as aspirin, celecoxib, and fish oil, have multiple actions. Specific antibodies against individual cytokines are used in the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis and have been studied in depression.54 A change in symptoms or cognition in response to these antibodies would directly implicate inflammation in the pathophysiology of schizophrenia. More longitudinal studies with serial measurement of inflammatory parameters across the clinical course of illness are needed. It would be useful to test the hypothesis that patients with treatment-resistant schizophrenia have a different inflammatory profile than other patients with schizophrenia.7 Although it seems likely that there is increased inflammation in the brain when there are cytokine increases in the peripheral blood, the response might not be exactly the same in these two compartments. For instance, the inflammatory cytokines with altered levels in the brain might not be the same as those that change in the blood. More studies of markers of inflammation in the CNS—including CSF, postmortem analyses, and imaging studies—are needed. Two strategies may increase the signal-to-noise ratio for adjunctive trials of anti-inflammatory agents. First, inflammation may play a role in some patients with schizophrenia but not others. Patients with evidence of inflammation in the peripheral blood may be more likely to respond to an anti-inflammatory treatment strategy than those without inflammation and should be the ones included in treatment studies. Second, acutely ill and stable patients should be studied in separate trials and considered separately in meta-analyses. Furthermore, baseline-to-end-point analyses may not appropriate for studies of relapsed patients because there may be faster improvement with the use of adjunctive anti-inflammatories but not a greater total improvement by the end of the study. Studies of inflammation in schizophrenia should assess possible relationships of inflammatory cells and molecules to symptoms and cognition. To date, few studies have considered these measures.8,9,22,46 The comorbidity of inflammation, oxidative stress, hypertension, and abnormal glucose concentrations raise the issue what is the most appropriate treatment target in schizophrenia. As a first step in understanding this issue, it would be helpful to investigate relationships between inflammation, oxidative stress, hypertension, and glucose intolerance on the one hand, and clinical variables on the other. Several studies found that first-degree relatives of people with schizophrenia have increased inflammation and oxidative stress.66–68 It would advance the field to test the hypothesis that relatives have abnormal concentrations of the trait markers for schizophrenia but not of the state markers associated with relapse. Inflammatory molecules do not work in isolation but have complex interactions among themselves and with other systems. Most previous studies have measured only a small number of molecules. Concurrent measurement of cytokines, leukocytes, oxidative stress, and related parameters would increase the ability to make broader inferences regarding inflammation. Furthermore, if groups or clusters of covarying molecules—ie, molecules that change simultaneously—could be defined within schizophrenia, investigation of these groups is likely to yield better signal-to-noise ratios than individual molecules and should have more biological validity. Does increased inflammation due to infections or physical trauma increase the risk of relapse? If so, do preventive measures (eg, antibiotic prophylaxis for recurrent urinary tract infections)23 decrease that risk? What is the relationship between inflammation and the presence of antibodies to herpes viruses, toxoplasmosis, etc? Although the evidence on inflammation in schizophrenia is provocative, the number of studies in some areas is small, and increased methodological rigor is needed. Nonetheless, the evidence from FEP and first-degree relatives of patients with schizophrenia supports the idea that increased inflammation is truly associated with schizophrenia. This research raises the possibility that further study of inflammation will lead to greater understanding of the etiology and pathophysiology of schizophrenia. Dr B.K. is a member of Advisory Boards for Genentech and Roche. In the past 3 years, Dr B.J.M has received grant support from the National Institute of Mental Health (K23MH098014), the Georgia Regents University (GRU) Intramural Scientist Training Program, the GRU Brain & Behavior and Immunotherapy Discovery Institutes, the University of Oulu (Finland), the Thule Institute of the University of Oulu, and Oy H. Lundbeck Ab; research support from the National Institutes of Health Clinical Loan Repayment Program; consultancy fees for surveys from Medefied Europe and Plaza Research, on behalf of Genetech/Roche; speaker fees for grand rounds lectures from the Maryland Psychiatric Research Center and the Texas A&M University and Scott and White Hospital Department of Psychiatry; and payment for a survey from e-Rewards Medical Market Research.

Schizophrenia Bulletin · review · 315 citationsread the source →

Programmatic approaches to achieving equity for women in anesthesiology

Key points Women anesthesiologists can experience barriers and bias in the workplace, which varies in nature across their career and can negatively hinder professional development. Mitigation of these barriers and discrimination can be achieved through: (1) addressing individual bias, (2) closing the knowledge gap on the scope of bias, (3) deliberate representation, (4) strengthening professional networks, and (5) organized efforts to create policies that address gender inequity in the workplace. Women in anesthesiology is one example of several organized initiatives and programs that promote gender equity for women anesthesiologists of all identities. Introduction Women have long fought for equity in medicine and to be treated respectfully and professionally as physicians. One hundred seventy-five years ago, Elizabeth Blackwell was admitted to medical school as a joke, and since then, the viewpoint that medicine is emotionally undesirable, intellectually taxing, and physically draining for women has persisted. Pioneering women anesthesiologists, including Isabella Herb and Virginia Apgar, were discouraged from training as surgeons and pushed into the lower paying and “lower status” specialty of anesthesiology. Despite 50 years since the passage of Title IV, a Federal civil rights law that prohibits discrimination on the basis of sex in any educational program or activity that receives federal funding, and the fact that half of the medical students are women, there is still major attrition of women as they advance in anesthesiology residencies, careers, and leadership.1,2 Recent studies have attempted to examine the reasons for this inequity and bring awareness of the widespread discrimination and systemic bias affecting women anesthesiologists and their departure from medicine.1,3–8 Identifying as a woman in anesthesiology is multifaceted and nuanced. Women can be at different points in their professional careers and personal lives. This may be associated with a broad spectrum of identities, including but not limited to clinicians, academicians, activists, or advocates, as well as mothers, children, siblings, or partners. These identities also intersect with sexuality, race, ethnicity, culture, spirituality, and community. This diversity of lived experiences is why blanket assumptions about women anesthesiologists should be avoided. However, despite these varied identities, all women anesthesiologists are subject to institutional and cultural norms regarding gender. Therefore, the development of multiple initiatives and programs to promote gender equity for women anesthesiologists of all identities is paramount. In this article, we will review the scope of the gender problem in our specialty, discuss proposed strategies to enhance equity, and examine 1 organization’s approach to advocating for gender equity in anesthesiology. Scope of the problem Overworked, undervalued, harassed, and silenced. These are the sentiments of many women in anesthesiology. Many of the challenges encountered are synergized by a climate and culture that enable and fail to adequately address these issues.9 Gender disparities within anesthesiology exist because of systemic barriers and biases, limited number of women in anesthesiology leadership, and limited mentorship.5 The proportion of women physicians in anesthesiology ranks in the lower third among all medical specialties.10 Despite significant advances in the number of women entering medicine over the last few decades, anesthesiology programs have yet to achieve gender parity.7 Among anesthesiology residents, 33% are women. Women represent 25% of the overall anesthesiology workforce and 37% of the academic anesthesiology workforce, and these numbers remain relatively static.1,6,8 Meanwhile, other surgical and procedural subspecialties have doubled and tripled the percentage of women in their field and surpassed anesthesiology. Women anesthesiologists also are underrepresented in various positions of leadership or influence, and as authors and editors.4 They are paid significantly less than their male counterparts for equitable work, with an annual pay gap of 8%, or $32,000 a year, and are overall more likely to be in a lower salary range.5 Over a 30-year career span, this translates to roughly $1,000,000 in lost earnings.5 Even after adjusting for age, work experience, hours worked, academic productivity, and rank, the gap in gender pay remained and in fact, widened over the course of an anesthesiologist’s career.5 There are several systemic issues that hinder the recruitment, retention, and success of women in anesthesiology. Women physicians, relative to men, encounter additional hurdles to performing their jobs, especially at the early stages of their careers.11 Women physicians are more frequently asked about their age and experience compared with their men counterparts. A study found when treatment advice was given by an inexperienced physician, and participants reported relying significantly more on the advice of a man versus a woman.11 This suggests that some of the hurdles that women physicians face are rooted in the psychological biases of others rather than objective features of cases or treatment settings.11 The results of the few studies examining the effects of gender on daily practice in the specialty of anesthesiology are discouraging. A recent survey study assessing gender disparities perceived by women anesthesiologists found that majority (90%) of the respondents felt that women in medicine need to work harder than men to achieve the same career goals, and sexual harassment was experienced by 55%.12 Similarly, in a survey of women cardiothoracic anesthesiologists, 24% of respondents reported experiencing unwanted physical or sexual advances, and 45% reported experiencing verbal harassment.13 The majority of respondents also reported experiencing intimidation or derogatory language in the workplace.13 As well stated by the authors: “lack of psychological safety and respect in working environments increases the risk of communication failures, and intimidation in the setting of managing surgical patients increases stress and risk for burnout”.13 The original “pipeline theory” proposed that sex-based discrimination in academic medicine would diminish once women achieved a critical mass of > 30% of the academic workforce.14 Interestingly, “women who examine trends in sex disparities in the workplace are often ridiculed, labeled as whining, or determined to be less capable in their ability to lead.”15 Paired with that, women physicians are less likely to be addressed as “doctor,” they are more likely to be interrupted (at times in the middle of their preoperative assessment), and more likely to be labeled as “bossy” when asserting information.16 The culture of medicine is unlikely to change without improving formal reporting mechanisms of sex-based discrimination and sexual harassment.14 Unfortunately, the prevalence of sexist microaggressions against women anesthesiologists is still high, and this ongoing workplace mistreatment can cause chronic and severe distress.17 Sex equity is an issue of urgency in the practice of anesthesiology. Those in leadership positions have the additional responsibility of leveraging their power to influence the broader institutional culture.15 Having women at the top of organizations has been shown to improve organizational performance.18 Women represent approximately half of students entering medical school and ~41% of full-time academic faculty,19 yet women constitute a minority of leaders.20 Sex disparities continue to exist at the upper levels of leadership in academic anesthesiology.1 Only 18% of women are professors, and the percentage of women anesthesiology department chairs remains unchanged from 2006 to 2016 (12.7% vs. 14%).21 As of this writing, neither Anesthesia & Analgesia nor Anesthesiology has had a woman Editor-in-Chief. On that note, men and women have significant differences in measures of publication productivity, a recent study demonstrating that male anesthesiologists had a higher h-index, number of publications, and number of citations.22 Women have also been underrepresented in national meetings with fewer speaker opportunities.8 Overall, the extremely limited proportion of women professors and chairs in anesthesiology, presidents of professional societies, and senior editors of specialty journals speak for itself when it comes to a lack of visibility at the highest level of the specialty.9 Despite the many barriers that women experience, they are just as eager as men to assume leadership positions.23 The “glass ceiling” still exists within the culture of anesthesiology, benefiting the “masculine” attitudes in the competition for academic positions.24 We need to change this outdated culture and climate in anesthesiology and create and help elevate more women into a pathway of equity. Anesthesiologists and pregnancy Pregnancy and motherhood have a tremendous impact on sex discrimination in anesthesiology. A woman’s peak fertility often coincides with residency training and early career, a time when one’s career trajectory becomes established. This is also the time when the sex gap in academic promotion and productivity widens. Having children at that time is a challenge, and it is known that work demands adversely affect women anesthesiologists’ desired number of children and the desired age of childbearing. Anesthesiologists have the highest rate of maternal discrimination among all medical specialties.25 Sixty percent of anesthesiology residents reported a negative stigma around being pregnant and having children during training, and about half of trainees reported feeling discouraged from becoming pregnant or breastfeeding during training.7,26,27 Difficulties faced by women who are pregnant during training include inadequate maternity leave, insufficient access to lactation facilities at work, and negative culture surrounding pregnancy during training.26 Because of obstacles pertaining to motherhood, 1 in 10 female anesthesiologists would counsel a student against a career in anesthesiology.7 However, 86.2% of women anesthesiologists indicated that if given a choice again, they would still have their child during training despite these obstacles.26 Given the negative stigma associated with pregnancy in residency training, many women delay pregnancy until their early career, which typically occurs in the early 30s, leading to a higher likelihood of infertility.28 Approximately one-fourth of American female physicians are diagnosed with infertility at almost 34 years old, with a third of those due to diminished ovarian reserve, and this rate is significantly higher than the general population and other professionals that pursued higher education and careers.28,29 Contributing factors to the high rate of infertility among women in medicine may include stressors intrinsic to training, long hours, and night shifts.29 Infertility can lead to substantial depression, anxiety, burnout, and family planning regrets.28,29 Compounding the physical and emotional challenges of infertility is the exorbitant financial burden of treatment.29 In the United States, in vitro fertilization (IVF) costs ~$15,000 per round of treatment, not including the cost of medication.29 Unfortunately, fertility coverage for the majority of health professionals is lacking, and many medical institutions provide limited fertility coverage that will cover ~1 to 2 IVF cycles.29 In comparison, companies in the business, technology, and social media sector are recognizing the growing need for fertility coverage and are offering more comprehensive fertility, adoption, and surrogacy coverage, which has promoted physical and emotional well-being, job satisfaction, and enhanced employee recruitment and retention.29,30 In addition to cost, time is an additional barrier for seeking fertility treatment for anesthesiologists, and schedule modifications are often necessary. IVF typically requires the patient to present for multiple in-person monitoring appointments over a 2-week period during ovarian stimulation. On the basis of the outcome of the monitoring, an egg retrieval may be scheduled imminently, with little room for flexibility in timing. Without accommodation, women may need to take a vacation, paid or unpaid time off to undergo treatment, worsening the financial strain of infertility. Women anesthesiologists are also more likely to have pregnancy complications and miscarriages than the general population.31 Data suggests that women who work in the operating room have a higher incidence of first-trimester spontaneous abortions or a higher risk of birth defects.31 Women anesthesiologists report a higher rate of pregnancy complications [premature labor (8.8%), bedrest (7.8%), preeclampsia (6.5%), and a Neonatal Intensive Care Unit (NICU) stay for the baby (5.7%)], negative stigma for taking time off for pregnancy complications, and guilt in burdening colleagues with increased shifts and calls.26 Many attending anesthesiologists do not receive a modified work schedule during pregnancy.27 In some practice models, time off for pregnancy complications may not be paid and may decrease time for parental leave. Parental leave is an essential component to achieving postpartum physical and mental health and is crucial for infant bonding. trainees in parental leave was reported as and a of training programs not have a formal maternity leave trainees a of and for Approximately of anesthesiology residents felt their maternity leave was felt discouraged from taking more time and felt of with on However, of trainees also their programs as in of maternity leave In the American of Anesthesiologists a on which paid parental leave for after birth or of a In the American of Anesthesiology from the which residents to for an additional of leave without In the American of and a parental leave which for all to of parental leave, of for parental leave, without who as attending anesthesiologists report an parental leave time of and a of on the practice maternity leave may be of a of and leave This is in to other as and that have significant in paid parental leave, with companies offering to of paid other women anesthesiologists work postpartum to the to work and face the of lactation in the breastfeeding at a higher rate than the general they have a lower rate by infant age of the report the desired breastfeeding and having lactation In time and lack of can it to there are that are becoming more they may not work for all women. the has a on Among Anesthesia in to lactation in the of with the demands of work, women anesthesiologists face the burden of of of or motherhood, women physicians an of more hours per on are more likely to be the for children or the and are less likely to have a In addition to the women the and mental in labor about the of and labor on the emotional about in and managing is the of and emotional labor and is to as the in the of the The these to the by the to the culture of medicine and in the United In the stages of the some anesthesiologists were on unpaid leave of others work hours because of increased at A survey from the of Anesthesiologists at the time that women anesthesiologists were or given more often than those women who continue working on the they an and as there was about the of the They were to the and the to their from the and the of their children as As a more women anesthesiologists, work hours, to work, and medicine In with school and a on many women their time to on and an of more hours per than on and in a 33% in hours and academic productivity as compared with The percentage of with women as authors during the early stages of the despite the of in the sex gap in academic crucial for academic were also for women physicians as and there was time for because of personal or institutional the provide the flexibility to from the prevalence of and also Overall, the an increased burden on women anesthesiologists to the family and with and the sex gap in academic productivity and strategies to enhance gender equity in anesthesiology strategies to achieve gender equity in our we to gender equity in and policies and in and medical The in all that the to achieving sex equity in our is and is more than women with and leadership However, we that systemic change can be achieved by which were present in all the we (1) addressing individual bias, (2) closing the knowledge gap on the scope of bias, (3) deliberate representation, (4) strengthening professional networks, and (5) organized efforts to create policies that address gender inequity in the workplace. individual bias to create a culture of in a or and training in equity, and is to address individual equity, and training and education can cover a of systemic to as bias, and and can be in a of from individual to There are organizations that provide training, and as and are efforts lead to the of policies and leadership that women in the workplace, should gender equity to be a of the and should in the of sex equity into organizational and the knowledge gap on the scope of bias should be and reported to the of women anesthesiologists, barriers to their and systemic Data include performing of and professional need to be about professional is and among and should be and to and should be There to be deliberate and of women in recruitment, retention, promotion and in including women and their in any or policies are that affect work culture is should be or than that if more than 1 woman is there is a higher likelihood that a woman will achieve a has been in diversity by the of and which to the of women. additional strategies to enhance should by the job of an and should equity rather than flexibility and choice is leave policies with job and for workplace of for and other and policies should be to enhance the of women anesthesiologists at all There should be for and sex-based professional has been on the of women, but there are other that are as including and and help to women and their are and They can and promote women, their and their experience, the woman’s is for the of and media has increased the visibility of women anesthesiologists and has without the to in-person and However, deliberate formal or are also known development and leadership training for women that on and visibility can with efforts to create policies that address sex inequity in the workplace is to that there are challenges to a sex and the gender that are in workplace Women are known as and the of of a is for lactation and by the workplace that is and enhance is to the workplace a more for women to women are not on the promotion and should be In organized efforts to provide professional leadership training, and for women anesthesiologists at the and national levels are This not to enhance the of women but also to help women and address the systemic issues they encounter in a of an example organizations have been that are to improving equity for women These include national organizations in and of the anesthesiology organizations of Anesthesiologists on Women of Women in American of Anesthesia and Women in Anesthesia and and for Care Women in Care and leadership development and for Anesthesiology and Women of in Anesthesiology Women of Anesthesiology A of programs that there is and to provide professional development to discuss the organizational approach to gender equity in anesthesiology, we will on 1 Women in Anesthesiology is a in by to the professional and personal development of women also the recruitment, retention, and job of women in anesthesiology and a culture of and faced challenges residency and early career as a without the of a from the for and after other women of Women Women in the was to provide a addressing systemic were on addressing (1) lack of professional respect in with male (2) personal and professional and (3) of and to promote women to leadership efforts the of social media to women across and to provide education and to the affecting women efforts were by women in early and who were experiencing the of work for in leadership across societies, and institutions was pursued regarding enhanced and of women for and education regarding the of having women in leadership As a not associated with a efforts are in systemic change in other anesthesiology work, social media and in the of for and at efforts by of the of have national leave of and lactation in the and the on and the on were by who in The nature of also for on social and health issues to anesthesiologists, including and on these issues by and for to more in efforts that are to In addition to professional development for women and men an and a women anesthesiologists as national and to as the a and the operating have on to or In a social and on the provide on to women The of are these and annual including the and and on levels are by and a in-person the However, as a of full-time working women physicians, their careers and personal 1 of the has been the and to a and for our there have been many associated with the and development of 1 of the is the recent of a is well known that anesthesiology has remained other in the recruitment of women to the it would anesthesiologists that women medical students are more likely to a surgical than anesthesiology as a The a recent from the on to a program at students to about anesthesiology, address the challenges that women anesthesiologists and provide a national for from in medical the student are women of and their for and will help to improve the diversity of our has on the initiatives include a for all practice a professional and an in-person medical education In will continue to in medical students and physicians by programs and a The has for women in but that there is still work to be is in the of the to be of all and to improve for identities. In of our work has in for change in but culture change is by at the and institutional The by and other organizations at sex equity a of to into and to a systemic approach to of Despite numbers there is still major attrition of women in anesthesiology as they advance in their Sex disparities within anesthesiology exist because of systemic barriers and biases, with in cultural norms to which results in many women anesthesiologists feeling and discrimination from their women anesthesiologists with and leadership training is inadequate to address this and studies the need for systemic change to address inequity as enhanced representation, and as Women in Anesthesiology and other to equity for women anesthesiologists of all identities are paramount. of The authors that they have to

International Anesthesiology Clinics · 8 citationsread the source →

Social inequalities in multimorbidity, frailty, disability, and transitions to mortality: a 24-year follow-up of the Whitehall II cohort study.

Background: Social inequalities in mortality persist in high-income countries with universal health care, and the mechanisms by which these inequalities are generated remain unclear. We aimed to examine whether social inequalities were present before or after the onset of adverse health conditions (multimorbidity, frailty, and disability). Methods: Our analysis was based on data from the ongoing Whitehall II cohort study, which enrolled British civil servants aged 35-55 years in 1985-88. Participants were assessed for three indicators of socioeconomic status (education, occupational position, and literacy) at age 50 years. Participants underwent clinical examinations (in 2002-04, 2007-09, 2012-13, and 2015-16) for assessment of frailty (two or more of low physical activity, slow walking speed, poor grip strength, weight loss, and exhaustion) and disability (two or more difficulties in bathing, dressing, going to the toilet, transferring, feeding, and walking). In addition, electronic health records were used to assess the incidence of multimorbidity (two or more of diabetes, coronary heart disease, stroke, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, depression, arthritis, cancer, dementia, and Parkinson's disease) and mortality. In analyses adjusted for sociodemographic factors, we used multistate models to examine social inequalities in transitions from healthy state to adverse health conditions and subsequently to mortality. Findings: Of 10 308 individuals in the Whitehall II study cohort, 6425 had relevant data available at 50 years and to the end of follow-up on Aug 31, 2017, and were included in our analysis. Participants were followed up for a median of 23·6 years (IQR 19·6-28·9). 1694 (26·4%) of 6425 participants developed multimorbidity, 1733 (27·0%) became frail, 692 (10·8%) had a disability, and 611 (9·5%) died. Multimorbidity (hazard ratio [HR] 4·12 [95% CI 3·41-4·98]), frailty (HR 2·38 [95% CI 1·93-2·93]), and disability (HR 1·73 [95% CI 1·34-2·22]) were associated with increased risk of mortality; these associations were not modified by socioeconomic status. In multistate models, occupation was the socioeconomic status indicator that was most strongly associated with inequalities in the transition from healthy state to multimorbidity (HR 1·54 [95% CI 1·37-1·73]), to frailty (HR 2·08 [95% CI 1·85-2·33]), and to disability (HR 1·44 [95% CI 1·18-1·74]). Socioeconomic status indicators did not affect transitions to mortality in those with multimorbidity, frailty, or disability. Interpretation: Socioeconomic status affects the risk of multimorbidity, frailty, and disability, but does not affect the risk of mortality after the onset of these adverse health conditions. Therefore, primary prevention is key to reducing social inequalities in mortality. Of the three adverse health conditions, multimorbidity had the strongest association with mortality, making it a central target for improving population health. Funding: UK Medical Research Council; National Institute on Aging, National Institutes of Health; British Heart Foundation.

The Lancet. Public health · 239 citationsread the source →

The pleasure of art as a matter of fact

You have accessMoreSectionsView PDF ToolsAdd to favoritesDownload CitationsTrack Citations ShareShare onFacebookTwitterLinked InRedditEmail Cite this article Nadal Marcos and Skov Martin 2018The pleasure of art as a matter of factProc. R. Soc. B.2852017225220172252http://doi.org/10.1098/rspb.2017.2252SectionYou have accessCommentThe pleasure of art as a matter of fact Marcos Nadal Marcos Nadal http://orcid.org/0000-0002-9341-4688 Department of Psychology, University of the Balearic Islands, Palma de Mallorca 07122, Spain [email protected] Google Scholar Find this author on PubMed Search for more papers by this author and Martin Skov Martin Skov Danish Research Centre for Magnetic Resonance, Copenhagen University Hospital Hvidovre, Copenhagen 2650, Denmark Center for Decision Neuroscience, Copenhagen Business School, Copenhagen 2000, Denmark Google Scholar Find this author on PubMed Search for more papers by this author Marcos Nadal Marcos Nadal http://orcid.org/0000-0002-9341-4688 Department of Psychology, University of the Balearic Islands, Palma de Mallorca 07122, Spain [email protected] Google Scholar Find this author on PubMed and Martin Skov Martin Skov Danish Research Centre for Magnetic Resonance, Copenhagen University Hospital Hvidovre, Copenhagen 2650, Denmark Center for Decision Neuroscience, Copenhagen Business School, Copenhagen 2000, Denmark Google Scholar Find this author on PubMed Published:21 March 2018https://doi.org/10.1098/rspb.2017.2252All other forms of perception divide a man, because they are exclusively based either on the sensuous or on the intellectual part of his being; only the perception of the Beautiful makes something whole of him, because both his natures must accord with it.— Schiller, 1793–1795, Letters on the Aesthetic Education of Man, p. 138, Letter 27Can art make us better people? Better members of society? In her recent article, 'Pleasure junkies all around! Why it matters and why "the arts" might be the answer: a biopsychological perspective', Christensen [1] claims that engaging with art can promote healthy choices, choices that balance short-term pleasure goals with long-term general well-being. She suggests that many modern life conveniences, such as social media, computer games or online shopping, have the potential to turn us into 'pleasure junkies' because they maximize short-term pleasures. But art, Christensen argues, is a safe choice and a means to remedy this unhealthy addiction to pleasure. Christensen's argument is grounded on three claims about the sort of pleasure we get from art. First, in contrast to low-level pleasure, which Christensen conceives as 'a mere perceptual stimulation leading to a rewarding sensation (food, sex, etc.)' ([1], p. 2), pleasure from art is presented as a kind of higher-order pleasure that engages 'broader neural networks implied in the attribution of meaning' (p. 2), presumably leading to 'long-term maintenance of healthy bodily function' (p. 2). Second, 'the arts do not induce states of craving without fulfilment—as do activities with reinforcement schedules which are prone to create habits and addictions such as intermittent variable ratio or interval reinforcement schedules (e.g. social media, gambling, football, extreme sports, drugs' (p. 4). Third, 'the arts do not search for a perceptual "Bliss point" […]. They do not just repeat over and over again a sensory stimulus that excites the senses and induces craving for more of a "pleasurable itch" (e.g. sugar, sexualized body displays, certain musical lyrics, tones; i.e. a perceptual "bliss point")' (p. 4).The claim, in a nutshell, is that the pleasure induced by art is different to the pleasure induced by food, sex, sports or drugs, because it is related to the balanced activation of brain systems related to short-term pleasure and long-term wellbeing goals, because it does not induce craving, and because it is not aimed at a perceptual 'bliss point'. This distinct sort of pleasure, according to Christensen, makes it possible for the arts to thwart the pernicious effects that the unhealthy urges and cravings licensed by 'today's mainstream acceptance of pleasure-seeking behaviour' (p. 5) have on individuals' lives and on societies. Such sweeping statements about art, food, sex, sports and society as a whole merit close examination. Christensen's primary claim that the pleasure induced by art is of a special kind, different to the pleasure induced by other activities is not supported by current understanding of what pleasure is. It is, moreover, contradicted by abundant empirical evidence. This evidence shows that pleasures, whatever their source, owe to activity in the same mesocorticolimbic circuit [2] and are encoded as a common neural currency [3]. As Kent Berridge and Morten Kringelbach put it: 'the brain mechanisms involved in fundamental pleasures (food and sexual pleasures) overlap with those for higher-order pleasures (e.g. monetary, artistic, musical, altruistic and transcendent pleasures) […] From sensory pleasures and drugs of abuse […] to monetary, aesthetic and musical delights, all pleasures seem to involve the same hedonic brain systems' ([4], p. 481). Thus, there is no evidence for specific brain regions or neural circuits related to the pleasure from art. Rather, the appreciation of art relies on brain mechanisms that evolved to appraise the value of biologically relevant objects in relation to internal homeostatic states [5]: 'Emotional reactions to music, further, activate the same cortical, subcortical and autonomic circuits, which are considered as the essential survival circuits of biological organisms in general' ([6], p. 6). In sum, the evidence shows that pleasure elicited by music and other art forms is no different in genesis and function to the pleasure induced by food, drugs and sex [7,8]. This is a matter of fact, not opinion. What supports Christensen's argument if not empirical evidence? In our view, her argument for the distinctness of art-induced pleasure seems based upon an oversimplified and devaluing conception of the pleasures of sex, food and sports, and a very narrow notion of art and its function. Christensen presents food, sex and sports as meaningless low-level sources of pleasure, and the arts as privileged vehicles for meaningful experiences. It is the personal and meaningful engagement with art—Christensen suggests—that fosters a balanced activation of brain systems related to short-term pleasure and long-term well-being goals. However, rarely—if ever—are food, sex and sports meaningless rewarding sensations. Contrary to Christensen's definition on page 2 of her article, pleasure—even sensory pleasure—is not simply reward, and never simply a sensation [4]. Indulging in food, sex or sports are meaningful and personally significant experiences that are not a matter of mere physical sensation. The experience of pleasure from food and sex is shaped by context, knowledge, expectations, anticipations, attitudes and beliefs that bring meaning to them [9–11]. Sex can be meaningful because it signifies physical connection with one's loved one, because it is cheating on someone, or deemed a sin. Likewise, eating is not about obtaining low-level pleasure. What we eat, the way we eat, what we believe about what we eat, where and whom we eat with, imbue eating with individual and social meaning, and shape the actual pleasure of eating [12]. On the other hand, encounters with art are not necessarily meaningful [13,14]. Actually, there is nothing intrinsically meaningful about engaging with art. Many laypeople lack the knowledge schemata required to engage meaningfully with abstract, cubist or contemporary art [15,16]. There are plenty of artworks people do not find meaningful or pleasant. Meaning making is not a special feature of art; it is a general feature of our species's cognition [17,18]. We can endow virtually any aspect of reality with meaning: sex, food, sports, a urinal, the shape of a cloud, an averted glance, someone's absence. Christensen's argument also rests on a historically and culturally narrow conception of art and its function. Art is presented as a circumscribed category of activities that elicit a unique sort of pleasant experiences: — The arts are set of activities of a special kind that share certain defining features distinguishing them from other activities: 'the arts push boundaries, surprise, reveal and excite both artist and spectator' ([1], p. 4).— Art encounters are positive, leading to 'pleasurable chills' and pleasurable experiences of understanding: 'The moment of meaning-assignation, also called "mastering" or "understanding" an artwork, is therefore a pleasurable experience' ([1], p. 4).— The pleasure elicited by art is special, because it does not involve craving for intense peaks: 'The arts do not search for a perceptual "bliss point" […] They do not just repeat over and over a sensory stimulus that excites the senses and induces craving for more of a "pleasurable itch"' ([1], p. 4).This characterization of the arts substantially overlaps with the notion of 'fine arts'. The core features of this characterization were instituted in the eighteenth century, after European intellectuals grouped certain activities into a distinct and autonomous collection, labelled 'fine arts'. To make sense of and promote this grouping, it became imperative to identify a common essence setting art apart from other activities [19,20,21]. One of the most popular proposals was that only art could produce a special sort of pleasure, sophisticated and polite [19,21]—a conception stemming not from any understanding of physiology, but from mere speculation. This limited historical and cultural scope renders this conception of the arts unfit for behavioural or neuroscientific research [19]. The category 'the arts' should not be mistaken for a natural kind. It is a historical convention, and has no direct biological correspondence. Moreover, this conception of art that Christensen espouses does not apply to art as practised in non-Western societies [19,22]. It does not even apply to Western art before the eighteenth century or after the nineteenth century [19,20,21]. First, art does not necessarily evoke pleasurable experiences. There are abundant artworks intended to arouse negative emotions [19,23], and to portray physical and moral ugliness [24]. Understanding art is not necessarily a pleasant experience: it can be an angering, disgusting or upsetting one [25]. Second, many artworks actually exploit repetition, bliss points and craving [26]. Repetition is a fundamental design feature of music and other performance arts [27]: In Relation in Space (1976) Marina Abramovic and Ulay ran into each other repeatedly for an hour; Ravel's Bolero is a 17 min-long instance of melodic and rhythmic repetitiveness. Anticipation and craving for bliss points are also essential to music [28]. In fact, the enjoyment of music is linked to intense feelings of anticipation and expectation caused by dopamine activity in the caudate nucleus (also involved in the rewarding aspect of food) [29,30], and peak pleasure states (bliss points) [31], caused by the release of dopamine and opioids in the brain's reward system (also involved in cocaine induced euphoria) [29,30]. Given the available evidence, therefore, there is no reason to believe that the pleasure from art is special or unique [32].In sum, Christensen's claim for the distinctiveness of pleasure from art is contradicted by empirical evidence, and her argument for the beneficial effects of art rests upon disputed foundations. Art's capacity to promote healthier choices and make us better people that can contribute to a better society remains as unconfirmed today as it was when Schiller speculated on art's power to harmonize human's conflicting sensuous and formal impulses. Christensen's argument is problematic even if intended to highlight hypothetical possibilities. Arguments about hypothetical possibilities should still rely on valid premises, and scientific hypotheses should be grounded on evidence, or at least in line with it. Otherwise, they are merely unfounded speculations. Scientific aesthetics is only just finding its footing and its place within cognitive neuroscience [33,34]. If evidence is ignored or rejected because it does not fit preconceived notions about art and its function, scientific aesthetics will become only an arena to promote and legitimize personally appealing notions of art by applying a scientific gloss over them. A proper scientific study of art needs to be grounded on empirical evidence and strong arguments that follow from solid premises [35,36]. Only then can scientific aesthetics provide reliable explanations for artistic and aesthetic behaviour, and thus make a significant contribution to the understanding of our human nature. Data accessibilityThis article has no additional data. Authors' contributionsBoth authors have contributed to conceiving, developing and writing the research presented in this paper, and approved it for publication. Competing interestsWe declare we have no competing interests. FundingThis research was supported by grant PSI2016-77327-P (MINECO/AEI/ERDF, EU).Footnotes© 2018 The Author(s)Published by the Royal Society. All rights reserved. References1Christensen JF. 2017Pleasure junkies all around! Why it matters and why 'the arts' might be the answer: a biopsychological perspective. Proc. R. Soc. B 284, 20162837. (doi:10.1098/rspb.2016.2837) Link, ISI, Google Scholar2Berridge CW, Kringelbach ML. 2013Neuroscience of affect: brain mechanisms of pleasure and displeasure. Curr. Opin. Neurobiol. 23, 294–303. (doi:10.1016/j.conb.2013.01.017) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar3Levy DJ, Glimcher PW. 2012The root of all value: a neural common currency for choice. Curr. Opin. Neurobiol. 22, 1027–1038. (doi:10.1016/j.conb.2012.06.001) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar4Kringelbach ML, Berridge KC. 2009Towards a functional neuroanatomy of pleasure and happiness. Trends Cogn. Sci. 13, 479–487. (doi:10.1016/j.tics.2009.08.006) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar5Brown S, Gao X, Tisdelle L, Eickhoff LM. 2011Naturalizing aesthetics: brain areas for aesthetic appraisal across sensory modalities. Neuroimage 58, 250–258. (doi:10.1016/j.neuroimage.2011.06.012) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar6Reybrouck M, Eerola T. 2017Music and its inductive power: a psychobiological and evolutionary approach to musical emotions. Front. Psychol. 8, 494. (doi:10.3389/fpsyg.2017.00494) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar7Blood AJ, Zatorre RJ. 2001Intensely pleasurable responses to music correlate with activity in brain regions implicated in reward and emotion. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 98, 11 818–11 823. (doi:10.1073/pnas.191355898) Crossref, ISI, Google Scholar8Mallik A, Chandra ML, Levitin DJ. 2017Anhedonia to music and mu-opioids: evidence from the administration of naltrexone. Sci. Rep. 7, 41952. (doi:10.1038/srep41952) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar9Barrett LF. 2015How emotions are made: the secret life of the brain. London, UK: Macmillan. Google Scholar10Bloom P. 2010How pleasure works: the new science of why we like what we like. New York, NY: Norton. Google Scholar11Chatterjee A. 2014The aesthetic brain: how we evolved to desire beauty and enjoy art. New York, NY: Oxford University Press. Google Scholar12Spence C. 2017Gastrophysics: the new science of eating. London, UK: Penguin. Google Scholar13Leder H, Belke B, Oeberst A, Augustin D. 2004A model of aesthetic appreciation and aesthetic judgments. Br. J. Psychol. 95, 489–508. (doi:10.1348/0007126042369811) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar14Vessel EA, Rubin N. 2010Beauty and the beholder: highly individual taste for abstract, but not real-world images. J. Vis. 10, 1–14. (doi:10.1167/10.2.18) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar15Minissale G. 2013The psychology of contemporary art. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. Crossref, Google Scholar16Muth C, Pepperell R, Carbon C-C. 2013Give me Gestalt! Preference for cubist artworks revealing high detectability of objects. Leonardo 46, 488–489. (doi:10.1162/LEON_a_00649) Crossref, ISI, Google Scholar17Deacon TW. 1997The symbolic species: the co-evolution of language and the brain. New York, NY: Norton. Google Scholar18Henshilwood CS, d'Errico F. 2011Homo symbolicus: the dawn of language, imagination and spirituality. Amsterdam, The Netherlands: John Benjamins Publishing Co. Crossref, Google Scholar19Carroll N. 2008Aesthetic experience, art and artists. In Aesthetic experience (eds Shusterman R, Tomlin A), pp. 145–165. New York, NY: Routledge. Google Scholar20Kivy P. 2012What really happened in the eighteenth century: the 'Modern System' re-examined (again). Br. J. Aesthetics 52, 61–74. (doi:10.1093/aesthj/ayr046) Crossref, ISI, Google Scholar21Shiner L. 2001The invention of art: a cultural history. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. Crossref, Google Scholar22Anderson RL. 1989Art in small-scale societies. 2nd edn. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. Google Scholar23Silvia PJ. 2009Looking past pleasure: anger, confusion, disgust, pride, surprise, and other unusual aesthetic emotions. Psychol. Aesthetics Creat. Arts 3, 48–51. (doi:10.1037/a0014632) Crossref, ISI, Google Scholar24Eco U. 2007On ugliness. London, UK: Harvill Secker. Google Scholar25Silvia PJ, Brown EM. 2007Anger, disgust, and the negative aesthetic emotions: expanding an appraisal model of aesthetic experience. Psychol. Aesthetics Creat. Arts 1, 100–106. (doi:10.1037/1931-3896.1.2.100) Crossref, Google Scholar26Huron D. 2006Sweet anticipation: music and the psychology of expectation. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Crossref, Google Scholar27Fitch W. 2006The biology and evolution of music: a comparative perspective. Cognition 100, 173–215. (doi:10.1016/j.cognition.2005.11.009) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar28Trainor LJ, Zatorre RJ. 2009The neurobiological basis of musical expectations. In The Oxford handbook of music psychology (eds Hallam S, Cross I, Thaut M), pp. 171–183. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press. Google Scholar29Salimpoor VN, Benovoy M, Larcher K, Dagher A, Zatorre RJ. 2011Anatomically distinct dopamine release during anticipation and experience of peak emotion to music. Nat. Neurosci. 14, 257–262. (doi:10.1038/nn.2726) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar30Salimpoor VN, Zatorre RJ. 2013Neural interactions that give rise to musical pleasure. Psychol. Aesthetics Creat. Arts 7, 62–75. (doi:10.1037/a0031819) Crossref, ISI, Google Scholar31Whaley J, Sloboda J, Gabrielsson A. 2009Peak experiences in music. In The Oxford handbook of music psychology (eds Hallam S, Cross I, Thaut M), pp. 452–461. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press. Google Scholar32Skov M, Nadal M.In press. Art is not special: an assault on the last lines of defense against the naturalization of the human mind. Rev. Neurosci. (doi:10.1515/revneuro-2017-0085) ISI, Google Scholar33Chatterjee A. 2011Neuroaesthetics: a coming of age story. J. Cogn. Neurosci. 23, 53–62. (doi:10.1162/jocn.2010.21457) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar34Pearce MT, Zaidel DW, Vartanian O, Skov M, Leder H, Chatterjee A, Nadal M. 2016Neuroaesthetics: the cognitive neuroscience of aesthetic experience. Perspect. Psychol. Sci. 11, 265–279. (doi:10.1177/1745691615621274) Crossref, PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar35Nadal M, Vartanian O, Skov M. 2017Psychological models of art reception must be empirically grounded. Behav. Brain Sci. 40, 36–37. (doi:10.1017/S0140525X17001790) Crossref, ISI, Google Scholar36Nadal M, Skov M. 2017Top–down and bottom–up: front to back: comment on 'Move me, astonish me… delight my eyes and brain: the Vienna integrated model of top–down and bottom–up processes in Art Perception (VIMAP) and corresponding affective, evaluative, and neurophysiological correlates' by Matthew Pelowski et al. Phys. Life Rev. 21, 148–149. (doi:10.1016/j.plrev.2017.06.013) PubMed, ISI, Google Scholar Previous ArticleNext Article VIEW FULL TEXT DOWNLOAD PDF FiguresRelatedReferencesDetailsCited by Clemente A, Pearce M, Skov M and Nadal M (2021) Evaluative judgment across domains: Liking balance, contour, symmetry and complexity in melodies and visual designs, Brain and Cognition, 10.1016/j.bandc.2021.105729, 151, (105729), Online publication date: 1-Jul-2021. Chuan-Peng H, Huang Y, Eickhoff S, Peng K and Sui J (2020) Seeking the "Beauty Center" in the Brain: A Meta-Analysis of fMRI Studies of Beautiful Human Faces and Visual Art, Cognitive, Affective, & Behavioral Neuroscience, 10.3758/s13415-020-00827-z, 20:6, (1200-1215), Online publication date: 1-Dec-2020. Skov M and Nadal M (2020) A Farewell to Art: Aesthetics as a Topic in Psychology and Neuroscience, Perspectives on Psychological Science, 10.1177/1745691619897963, 15:3, (630-642), Online publication date: 1-May-2020. Kalpokas I (2019) Making the Theory Political A Political Theory of Post-Truth, 10.1007/978-3-319-97713-3_4, (87-121), . Kalpokas I (2019) Affective Encounters of the Algorithmic Kind: Post-Truth and Posthuman Pleasure, Social Media + Society, 10.1177/2056305119845678, 5:2, (205630511984567), Online publication date: 1-Apr-2019. Skov M (2019) Aesthetic Appreciation: The View From Neuroimaging, Empirical Studies of the Arts, 10.1177/0276237419839257, 37:2, Online publication date: H, I and (2020) A for We Aesthetic in Human Neuroscience, A and in A New for Arts, This March Article in 2018 The Author(s)Published by the Royal Society. All rights Citations and are available with

Proceedings of the Royal Society B Biological Sciences · editorial or comment · 24 citationsread the source →

Burden of 375 diseases and injuries, risk-attributable burden of 88 risk factors, and healthy life expectancy in 204 countries and territories, including 660 subnational locations, 1990-2023: a systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2023.

Background: For more than three decades, the Global Burden of Diseases, Injuries, and Risk Factors Study (GBD) has provided a framework to quantify health loss due to diseases, injuries, and associated risk factors. This paper presents GBD 2023 findings on disease and injury burden and risk-attributable health loss, offering a global audit of the state of world health to inform public health priorities. This work captures the evolving landscape of health metrics across age groups, sexes, and locations, while reflecting on the remaining post-COVID-19 challenges to achieving our collective global health ambitions. Methods: The GBD 2023 combined analysis estimated years lived with disability (YLDs), years of life lost (YLLs), and disability-adjusted life-years (DALYs) for 375 diseases and injuries, and risk-attributable burden associated with 88 modifiable risk factors. Of the more than 310 000 total data sources used for all GBD 2023 (about 30% of which were new to this estimation round), more than 120 000 sources were used for estimation of disease and injury burden and 59 000 for risk factor estimation, and included vital registration systems, surveys, disease registries, and published scientific literature. Data were analysed using previously established modelling approaches, such as disease modelling meta-regression version 2.1 (DisMod-MR 2.1) and comparative risk assessment methods. Diseases and injuries were categorised into four levels on the basis of the established GBD cause hierarchy, as were risk factors using the GBD risk hierarchy. Estimates stratified by age, sex, location, and year from 1990 to 2023 were focused on disease-specific time trends over the 2010-23 period and presented as counts (to three significant figures) and age-standardised rates per 100 000 person-years (to one decimal place). For each measure, 95% uncertainty intervals [UIs] were calculated with the 2·5th and 97·5th percentile ordered values from a 250-draw distribution. Findings: Total numbers of global DALYs grew 6·1% (95% UI 4·0-8·1), from 2·64 billion (2·46-2·86) in 2010 to 2·80 billion (2·57-3·08) in 2023, but age-standardised DALY rates, which account for population growth and ageing, decreased by 12·6% (11·0-14·1), revealing large long-term health improvements. Non-communicable diseases (NCDs) contributed 1·45 billion (1·31-1·61) global DALYs in 2010, increasing to 1·80 billion (1·63-2·03) in 2023, alongside a concurrent 4·1% (1·9-6·3) reduction in age-standardised rates. Based on DALY counts, the leading level 3 NCDs in 2023 were ischaemic heart disease (193 million [176-209] DALYs), stroke (157 million [141-172]), and diabetes (90·2 million [75·2-107]), with the largest increases in age-standardised rates since 2010 occurring for anxiety disorders (62·8% [34·0-107·5]), depressive disorders (26·3% [11·6-42·9]), and diabetes (14·9% [7·5-25·6]). Remarkable health gains were made for communicable, maternal, neonatal, and nutritional (CMNN) diseases, with DALYs falling from 874 million (837-917) in 2010 to 681 million (642-736) in 2023, and a 25·8% (22·6-28·7) reduction in age-standardised DALY rates. During the COVID-19 pandemic, DALYs due to CMNN diseases rose but returned to pre-pandemic levels by 2023. From 2010 to 2023, decreases in age-standardised rates for CMNN diseases were led by rate decreases of 49·1% (32·7-61·0) for diarrhoeal diseases, 42·9% (38·0-48·0) for HIV/AIDS, and 42·2% (23·6-56·6) for tuberculosis. Neonatal disorders and lower respiratory infections remained the leading level 3 CMNN causes globally in 2023, although both showed notable rate decreases from 2010, declining by 16·5% (10·6-22·0) and 24·8% (7·4-36·7), respectively. Injury-related age-standardised DALY rates decreased by 15·6% (10·7-19·8) over the same period. Differences in burden due to NCDs, CMNN diseases, and injuries persisted across age, sex, time, and location. Based on our risk analysis, nearly 50% (1·27 billion [1·18-1·38]) of the roughly 2·80 billion total global DALYs in 2023 were attributable to the 88 risk factors analysed in GBD. Globally, the five level 3 risk factors contributing the highest proportion of risk-attributable DALYs were high systolic blood pressure (SBP), particulate matter pollution, high fasting plasma glucose (FPG), smoking, and low birthweight and short gestation-with high SBP accounting for 8·4% (6·9-10·0) of total DALYs. Of the three overarching level 1 GBD risk factor categories-behavioural, metabolic, and environmental and occupational-risk-attributable DALYs rose between 2010 and 2023 only for metabolic risks, increasing by 30·7% (24·8-37·3); however, age-standardised DALY rates attributable to metabolic risks decreased by 6·7% (2·0-11·0) over the same period. For all but three of the 25 leading level 3 risk factors, age-standardised rates dropped between 2010 and 2023-eg, declining by 54·4% (38·7-65·3) for unsafe sanitation, 50·5% (33·3-63·1) for unsafe water source, and 45·2% (25·6-72·0) for no access to handwashing facility, and by 44·9% (37·3-53·5) for child growth failure. The three leading level 3 risk factors for which age-standardised attributable DALY rates rose were high BMI (10·5% [0·1 to 20·9]), drug use (8·4% [2·6 to 15·3]), and high FPG (6·2% [-2·7 to 15·6]; non-significant). Interpretation: Our findings underscore the complex and dynamic nature of global health challenges. Since 2010, there have been large decreases in burden due to CMNN diseases and many environmental and behavioural risk factors, juxtaposed with sizeable increases in DALYs attributable to metabolic risk factors and NCDs in growing and ageing populations. This long-observed consequence of the global epidemiological transition was only temporarily interrupted by the COVID-19 pandemic. The substantially decreasing CMNN disease burden, despite the 2008 global financial crisis and pandemic-related disruptions, is one of the greatest collective public health successes known. However, these achievements are at risk of being reversed due to major cuts to development assistance for health globally, the effects of which will hit low-income countries with high burden the hardest. Without sustained investment in evidence-based interventions and policies, progress could stall or reverse, leading to widespread human costs and geopolitical instability. Moreover, the rising NCD burden necessitates intensified efforts to mitigate exposure to leading risk factors-eg, air pollution, smoking, and metabolic risks, such as high SBP, BMI, and FPG-including policies that promote food security, healthier diets, physical activity, and equitable and expanded access to potential treatments, such as GLP-1 receptor agonists. Decisive, coordinated action is needed to address long-standing yet growing health challenges, including depressive and anxiety disorders. Yet this can be only part of the solution. Our response to the NCD syndemic-the complex interaction of multiple health risks, social determinants, and systemic challenges-will define the future landscape of global health. To ensure human wellbeing, economic stability, and social equity, global action to sustain and advance health gains must prioritise reducing disparities by addressing socioeconomic and demographic determinants, ensuring equitable health-care access, tackling malnutrition, strengthening health systems, and improving vaccination coverage. We live in times of great opportunity. Funding: Gates Foundation and Bloomberg Philanthropies.

Lancet (London, England) · 257 citationsread the source →

Psychosexual health in gynecological cancer

The literature surrounding psychosexual health and cancer patients has primarily considered the functional aspects of the disease and its treatment at the major expense of the emotional sequelae. Sexual health is defined by WHO as: "a state of physical, emotional, mental, and social well-being in relation to sexuality; it is not merely the absence of disease, dysfunction or infirmity. Sexual health requires a positive and respectful approach to sexuality and sexual relationships, as well as the possibility of having pleasurable and safe sexual experiences, free of coercion, discrimination and violence" [1]. A principle goal of WHO is to assist its member states in achieving the highest attainable standard of health care for all, including sexual and reproductive health [2]. Global statistics show that the world's female population is carrying an overwhelming burden of need in this area. Over 200 million women cannot access modern contraception, and millions of women suffer rape, domestic violence, and sexual abuse, not only in the context of wars and criminal activities, but also in their own homes [2]. Although the physical sequelae of these disasters can be treated, such as treatment for sexually transmitted infections, the emotional impact can frequently be hidden, ignored, or may not reveal its impact until many years after the event. Any illness or traumatic life event, past or present, can lead to sexual problems in the lifetime of a woman, and gynecological cancer is no exception. It is the root cause or trigger for sexual difficulties in at least 50% of women affected [3]. In 2012, the estimated number of women living with gynecological cancers was over three million, which means that potentially 1.5 million gynecological cancer survivors could be affected by an associated sexual difficulty [4]. Within the context of gynecological cancer, many of these problems can be alleviated if recognized and acknowledged early in the cancer journey, therefore contributing dramatic improvements to a woman's overall well-being. It is now estimated that half of the population of either sex will develop cancer at some time in their life. Globally, 40% − 45% of women will have a sexual problem at some stage, with the prevalence increasing with age [5]. Between 10% and 90% of women with any cancer will have sexual problems [6] and over 50% of women with gynecological cancer will have either temporary or persistent sexual difficulties [3]. As diagnosis and treatments improve, the number of women surviving cancer will increase, and survivorship issues including quality of life have become increasingly important. Sexuality is a key component of most subjective measurable quality of life indicators [7]. Sexual function and enjoyment are important components of survivorship and should not be ignored. The most common sexual problems can be divided into two groups: problems of function and/or problems of desire. There is, however, a complex interplay of organic disorders with emotional and psychosocial issues, and these divisions are merely artificial. Formal definitions of female sexual dysfunction have been adopted, including the US classifications in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders [8], although having a sexual difficulty does not constitute having a mental health disorder. Basson et al. [9] published a useful classification of the problems. Such classifications are useful for research purposes, but may often be less helpful when treating women. The predominant functional female sexual problem is pain on sexual intercourse, or dyspareunia. Deep dyspareunia describes intracoital pelvic pain, and superficial dyspareunia is pain on vaginal entry. Either could signify organic disease, and should be appropriately investigated. If no pathology is demonstrated, and the pain persists, then an emotional cause must be considered and pursued. Vaginismus, or involuntary spasm of the pubococcygeal and related musculature, can prevent sexual intercourse taking place. Good history taking can clarify whether there has been any penetration of the vagina, not only penile, but by fingers, sex toys, or tampons. If not, this is diagnostic of primary vaginismus, and apart from close inspection of the vulva and offer of gentle digital vaginal examination to determine the extent of the vaginismus, no further clinical investigation is warranted. Women with gynecological cancer are more likely to have secondary vaginismus caused by pain experienced from the disease or its treatment, and fear of the pain occurring during sex [10]. Loss of libido or loss of sexual interest on the other hand is a problem of desire. There are no physiological markers for loss of desire when its origins are psychogenic, with psychosocial contributions, past and present relationships, traumas, and emotional factors all inhibiting the woman's wish to be sexual. One of the key ways to determine the origins of the sexual difficulty is to ask about the sexual and emotional relationship between the woman and her partner before the cancer diagnosis. It should not be assumed that problems are all due to the cancer, as long-standing relationship problems may be disclosed, and need to be incorporated into any counselling. The exception to this is the woman who suddenly becomes menopausal following cancer treatment, who had no problems with sex or desire prior to her cancer therapy. Appropriate standard therapy for her menopausal symptoms should be considered; however, the impact of a cancer diagnosis will be life changing, and drug treatment of hormonal deprivation symptoms may not be sufficient without some psychological or counselling support, or may be contraindicated as in the case of breast and endometrial cancer [11]. A diagnosis of gynecological cancer is overwhelming. While the instinctive professional response from clinicians is to ensure long-term survival, sexual issues are important for quality of life and should be considered in the decision-making process [12]. Sexual dysfunction is one of the most common and distressing consequences of cancer treatment [13]. Many treatments are shown to have sexual impacts, both positive and negative, and should be discussed fully with the woman pre-treatment so that she can make an autonomous decision about her care. Early offer of discussion of sexual issues in the cancer journey can lead to better sexual outcomes. Cervical cancer is the most common gynecological cancer worldwide. Cervical cancer survivors are at risk of sexual pain disorders, no matter which modality of treatment is used. A small study of patients who underwent radical vaginal trachelectomy for early stage cervical cancer showed sexual dysfunction, including loss of libido, for up to one year following treatment; however, by 12 months, sexual activity had reached that of healthy women [14]. Following radical hysterectomy for locally advanced cervical cancer, there was no significant difference in sexual activity and enjoyment between women with benign or malignant disease; however, the cancer group had worse problems than healthy controls with body image and vaginal functioning [15]. In women with advanced cervical cancer given chemoradiotherapy, pain during intercourse was in fact reduced after treatment [16]. This may have been a result of the resolution of bleeding, discharge, and pelvic pain. However, the anxiety surrounding cancer remains for many women. Women surviving up to 15 years following cervical cancer treatment showed poorer quality of life than healthy controls, and those who had received radiotherapy were significantly more affected by sexual dysfunction than those who had surgery alone [17]. Despite this however, orgasm may be unimpaired following radiation [18]. Many additional needs were expressed by women with cervical cancer; however, sexuality and intimacy came to the fore as a predominant issue for survivorship [19]. It has been known for some time that the physical and emotional impact of ovarian cancer can be devastating, leading to sexual as well as global quality of life issues [20]. One study has shown a prevalence of 63% for sexual difficulties among women with a diagnosis of ovarian cancer [3]. The effects of chemotherapy and surgery, combined with the anxiety about survival can have a dramatic negative effect on the woman's libido, and even women who undertake risk-reducing salpingo-oophorectomy can suffer sexual dysfunction [21]. Many of these women are totally unprepared for the devastating effects of sudden menopause, with hot flushes, vaginal dryness, and loss of libido replacing a previously healthy sex life. This could be helped by more realistic counselling before the procedure, and increased postoperative emotional support. One study has shown that women who had surgery for endometrial cancer had no differences in their own sexual experience postoperatively, but compared with healthy controls, they had more sexual difficulties overall [22]. Women with Lynch syndrome who opt for preventive surgery tend to be happy overall with the surgery, but are often unprepared for the physical adverse effects of menopause [23]. In contrast, Moldovan et al. [24] has reported that, despite sometimes debilitating menopausal symptoms, there were no significant sexual difficulties associated with the procedure. Vulvectomy is a common treatment for vulvar malignancy. This is increasingly affecting younger women, who are HIV positive. Women with vulvar cancer can have many years of difficulties with sex due to often distressing vulvar symptoms and bleeding. Following treatment they still suffer severe dyspareunia and body image distortion due to the effects of treatment. Although a recent study showed no differences in psychosocial and sexual functioning before and after vulvectomy, it was acknowledged that women with vulvar malignancy have a high risk for sexual problems compared with healthy controls [25]. Factors associated with postoperative sexual difficulties are increased age, poor overall physical and mental health well-being, and extent of the surgical excision [25]. This often elderly group of patients is usually neglected from the psychosexual point of view. The majority of the literature related to sexuality and cancer stems from high-resource countries. Although most of these studies encompass all women, there is a lack of good published evidence on the treatment of the sexual sequelae of cancer in relation to ethnic minority groups, within a majority culture [26]. Furthermore, data from low- and middle-income countries are scant. Much of the literature focuses on sexual distress and activity in relation to HIV and AIDS which, of course, is a global priority; however, this focus on infection transmission should not take away from the emotional needs of the woman who suffers from gynecological cancer. Sexuality research around the globe must be perceived and researched in terms of cultural, spiritual, ethnic, and religious contexts. Sexual problems in women with gynecological cancer may be associated with adverse effects of surgical, hormonal, and chemical treatments, as well as by the cancer itself. Fortunately, emotional, sexual, and quality of life outcomes improve as less morbid, more minimally invasive surgical treatments for gynecological cancers develop [12]. Chemotherapy-induced ovarian failure in cancer patients is associated with all the possible symptoms of a sudden menopause, combined with the emotional impact not only of the cancer, but loss of physical well-being and fertility all at the same time. Vaginal dryness can be a major problem to those women who wish to have sex [27], and appropriate vaginal moisturizers and lubricants can help. The issue of vaginal estrogen is still debated, but should be discussed with the patient, weighing up the risk − benefit ratio for each individual. Vaginal estrogen will, in most cases, alleviate the dryness, but there may be concerns about using hormones, especially in relation to breast cancer where the evidence is unclear. The scientific data, however, support the safety of low dose vaginal estrogen therapy [28]. It is not well understood that following a few weeks of vaginal estrogen, the vagina thickens and cornifies and estrogen is not absorbed as a result. Newer treatments such as selective estrogen receptor modulators have been used in place of vaginal estrogen in women without cancer [29], and may prove good alternatives in the future [30]. There are non-hormonal vaginal moisturizers and lubricants to make sexual intercourse more comfortable. Unfortunately, some commercial sexual lubricants can be hyperosmolar and could cause epithelial disruption, facilitating HIV transmission [31]. Simple lubricants such as olive oil or liquid glycerin have been used successfully in interventions to alleviate pain on intercourse due to vaginal dryness, combining their use with physiotherapy and psychosexual counselling. Treatments with pelvic external beam radiotherapy and/or with brachytherapy may cause vaginal shortening, tightening, and lack of pliability. The use of vaginal dilators to overcome these complications is widespread, despite lack of conclusive evidence, either for or against, either with or without a coating of estrogen cream [32]. Unsurprisingly, the intrusion of inserting a plastic (or sometimes glass) tube into a tender vagina after treatment is a task that may carry a deep psychological and emotional impact [33], and will have resultant poor compliance. Radiation oncologists agree that information about dilator use should be given before treatment [34], and that sufficient patient information and support are essential to improve compliance. Sensitivity to emotions and women's views and personal values in relation to sexuality are essential supports to encouraging dilator use [35]. Any of the above problems cannot fail to have an emotional impact on the woman and on her partner. Many sexual difficulties are automatically blamed on the organic disruption caused by cancer and its treatments; however, once any clearly indicated treatments have been given, in a sizable proportion of cases, the sexual difficulty will remain unresolved. Many sexual difficulties are psychogenic, and no amount of skilled clinical treatments will help if not linked closely to appropriate counselling, psychological, or psychosexual therapy. This form of intervention will enable the woman to expose and reflect on her sexual difficulties, in the context of her life and relationship not only since the cancer, but beforehand. This is often a time when past problems, such as childhood abuse, or problems with her current partner will surface. Some partners are disgusted by the physical impacts of cancer, and the relationship will suffer. On the other hand, some partners become more supportive and the cancer leads to stronger relationships [36]. Classic psychosexual therapy, using brief, focused psychotherapeutic techniques is the mainstay of treatment. It can be used with an individual or a couple, of any sexual orientation or cultural or religious background. This is a way of listening reflectively to the patient, so that they can gain their own insights into their sexual problem. The issue of genital examination is considered if relevant, as it enables the woman to connect with her genital area, and may trigger deep-seated thoughts or anxieties that the woman had blocked emotionally. This, of course, is a technique used only by clinicians who are qualified to examine the patient [37]. Clinical psychologists and counsellors trained in psychosexual work also treat women with sexual problems. Globally, because the availability of trained personnel differs, many simple innovative treatment interventions have been tried. A brief intervention using a well-accepted treatment, cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), combined with sexual health education had positive results on patients who had risk-reducing salpingo-oophorectomy [21]. Psychosexual interventions work [38], and like all psychodynamic interventions only require a trained counsellor and a means of allowing access to the patient. The internet has enabled access to health care for many people around the world who are not able to travel long and difficult land journeys to direct provision of health care. An online intervention with a professional moderator has proven acceptable to gynecological cancer patients with a sexual difficulty [39], and another internet-based sexual difficulties intervention with counselling sessions proved more successful in improving sexuality issues than without a counsellor; however, there was no difference between the two groups in relation to emotional distress and quality of life [40]. Elsewhere, telephone interventions are being used, also with some success; however, it is clear that the knowledge, skills, and training of the health professional providing the intervention are relevant to the patient outcome. Multidisciplinary care should form the backbone of treatment of sexual difficulties in women with gynecological cancer, incorporating physical, psychoeducational, and psychosexual input. Team discussions, including clinicians, psychosexual therapists, and physiotherapists are well within the capabilities of many cancer centers, remembering that the patient and her partner are the focal point and should always be consulted. It is impossible to diagnose and treat a sexual problem if one does not acknowledge that it exists. Many studies in the past have identified lack of willingness of doctors and nurses to discuss sex, but sadly recent research has shown that not much has changed. For instance, in a cohort sample of 1154 US obstetrician − gynecologists, 60% did not ask patients about sexual problems [41]. Too often clinicians make value judgements about their patients including whether sexuality is an important part of their lives. Such assumptions may include biases about age, appearance, sexual preferences, and marital status of people who have sex. People with cancer and their partners have unmet sexual information and support needs [42], often due to the unwillingness of healthcare professionals to discuss sexual issues, even though they recognize it may be important to the patient. There are many barriers to talking about sex, affecting both the patient and the clinician, such as cultural background, and age and gender discrepancies between doctor and patient. There may be simple barriers, such as lack of privacy in a consultation, as often cancer patients are accompanied by family or close friends. Patients often state that they feel it is trivial to take up the doctor's time with non-life-threatening issues such as sex. Clinicians often cite lack of training as a reason that they are uncomfortable talking about sex and poor provision of this training has been noted [13]. Different models of communication skills training have been used and those undertaking the training have shown greater empathy and were more inclined to use open questions [43]. This technique of speaking to the patient in an open rather than interrogative manner can easily facilitate discussion of intimate issues. An even greater challenge in communication is the recognition that individuals are sexual beings up to the end of life. To some women in the palliative phase, sexual touch and closeness to their partner is of vital importance. Sadly this is rarely recognized and addressed by palliative care physicians [44]. It is important to remember that a minority of the female population identifies as lesbian, and that about 8% of the population is bisexual. While this should make no difference to the quality of sexual health care they receive, lesbians and bisexuals find it difficult to disclose their sexuality to clinicians, often inhibited by their cultural or religious background, and fears of facing discrimination [45]. If the clinician asks the patient at the outset if they have a sexual partner, and whether the partner is male or female, it will greatly enhance the quality of the doctor − patient interaction. Lesbian partners in particular can be very supportive during the cancer journey, and should be given the opportunity to be present if the patient wishes. Despite the recognized need for treatment of sexual problems in menopause and gynecological cancer, there is poor provision of specialist training to ensure that this important area of service provision is met [46]. Undergraduate teaching is important, but it is only by recognizing psychosexual medicine in formal gynecology or oncology training, as a compulsory requirement of the course, that this situation will begin to be addressed. Innovative online programs [47] can make a major impact on global training opportunities and give trainees around the world an opportunity to gain some skills and insight into treating sexual difficulties in a nonjudgmental way. Owing to the global prevalence of sexual problems associated with gynecological cancer, it should be within every gynecologist's or oncologist's duty of care to the patient to be aware of and have some understanding of how to diagnose and facilitate treatment for sexual problems in a nonjudgmental manner. This is true holistic medicine, recognizing not only the cancer, but the woman behind the symptoms, and requires awareness of the emotional, social, and relationship aspects of the patient's life. The ability of any person to enjoy a sexual life free of coercion, shame, disease, or pain in a consensual manner is a fundamental element of the human rights of women, and should be an unequivocally accepted as part of her gynecological cancer care. To make a difference, even in the absence of expensive and sophisticated cancer treatments, just acknowledging, listening, and offering support to the woman with sexual difficulties related to cancer will ultimately have a major benefit to her quality of life. The author has no conflict of interest. Please note: The publisher is not responsible for the content or functionality of any supporting information supplied by the authors. Any queries (other than missing content) should be directed to the corresponding author for the article.

International Journal of Gynecology & Obstetrics · 17 citationsread the source →

The Impact of Fasting the Holy Month of Ramadan on Colorectal Cancer Patients and Two Tumor Biomarkers: A Tertiary-Care Hospital Experience.

Background: Fasting during the holy month of Ramadan is a religious ritual practiced by the majority of Muslims around the globe. This daytime fasting is short-term or intermittent fasting, which may be associated with valuable health benefits, particularly in cancer patients. Methods: A prospective cohort study of pre- and post-fasting evaluation of 37 colorectal cancer (CRC) patients was conducted at King Abdulaziz Medical City (KAMC) and King Abdullah Specialized Children's Hospital (KASCH)-oncology outpatient clinics. The study aimed to assess the impact of fasting during the holy month of Ramadan on the tolerability of chemotherapy side effects and to assess changes in the levels of carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA) and lactate dehydrogenase (LDH) tumor biomarkers, which are primarily associated with certain types of carcinomas, including CRC. Results: A total of 33 patients (89.2%) had fasted at least part of the month of Ramadan. Twenty-seven patients (73%) reported "Serenity" after fasting during Ramadan with improved tolerability of chemotherapy side effects. However, the results did not reveal any significant difference in the measured laboratory variables between pre-fasting values and by the end of the 30 days of Ramadan. Although statistically insignificant, the levels of CEA and LDH were reduced in 46.9% and 55.6% of patients, respectively. The mean level of CEA in the fasting group was substantially reduced by more than 40%, attributed to the highly significant decline of CEA levels in three patients (p=0.0283). Moreover, there were no significant differences between pre- and post-fasting blood creatinine levels or estimated glomerular filtration rates, ruling out any possible adverse effects of fasting on renal function. Conclusion: The current study confirms the safety and tolerability of intermittent fasting in CRC patients actively receiving chemotherapy, which is consistent with several reports. Nonetheless, the results did not reveal a significant decrease in CEA and LDH tumor biomarkers.

Cureus · 6 citationsread the source →

PATHOPHYSIOLOGY OF DEPRESSION: DO WE HAVE ANY SOLID EVIDENCE OF INTEREST TO CLINICIANS?

Major depressive disorder (MDD) is a common and costly disorder which is usually associated with severe and persistent symptoms leading to important social role impairment and increased mortality 1,2. It is one of the most important causes of disability worldwide 3. The high rate of inadequate treatment of the disorder remains a serious concern 1. This review is aimed at summarizing the solid evidence on the etiology and pathophysiology of MDD that is likely relevant for clinical psychiatry. Neurobiological findings are regarded as solid when they are consistent and convergent, i.e., they have been confirmed by several studies using the same method and fit into results from studies using different methodological approaches. Family, twin, and adoption studies provide very solid and consistent evidence that MDD is a familial disorder and that this familiality is mostly or entirely due to genetic factors 4. This important finding suggests that parental social behavior and other familial environmental risk factors are not as important in the pathogenesis of MDD as previously assumed and should not be the major focus of the treatment of the disorder. The above-mentioned studies consistently show that the influence of genetic factors is around 30–40% 4. Non-genetic factors, explaining the remaining 60–70% of the variance in susceptibility to MDD, are individual-specific environmental effects (including measurement error effects and gene-environment interactions). These effects are mostly adverse events in childhood and ongoing or recent stress due to interpersonal adversities, including childhood sexual abuse, other lifetime trauma, low social support, marital problems, and divorce 5,6. These results suggest that there is a huge potential in the prevention of MDD by means of psychosocial interventions (e.g., in schools, at workplace). In addition, these results mirror the clinical practice of empirically validated psychotherapies to treat depression 7,8,9, including interpersonal, psychodynamic and cognitive behavioral psychotherapies and cognitive behavioural analysis system of psychotherapy, which all focus directly or indirectly on interpersonal difficulties and skills. This does not exclude the fact that unidentified non-genetic, non-psychosocial risk factors may also play important roles in some patients (e.g., climatic change, medical conditions). Stress sensitivity in depression is partly gender-specific. While men and women are, in general, equally sensitive to the depressogenic effects of stressful life events, their responses vary depending upon the type of stressor. Specifically, men are more likely to have depressive episodes following divorce, separation, and work difficulties, whereas women are more sensitive to events in their proximal social network, such as difficulty getting along with an individual, serious illness, or death 10. These findings point to the importance of gender-sensitive psychosocial approaches in the prevention and treatment of MDD. In contrast to the very solid evidence from epidemiological studies on broad risk factor domains, there is no solid evidence for specific genes and specific gene-by-environment interactions in the pathogenesis of MDD. Genome-wide association studies have indicated that many genes with small effects are involved in complex diseases, increasing the difficulty in identifying such genes 11. While there has been progress in the search for risk genes for several complex diseases despite this methodological problem 12, psychiatric conditions have turned out to be very resistant to robust gene identification. For example, based on a community-based prospective study, it has been proposed that a specific genetic variation in the promoter region of the serotonin transporter (a target of antidepressant drugs) interacts with stressful life events in the pathogenesis of depression 13. Although there is high clinical and neurobiological plausibility of this interaction, a recent meta-analysis yielded no evidence that the serotonin transporter gene alone or in interaction with psychological stress was associated with the risk of depression 14. The limited success of genetic studies of depression has been related to use of current classification schemas including ICD-10 and DSM-IV. These diagnostic manuals are based on clusters of symptoms and characteristics of clinical course that do not necessarily describe homogenous disorders but instead reflect common final pathways of different pathophysiolgical processes 15,16. The clinician should be aware that family history will continue to be the most solid source of information to estimate the genetic risk of MDD. Corticotropin-releasing hormone (CRH) is released from the hypothalamus in response to the perception of psychological stress by cortical brain regions. This hormone induces the secretion of pituitary corticotropin, which stimulates the adrenal gland to release cortisol into the plasma. The physiologic response to stress is partly gender-specific: women show generally greater stress responsiveness than men, which is consistent with the greater incidence of major depression in women 17. Moreover, men show greater cortisol responses to achievement challenges, whereas women show greater cortisol responses to social rejection challenges 18. Although MDD is considered as a stress disorder, most subjects treated for MDD have no evidence of dysfunctions of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis (HPA) 19. However, some subjects with MDD do show abnormalities of that axis and of the extrahypothalamic CRH system 20. Altered stress hormone secretion appeared to be most prominent in depressed subjects with a history of childhood trauma 21. Elevated cortisol may act as a mediator between major depression and its physical long-term consequences such as coronary heart disease, type II diabetes, and osteoporosis 22. The importance of HPA axis dysfunction for the efficacy of antidepressants is a matter of debate 23. This axis is regulated through a dual system of mineralocorticoid (MR) and glucocorticoid (GR) receptors. Decreased limbic GR receptor function 24,25 and increased functional activity of the MR system 26 suggest an imbalance in the MR/GR ratio in stress-related conditions such as MDD. Epigenetic regulation of the glucocorticoid receptors has been associated with childhood abuse 27. Such environmental programming of gene expression may represent one possible mechanism that links early life stress to abnormal HPA axis function and increased risk of MDD in adults. While the CRH stimulation test (dex/CRH test) 28 is a sensitive measure of the HPA axis dysfunction in depression, the specificity of this test for MDD is low. However, non-suppression in the dex/CRH test has consistently predicted increased risk for depressive relapse during clinical remission 23. Additionally, the measurement of waking salivary cortisol concentration has been shown to be a simple and sensitive test for HPA axis hyperactivity in depression 29. Hypercortisolemia is almost exclusively found in subjects with severe and psychotic depression, in whom glucocorticoid antagonists may have some therapeutic effect 30. There is convergent evidence for CRH to play a major role in the pathogenesis of certain types of depression. Levels of CRH in the cerebrospinal fluid are elevated in some depressed subjects 31. Post-mortem studies reported an increased number of CRH secreting neurons in limbic brain regions in depression 32, likely reflecting a compensatory response to increased CRH concentrations 33. In addition, CRH produces a number of physiological and behavioral alterations that resemble the symptoms of major depression, including decreased appetite, disrupted sleep, decreased libido, and psychomotor alterations 34. There is also preliminary evidence that CRH1 receptor antagonists reduce symptoms of depression and anxiety 35. “Sickness behavior” as a result of an activation of the inflammatory response system shares many symptoms with depression, including fatigue, anhedonia, psychomotor retardation, and cognitive impairment. Sickness is mediated by pro-inflammatory cytokines such as interleukin-1α, tumor necrosis factor-α, and interleukin-6, which activate the HPA axis and impair the central serotonin system 36. The prevalence of depression as an unwanted effect of recombinant interferons is around 30% 37. In animals, blocking pro-inflammatory cytokine-mediated signaling produces antidepressant-like effects 38. Clinical data suggest that cytokines may play a role in the pathophysiology of a subgroup of depressed subjects, particularly those with comorbid physical conditions 36. The antidepressant enhancing effect of acetylsalicylic acid 39 points to the possible clinical relevance of psychoneuroimmunology in clinical depression research. Taken together, the laboratory tests with the highest potential to be clinically useful in the care of depressed individuals are based on abnormalities of the neuroendocrine and neuroimmune systems. Despite the large amount of basic science data suggesting that the HPA axis is importantly involved in the pathophysiology of depression, the effect of pharmacological modulation of this neuroendocrine system as antidepressant therapy has been disappointing. The link between childhood trauma and a permanently altered physiologic stress system points to the use of specific psychotherapies in the treatment of depressed patients with a history of early life trauma 40. Most of the serotonergic, noradrenergic and dopaminergic neurons are located in midbrain and brainstem nuclei and project to large areas of the entire brain. This anatomy suggests that monoaminergic systems are involved in the regulation of a broad range of brain functions, including mood, attention, reward processing, sleep, appetite, and cognition. Almost every compound that inhibits monoamine reuptake, leading to an increased concentration of monoamines in the synaptic cleft, has been proven to be a clinically effective antidepressant 19. Inhibiting the enzyme monoamine oxidase, which induces an increased availability of monoamines in presynaptic neurons, also has antidepressant effects. These observations led to the pharmacologically most relevant theory of depression, referred to as the monoamine-deficiency hypothesis. The monoamine-deficiency theory posits that the underlying pathophysiological basis of depression is a depletion of the neurotransmitters serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine in the central nervous system. Serotonin is the most extensively studied neurotransmitter in depression. The most direct evidence for an abnormally reduced function of central serotonergic system comes from studies using tryptophan depletion, which reduces central serotonin synthesis. Such a reduction leads to the development of depressive symptoms in subjects at increased risk of depression (subjects with MDD in full remission, healthy subjects with a family history of depression) 41,42, possibly mediated by increased brain metabolism in the ventromedial prefrontal cortex and subcortical brain regions 42. Experimentally reduced central serotonin has been associated with mood congruent memory bias, altered reward-related behaviors, and disruption of inhibitory affective processing 16, all of which add to the clinical plausibility of the serotonin deficiency hypothesis. There is also evidence for abnormalities of serotonin receptors in depression, with the most solid evidence pointing to the serotonin-1A receptor, which regulates serotonin function. Decreased availability of this receptor has been found in multiple brain areas of patients with MDD 43, although this abnormality is not highly specific for MDD and has been found in patients with panic disorder 44 and temporal lobe epilepsy 45, possibly contributing to the considerable comorbidity among these conditions. However, there is no explanation for the mechanism of serotonin loss in depressed patients, and studies of serotonin metabolites in plasma, urine and cerebrospinal fluid, as well as post-mortem research on the serotonergic system in depression, have yielded inconsistent results. There is preliminary evidence that an increased availability of the brain monoamine oxidase, which metabolizes serotonin, may cause serotonin deficiency 46. In addition, loss-of-function mutations in the gene coding for the brain-specific enzyme tryptophan hydroxylase-2 may explain the loss of serotonin production as a rare risk factor for depression 47. Dysfunction of the central noradrenergic system has been hypothesized to play a role in the pathophysiology of MDD, based upon evidence of decreased norepinephrine metabolism, increased activity of tyrosine hydroxylase, and decreased density of norepinephrine transporter in the locus coeruleus in depressed patients 48. In addition, decreased neuronal counts in the locus coeruleus, increased alpha-2 adrenergic receptor density, and decreased alpha-1 adrenergic receptor density have been found in the brains of depressed suicide victims post-mortem 49. Since there is no method to selectively deplete central norepinephrine and no imaging tool to study the central norepinephrine system, solid evidence for abnormalities of this system in depression is lacking. While the classical theories of the neurobiology of depression mainly focused on serotonin and norepinephrine, there is increasing interest in the role of dopamine 50. Dopamine reuptake inhibitors (e.g., nomifensine) and dopamine receptor agonists (e.g., pramipexole) had antidepressant effects in placebo-controlled studies of MDD 51. In the cerebrospinal fluid and jugular vein plasma, levels of dopamine metabolites were consistently reduced in depression, suggesting decreased dopamine turnover 52. Striatal dopamine transporter binding and dopamine uptake were reduced in MDD, consistent with a reduction in dopamine neurotransmission 53. Degeneration of dopamine projections to the striatum in Parkinson's disease was associated with a major depressive syndrome in about one half of cases, which usually preceded the appearance of motor signs 54. Experimentally reduced dopaminergic transmission into the accumbens has been associated with anhedonic symptoms and performance deficits on a reward processing task in subjects at increased risk of depression 55,56. These findings are consistent with the clinical observation that depressed patients have a blunted reaction to positive reinforcers and an abnormal response to negative feedback 57. Almost all established antidepressants target the monoamine systems 58. However, full and partial resistance to these drugs and their delayed onset of action suggest that dysfunctions of monoaminergic neurotransmitter systems found in MDD represent the downstream effects of other, more primary abnormalities. Despite this limitation, the monoamine-deficiency hypothesis has proved to be the most clinically relevant neurobiological theory of depression. New findings on the role of dopamine in depression emphasize the scientific potential of this theory, and promising reports of antidepressant effects of drugs that modulate the dopaminergic system (e.g., pramipexole, modafinil) in difficult-to-treat depression underline its clinical relevance 51,59. Although many historical attempts to localize mental functions have failed, they have considerably contributed to a modern neuroscientific understanding of mental disorders 60. The development of neuroimaging techniques has opened up the potential to investigate structural and functional abnormalities in living depressed patients. Unfortunately, the diversity of imaging techniques used, the relatively small and heterogeneous study samples studied, and the limited overlap of results across imaging paradigms 61 make it difficult to reliably identify neuronal regions or networks with consistently abnormal structure or function in MDD. Functional imaging studies have provided the most limited overlap of findings. This may be due to methodological limitations and/or the complexity of neurocircuitry involved in MDD. A recent meta-analytic study found the best evidence for abnormal brain activity in MDD in lateral frontal and temporal cortices, insula, and cerebellum. In these brain regions activity was decreased at rest, they showed a relative lack of activation during induction of negative emotions, and an increase in activity following treatment with serotonin reuptake inhibitors. Opposite changes may exist in ventromedial frontal areas, striatum and possibly other subcortical brain regions 61. More solid evidence has been provided by structural imaging and post-mortem studies. A recent meta-analytic study on brain volume abnormalities in MDD revealed relatively large volume reductions in the ventromedial prefrontal cortex, particularly in the left anterior cingulate and in the orbitofrontal cortex. Moderate volume reductions were found in the lateral prefrontal cortex, hippocampus and striatum 62. Post-mortem studies consistently identified a reduction in glia cell density in dorsal, orbital and subgenual prefrontal cortices, as well as in the amygdala 63,64. Overall, functional, structural and post-mortem studies suggest that structural and functional abnormalities in the left subgenual cingulate cortex are the most solid neuroanatomical finding in MDD. Volume reduction in this region was found early in illness and in young adults at high familial risk for MDD 65, suggesting a primary neurobiological abnormality associated with the etiology of the illness. Humans with lesions that include the subgenual prefrontal cortex showed abnormal autonomic responses to social stimuli 66, and rats with left-sided lesions in this region had increased sympathetic arousal and corticosterone responses to restraint stress 67. Most importantly, chronic deep brain stimulation to reduce the potentially elevated activity in the subgenual cingulated cortex produced clinical benefits in patients with treatment-resistant depression 68. In summary, despite the considerable heterogeneity of findings from neuroimaging studies, there is convergent evidence for the presence of abnormalities in the subgenual prefrontal cortex in some patients with MDD. Neuroanatomical research in depression is of great clinical interest, since novel antidepressant treatments such as deep brain stimulation can target specific brain regions. In addition, there are promising leads for neuroimaging findings to predict the likelihood of responses to specific treatments 69. Risk factors for depressive episodes change during the course of the illness. The first depressive episode is usually “reactive”, i.e., triggered by important psychosocial stressors, while subsequent episodes become increasingly “endogenous”, i.e., triggered by minor stressors or occurring spontaneously 70. There is consistent evidence that the volume loss of the hippocampus and other brain regions is related to the duration of depression 71, suggesting that untreated depression leads to hippocampal volume loss, possibly resulting in increased stress sensitivity 72 and increased risk of recurrence 73. Glucocorticoid neurotoxicity, glutamatergic toxicity, decreased neurotrophic factors, and decreased neurogenesis have been proposed as possible mechanisms explaining brain volume loss in depression. There is no solid evidence on of these since there are no imaging to directly and neurotrophic processes in neurotrophic factor has considerable Specifically, studies have shown between and in hippocampal as well as expression of following antidepressant treatment The clinician should be aware of the potentially effect of depression and treat depressed patients as early and as A of studies consistently showed reductions in acid concentrations in the prefrontal and cortex in depression This may reflect stress since psychological stress to presynaptic of prefrontal neurotransmission low concentration may reflect reduction in the density and of In addition, chronic stress may reduce receptor possibly through changes in evidence of the hypothesis of depression the lack of effects of drugs on depressive symptoms and prefrontal concentration in subjects with MDD of evidence suggest a dysfunction of the neurotransmitter system in a of the receptor produced and large antidepressant effects in patients with treatment-resistant MDD inhibitors of release (e.g., antidepressant abnormal levels were found in depressed subjects as by and there is evidence for abnormal signaling in post-mortem Since is the major neurotransmitter involved in almost every brain the of the specific role of in depression (e.g., there are promising leads that the receptor is involved in MDD and are diagnostic for MDD, suggesting regulation in depressed patients. In addition, some depressive symptoms may show psychomotor of of positive and negative and a subgroup of patients with MDD may have a disorder In healthy young subjects, changes in the of the had specific effects on subsequent mood In depressed patients, of can have antidepressant on these abnormalities have been hypothesized to be associated with MDD The association between of the and in cortisol in some subjects with and the effect of antidepressants on of and to the of this hypothesis Despite of the many promising the and genetic of this hypothesis are It remains to be antidepressant effects of such as directly to of on these abnormalities have been hypothesized to be associated with MDD The association between of the and in cortisol in some subjects with and the effect of antidepressants on of and to the of this hypothesis Despite of the many promising the and genetic of this hypothesis are It remains to be antidepressant effects of such as directly to of The and of the neurobiological of depression are in 1. The many theories of depression and the relatively low response rate of all antidepressant treatments a hypothesis of and suggest that depression is a clinically and heterogeneous disorder. This research on of the response to therapeutic interventions using such as neuroimaging and neuroendocrine tests in with for with to stress sensitivity and antidepressant The of of therapeutic will for the development of that has the potential to interventions and to up pathways in the of novel therapeutic approaches.

World Psychiatry · editorial or comment · 607 citationsread the source →

Atypical Antipsychotics: CATIE Study, Drug-Induced Movement Disorder and Resulting Iatrogenic Psychiatric-Like Symptoms, Supersensitivity Rebound Psychosis and Withdrawal Discontinuation Syndromes

Chronic illness can result in chronicity of clinical practice. As we have moved away from prescribing classical antipsychotics and tricyclic antidepressants, issues remain with the use of atypical antipsychotics and second-generation antidepressants that need to be addressed, namely, iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes and supersensitivity psychiatric symptoms. An optimal maintenance drug treatment consists of regular attempts to reduce the dose by finding a minimal therapeutic dose, regularly asking the question of when to reduce or withdraw treatment and for which patients, and moreover, why it is difficult to decrease a given drug treatment. Recently, Falloon [1] proposed that maintenance pharmacotherapy in schizophrenia will depend on finally finding minimally effective doses through ‘extensive training in stress management’. In the long-term treatment of major depression, Fava [2] has hypothesized that antidepressants can aggravate the course of depressive illness. Lambert [3] recently suggested that ‘antipsychotic-switching syndromes’, which include discontinuation syndromes, are a ‘major barrier’ to adjusting antipsychotic treatment. In this paper, we propose that to achieve optimal maintenance treatment with antipsychotics, and to reduce or withdraw antipsychotics effectively, we must distinguish syndromes associated with discontinuing antipsychotics, such as supersensitivity psychosis, from true relapse. While the prevalence and incidence of drug-induced movement disorder(s) (DIMD) has continuously decreased with atypical antipsychotics, DIMD persist as do psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD, and these must also be identified and evaluated. Persistent DIMD have been found to be a predictor of the later emergence of tardive dyskinesia (TD) and supersensitivity psychosis [4]. At present, we need to determine the relative risk of iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes, DIMD and DIMD psychiatric symptoms resulting from atypical antipsychotics. Although atypical antipsychotics are now most commonly prescribed, a debate has emerged on the differences between classical and atypical antipsychotics following the results of the Clinical Antipsychotic Trials of Intervention Effectiveness (CATIE) study [5]. The question that comes to the forefront is why recent studies are no longer finding well-established differences between these two generations in terms of efficacy and DIMD. Reasons to explain why recent schizophrenia studies have found reduced drug and placebo differences were examined at the International Society for CNS Clinical Trials and Methodology Annual Mid-Year Conference [6]. While the fact must be considered that patients included in recent studies have less severe illness with symptoms that are better controlled than in past studies (likely due to earlier treatment), the issue that psychiatric symptoms specific to schizophrenia are not being adequately measured nor differentiated from psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD is crucial to answering this question. For example, it is hard to believe that in a recent review of psychomotor slowing in schizophrenia, the authors, when evaluating its effect on measurement and treatment research to improve cognition in schizophrenia (MATRICS), nearly completely ignored the influence of akinesia and DIMD on neuropsychological tests in schizophrenia and the importance of accurate DIMD measurements [7]. As we pursue this ongoing discussion, we recommend the discontinuation of all classical antipsychotics due to their neurotoxic association with a high prevalence of DIMD and increases in basal ganglia volumes [8], and now address how to prescribe atypical antipsychotics most effectively, by taking into account DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms and iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes. The first widely prescribed atypical antipsychotic, risperidone, was first approved in Canada in 1993 following the publication of the Canadian Multicenter Risperidone Study, which reported clear advantages of risperidone over haloperidol and the placebo, and significantly less appearance of DIMD with risperidone than haloperidol [9]. DIMD includes the 4 types of movement disorders induced by antipsychotics: parkinsonism, dystonia, dyskinesia and akathisia [10]. These findings were confirmed by the American Risperidone Study [11] and several other studies reporting greater efficacy of risperidone over classical antipsychotics in terms of cost-efficiency [12] and the clinical management of patients with schizophrenia [13,14,15,16,17]. However, the CATIE study [5] challenged these results. The CATIE study found that of the 4 atypical antipsychotics studied, olanzapine was the only atypical to be more efficacious than the classical antipsychotic perphenazine, and to be highly superior to risperidone for discontinuation of treatment, due to lack of efficacy [5]. Olanzapine is known to produce less DIMD compared to risperidone, therefore one would expect psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD to be less frequent with olanzapine than risperidone. The expected higher rate of DIMD-induced emergent psychiatric symptoms associated with risperidone would explain the CATIE results, showing risperidone to be significantly less efficacious than olanzapine [5], despite risperidone being known to be at least as efficacious as olanzapine for true schizophrenic symptoms. Furthermore, the rating scales used to measure DIMD did not find the well-established differences between the 5 antipsychotics for DIMD rates [5]. Thus, we propose that DIMD and DIMD-induced psychiatric symptoms were confounded with true schizophrenic symptoms in the CATIE study. DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms could be classified into 3 types: (1) emergent psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD, such as akinesia inducing depression, akathisia inducing anxiety; (2) iatrogenic psychiatric-like symptoms resulting from confounding DIMD with psychiatric symptoms, such as akinesia confounded with psychomotor retardation, akathisia with agitation; (3) supersensitivity psychosis symptoms associated with DIMD. In the CATIE study, quetiapine (mean dose = 543.4 mg/day), which shares a low rate of DIMD with olanzapine, was also found to be significantly less efficacious compared to olanzapine, but in contrast to risperidone, this lack of efficacy could be due to psychiatric symptoms related to supersensitivity psychosis explained by quetiapine’s loose binding properties at the D2 receptor [18]. Patients taking quetiapine had a completion rate of 18% out of 329 patients, whereas in our 3-year prospective study of quetiapine monotherapy with a lower mean dose of 487 mg/day (thus less likely to develop therapeutic tolerance), the completion rate was 21.7% out of 23 patients; 6 of 7 patients who relapsed, after a minimum 3 months of stabilized quetiapine treatment, met the criteria for supersensitivity psychosis [19]. Without distinguishing these DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms from symptoms due to the original illness, the major impact of atypical antipsychotics is on the reduction of DIMD and TD [10, 20,] and their beneficial effects on psychosis are masked by DIMD emergent psychiatric symptoms, including supersensitivity psychosis. We will review 4 multicenter trials, which include a total of 14,497 patients, to illustrate how psychiatric and schizophrenic symptoms are confounded with DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms.TD epidemiology has changed significantly since the introduction of atypical antipsychotics, with a constant decline in its prevalence [10]. TD, classified as a DIMD, is a hyperkinetic, involuntary and purposeless movement disorder [10, 20]. Considered as the most significant side effect of classical antipsychotics, TD has been associated with antipsychotics and gastrointestinal neuroleptics, and usually occurs after several years of treatment. Persistent TD can also occur after short-term exposure to classical antipsychotics and gastrointestinal neuroleptics even at low doses and for as few as 2 months [8,21,22,23], while reversible and withdrawal dyskinesias share properties with levodopa-induced dyskinesia [24]. We conducted several epidemiological studies of TD [4,25,26,27] and in 1975, using the National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) psychopharmacology criteria, we found a 31% prevalence of TD in 261 outpatients with schizophrenia [25]. We also evaluated these patients according to the Schooler and Kane research diagnostic criteria and found a 22% prevalence of TD. This variability of findings related to defining criteria complicates comparisons across studies [10]. In a 5-year follow-up study of 169 of the same patients [4, 25], 45% met the research diagnostic criteria for TD. In 1975, 131 of the 261 patients did not meet the research diagnostic for TD, and in 1980 treatment-emergent TD was found in 46 of the patients who did not have it in 1975, for a 5-year cumulative incidence rate of 35% and a mean annual incidence rate of 8.4%. When corrected for remissions, the mean annual incidence rate decreased to 2.9%. This incidence rate, which includes both patients who developed and remitted from TD over time, is similar to results found by other studies during the same time period [28, 29]. The cumulative incidence of treatment-emergent TD in the study by Kane et al. [29] was 12% after 4 years and 40% after 8 years of neuroleptic exposure, which is similar to our finding of an annual incidence rate (corrected for remissions) of 3% for classical antipsychotics. In a study carried out in 130 lithium-treated affective disorder patients previously, but less, exposed to antipsychotics, we found a TD prevalence of 9.2% [26], which was a quarter of the incidence reported in our previous studies on patients with schizophrenia who had greater exposure to antipsychotics. In this time period of classical antipsychotics, 2 meta-analyses (including mostly patients with schizophrenia) reported mean TD prevalences of 23% [30] and 20% [31]. In view of the fact that 58% of patients treated with classical antipsychotics will develop treatment-emergent TD after 10–15 years of treatment [4], and the known beneficial neuroprotective effects of atypical antipsychotics on TD [32] and on increased basal ganglia volumes induced by classical antipsychotics [8], we recommend the discontinuation of all classical antipsychotics due to their neurotoxic effects. In the time period of both classical and atypical antipsychotics, the following multicenter studies (n = 3,753) evaluated the incidence and prevalence of TD, using the same definitions, Extrapyramidal Symptom Rating Scale [20] and training videotapes as in the previous time period. In the first study, an annual TD incidence of 0.68% was reported prospectively in 725 patients with schizophrenia, treated with the long-acting injectable atypical antipsychotic risperidone [27, 33]. Treatment-emergent TD was found in 12 of 587 patients without dyskinesia at the baseline [33]; however, expert case assessment determined 7 cases (1.19%) of withdrawal dyskinesia (3 cases resolved, 4 cases unchanged), 1 case (0.17%) of reversible dyskinesia and 4 cases (0.68%) of persistent treatment-emergent TD. Of the patients with baseline dyskinesia, 28.4% improved, no longer met TD criteria and maintained this response [33]. This annual treatment-emergent TD incidence of 0.68% with atypical antipsychotics is only 22% of the annual incidence of 3% reported with classical antipsychotics [4]. In the second study, the Schizophrenia International Suicide Prevention Trial (67 centers in 11 countries) [34], 980 patients with schizophrenia, or schizoaffective disorders, taking an atypical alone (25.6%), a classical alone (31.5%) or both a classical and an atypical antipsychotic (42.9%) were included from March 19, 1998, to February 14, 1999, and TD was found at the baseline in 115 (12%) patients [27, 35]. Thus, after 10 years in the time period of both classical and atypical antipsychotics, the overall prevalence of TD decreased by at least twofold compared to our previous 1979–1988 studies with classical antipsychotics [4, 25], using the same definitions, Extrapyramidal Symptom Rating Scale and training videotapes. In the third study (baseline data from three Ris-Consta multicenter studies) [27, 36] carried out 1 year later, 2,048 patients were included from March 21, 1999, to December 15, 2000, and TD was found at the baseline in 209 patients (10.2%), using the same methodology. This study showed a further decrease in the prevalence of TD after an additional year of atypical use. This changing epidemiology of TD with atypical antipsychotics is confirmed by Correll et al. [37] in a systematic review of 1-year prospective studies with atypical antipsychotics, and by Jeste et al. [38] in a 1-year study of elderly patients treated with risperidone. In conclusion, following the introduction of atypical antipsychotics, the prevalence and incidence of TD have significantly decreased. However, the risk for TD still exists with both atypical and classical antipsychotics, and there is a need for continued surveillance of emerging cases of TD in patients taking antipsychotics [39], especially as the current debate continues on the differences in efficacy between these two generations of antipsychotics following results from studies such as the CATIE [5, 39]. Furthermore, Kane [39] has pointed out that newly trained clinicians using mostly atypical antipsychotics may not have had the same exposure to TD as previously trained clinicians.A high prevalence of all 4 types of DIMD (parkinsonism, dystonia, dyskinesia and akathisia) remains. In the Schizophrenia International Suicide Prevention Trial (n = 980), a prevalence of 57.5% of DIMD (n = 551 patients) was found [27, 35]. In the Ris-Consta studies (n = 2,048) [27, 36], 970 patients (47.4%) had DIMD at the baseline, which consisted of 778 patients with parkinsonism (38.0%), 285 patients with akathisia (14%) and 209 patients with TD (10.2%). Thus, nearly 1 patient out of 2 had a definite DIMD in this time period of classical and atypical antipsychotics. In addition, DIMD have been consistently associated with significant psychiatric symptoms as measured by the positive and negative syndrome scale (PANSS) [40, 41]. In the InterSept study (n = 980), which included patients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder who were at risk of suicide, suicidality was associated at baseline with DIMD, parkinsonism, TD and akathisia, and depression was associated with TD and akathisia [27, 35]. Based on these results, we recommend routinely assessing DIMD in patients with schizophrenia with suicidal and depressive symptoms. In the Ris-Consta studies (n = 2,048), baseline DIMD were also significantly associated with the PANSS total score, positive, negative and anxiety/depression symptoms [27, 36]. Greater anxiety and depression were seen in patients with severer DIMD, akathisia and parkinsonism. Higher PANSS negative symptom rating was associated with parkinsonism and higher PANSS total scores were associated with akathisia. In this time period, these last two studies (n = 3,028) show that DIMD persists with atypical antipsychotics, and that patients with DIMD have significantly higher PANSS scores compared to patients without DIMD.These results are in agreement with findings from 2 other multicenter studies: the American CATIE study [5] and the European Schizophrenia Outpatient Health Outcomes (SOHO) study [42]. In the CATIE baseline data, patients with TD (n = 212) were found to have significantly more psychopathology than patients without TD (n = 1,098) as measured by the PANSS total score and PANSS general psychopathology subscale [43]. In the 3-year prospective SOHO study, emergent cases of TD were associated with greater overall psychopathology. An increase in clinical global impression overall symptom severity was longitudinally associated with cases of TD in patients without TD at the baseline (n = The SOHO and the CATIE studies have also examined other for TD. the CATIE and SOHO studies found that other DIMD were associated with TD the CATIE study showed that patients with TD had more parkinsonism akathisia while the SOHO study found that baseline symptoms TD our findings in a prospective study of TD [4]. In to reporting that the incidence of TD was lower in patients taking atypical compared to classical antipsychotics after 6 months the SOHO study showed that the incidence of TD was associated with the incidence of of drug-induced in is crucial to that there is a of DIMD with atypical antipsychotics, which are not and confounded with psychiatric symptoms rating scales used routinely in clinical to DIMD do not DIMD from psychiatric symptoms from the 4 multicenter (n = 14,497 patients) into this the CATIE the [27, the Ris-Consta [27, 36] and the SOHO studies have all confirmed the association of DIMD with psychiatric symptoms. most of the studies included in this measure psychiatric symptoms according to the we propose the following of PANSS psychiatric symptoms associated with emergent psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD, such as depression and suicidality example, akinesia is known to produce depression, psychomotor and suicidal while akathisia psychomotor and suicidal and TD is also associated with suicidal iatrogenic psychiatric-like symptoms resulting from confounding and DIMD with psychiatric symptoms, such as confounding and with and retardation, akathisia with anxiety and and and dyskinesias with and schizophrenic psychiatric schizophrenic symptoms associated with DIMD caused by supersensitivity psychosis, which we are now to first reported drug-induced associated with TD a in and increased receptor after long-term treatment with classical antipsychotics, and we this supersensitivity psychosis. We that TD and supersensitivity psychosis with the decrease or withdrawal of an antipsychotic, given risk not and at the same The debate continues on how to most withdraw antipsychotic [1] and and psychiatric syndromes associated with types of syndromes have been with the discontinuation of (1) withdrawal syndromes and major (2) syndromes anxiety and which have been reported with and (3) supersensitivity syndromes such as TD and supersensitivity psychosis These discontinuation syndromes all produce psychiatric symptoms that can be confounded with true of the original illness. In a recent review of the on psychosis the importance of between antipsychotic withdrawal effects related to the course of the original illness and drug-induced effects such as supersensitivity psychosis. due to the discontinuation of a drug can be differentiated from the course of original illness and more long-term maintenance treatment could be reduced and in patients The long-term maintenance with second-generation antidepressants and of a major depressive disorder is of the in and during long-term maintenance treatment. The has also recently been to produce a persistent disorder following withdrawal to be related to supersensitivity When discontinuing antipsychotics and antidepressants, the of supersensitivity syndromes and other iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes must be to high doses or of outpatients and with schizophrenia treated with a classical antipsychotic treatment also included 1 but no antidepressants, no and no showed a prevalence of 22% for supersensitivity psychosis The prevalence of TD using Schooler and Kane criteria, was that found for supersensitivity psychosis. cases of supersensitivity psychosis increased the prevalence of supersensitivity psychosis to psychosis was associated with a higher maintenance dose of classical antipsychotics, high and schizophrenia with a The higher antipsychotic dose and higher associated with supersensitivity psychosis to the of supersensitivity and these results that lower doses of antipsychotics could the appearance of supersensitivity psychosis. In this study, there was no found between TD and supersensitivity psychosis, due to TD being associated with schizophrenia and supersensitivity psychosis with higher antipsychotic dose was not to be a risk for TD, whereas increased was associated with TD but not associated with supersensitivity psychosis. is that most patients in this study were treated with which has a high for the D2 which could to both a high incidence of supersensitivity psychosis and DIMD as the drug is known to produce a high incidence of symptoms psychosis, in its masked and withdrawal is known to occur 6 following the decrease or withdrawal of an antipsychotic or 3 months for a long-acting injectable We have proposed that TD and supersensitivity psychosis can result from the of in the caused by following in D2 with high for The of supersensitivity psychosis and TD share can both occur after long-term use of antipsychotics and can and difficult to with of the antipsychotic stress both TD and supersensitivity psychosis and both can be by and by and TD was to be the predictor of supersensitivity psychosis in our and follow-up study of supersensitivity psychosis [4, TD and supersensitivity psychosis may or may not occur in the same time but TD is associated with supersensitivity psychosis when it occurs during withdrawal of antipsychotics These two supersensitivity syndromes have been difficult to study due to the fact that antipsychotics can their appearance further with supersensitivity psychosis is that symptoms the original illness and true however, supersensitivity psychosis can be as it more after of the antipsychotic than true occurs with high doses of antipsychotics and not with antipsychotic treatment and therapeutic to antipsychotic treatment after drug response time, as therapeutic there is further of supersensitivity and further syndromes, TD, can (1) or (2) persistent or (3) reversible or symptoms can persist for several months or years and can still be reversible or When persistent and supersensitivity symptoms symptoms, being severer than the original symptoms, but these supersensitivity symptoms persist in contrast to symptoms and may include symptoms atypical antipsychotics, it has been proposed that supersensitivity psychosis occurs more with antipsychotics with from the D2 receptor The 2 atypical antipsychotics most associated with supersensitivity psychosis are quetiapine and which both have loose binding properties at the D2 receptor An additional which and severe in the withdrawal of is its effect as an receptor Thus, for the withdrawal would be by the receptor following of at this drug in the of the a and psychosis results cases of supersensitivity psychosis have also been reported with olanzapine psychosis was found to be associated with quetiapine in our 3-year study of quetiapine in 23 outpatients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder who had previously been treated with classical antipsychotics risperidone, and had symptoms and of side effects [19]. As in our of the CATIE study, 7 patients after a minimum of 3 months of stabilized treatment and 6 of these patients met the criteria for supersensitivity psychosis [19]. the 11 of patients with baseline TD relapsed, the that TD to supersensitivity psychosis and have been to be efficacious in of patients with supersensitivity psychosis We also recommend the use of in supersensitivity and anxiety disorder induced by the discontinuation of the An can be used in with an antipsychotic or an in to more decrease or withdraw these and find the minimal therapeutic dose for patients who still need long-term treatment. a minimal therapeutic dose with an has an additional for a drug olanzapine, as the dose will significant side In in the of Mental Health psychiatric 35% of patients with a of schizophrenia and For severe cases of schizophrenia, the use of or is in to drug to antipsychotic While is less than or it is superior to for anxiety and the of optimal minimal maintenance drug treatment. proposed the beneficial results of treatment in schizophrenia is their effect We have also related their beneficial effects to an of a We recommend treatment as a first for from treatment, can also be prescribed as with as it has a In a and that and had than other in addition, emerging that may improve DIMD has also been to be effective as an to antipsychotic monotherapy in patients with schizophrenia who treatment We that of cases of schizophrenia can be related to supersensitivity psychosis. In patients for maintenance treatment is a minimal therapeutic dose can be with the use of an that will patients from antipsychotic or conclusion, DIMD-induced psychiatric symptoms and supersensitivity syndromes will to to results such as found in the CATIE study which show that olanzapine is the only atypical antipsychotic more efficacious than a classical The proposed for psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD may to the of all classical antipsychotics and the use of higher doses and longer than of atypical antipsychotics. research is in to develop to distinguish between true and iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes and to to more withdraw antipsychotics and antidepressants by and supersensitivity syndromes, for the antipsychotics and quetiapine and for the may to further of DIMD, TD and supersensitivity psychosis as we to more differences in the of As most of antipsychotics and second-generation antidepressants are not routinely or for more differences in drug will also to prescribe minimal therapeutic doses of antipsychotics and antidepressants for greater efficacy and better in the maintenance has and the last 3 years from and

Psychotherapy and Psychosomatics · editorial or comment · 168 citationsread the source →

The impact of end-stage kidney disease (ESKD) on close persons: a literature review

Kidney disease is defined as end-stage when a patient's glomerular filtration rate has fallen to <15 ml/min/ 1.73 m2 [1]. Mortality associated with end-stage kidney disease (ESKD) is high [2]. The incidence of treated ESKD is rising in the western world, with a corresponding increase in the incidence of diabetes and cardiovascular disease, especially in ethnic minority groups. Survival on dialysis has been shown to be poorer in the older age group, especially in patients with increased comorbidity and in those whose functional status at the start of dialysis is poor [3]. Whilst renal transplant rates vary between different countries [4], the liberalization in the acceptance of older people into renal replacement therapy (RRT) programmes, together with changes in population demographics and the fact that kidney transplantation is less suitable for this group of older patients, means that dialysis may be the only treatment option available for an increasing number of patients aged 65 years and over [5]. Recent health policy changes in the OECD countries [6,7] acknowledge that end of life care may be more appropriate for some of these people, and maximum conservative management programmes (where residual renal function is supported, haemoglobin levels maintained and symptoms relieved) have been introduced into many renal units, particularly in the United Kingdom [6]. The onset of ESKD and subsequent recommendation of dialysis as a treatment option involves a change in lifestyle for both patients and close persons [8]. Even before end-stage disease is reached, as renal function deteriorates, patients frequently require additional support, and it is often family members who provide this [9]. In the UK it is estimated that 9 out of 10 carers of patients with either physical or neurological disabilities will be close relatives. In particular when home haemodialysis is undertaken, family members have been involved in supporting patients [10,11]. Studies have shown that good family support is associated with successful adaptation to dialysis and compliance with dietary restrictions [12,13]. Conversely, one of the main factors associated with patients discontinuing dialysis is patients’ perception that they have become a ‘burden’ to close family members [14]. There is therefore a need for health professionals to be aware of the important contribution that close persons make to the care of renal patients, to communicate effectively with them and to provide bereavement support for this group when appropriate [15]. The literature on close persons of patients with renal disease has identified two main areas of impact. Firstly, both haemodialysis and peritoneal dialysis may have a disruptive influence on family members’ social lives [16] and the structure of the week may be geared towards dialysis sessions. Secondly, some patients become frail and lose functional independence, leaving family members to provide greater physical support. Family members may have health and social care needs of their own that need to be addressed [16,17]. Qyinan [18] reported that close persons commonly felt overwhelmed and stressed, although this review was limited to an evidence base of four articles and considered home dialysis only. Campbell [19] used findings from the general carer literature to illustrate demands of ageing partners with ESKD. In other chronic illnesses such as stroke [20] or in palliative care for cancer and mental health [21], interventions aimed at providing family members with training to support patients with their rehabilitation, or to address unmet needs as a result of the patient's illness, have been developed and evaluated. Results have been mixed. In the case of stroke, carers in the intervention group experienced less depression and anxiety and better quality of life [20], whilst in the palliative care study, no statistically significant differences were found between the intervention and control group on carers’ psychological outcomes [21]. However, before such interventions can be developed in ESKD, it is important to understand better the emotional and physical needs of close persons. This review aims to identify all studies involving close persons caring for ESKD patients, to describe the main findings and critique the methodology. Specific attention has been paid to (a) studies exploring the impact of ESKD on close persons, in particular for those close persons where the patients are either withdrawing from dialysis or being provided with end of life care and (b) studies looking at the provision of health care for close persons. A literature search for relevant articles was conducted in five databases: Medline (1950–2006), Embase (1991–2006), CINAHL (1982–2006), PsycINFO (1970–2006) and AMED (1985–2006), employing the following key words: carers, caregivers, end-stage kidney disease, end-stage renal disease, haemodialysis, peritoneal dialysis and renal replacement therapy. These keywords were used both in word search options and exploded as thesaurus terms to obtain the maximum number of articles. The abstracts for each article were read to check for inclusion into the main review, using the following criteria: Published in peer-reviewed journals. Research studies with an introduction, a methodology and results section and a conclusion. Involve close persons, defined as either a family member or the person identified by the patient as an informal carer. By an informal carer, we mean a person who provides the majority of a patient's physical and emotional care needs and who is neither a volunteer nor in the employment of statutory services. Use a sample of close persons caring for adult ESKD patients (over 18 years). Non-English language articles were considered if the English translation of the abstract met the above criteria. Using these criteria, 334 articles were identified from the five databases (139 in Medline, 121 in Embase, 80 in CINAHL, 8 in AMED and 34 in PsycINFO). J.L. went through the abstracts of each of the 382 articles, of which 37 initially met the inclusion criteria. One was later excluded on closer inspection, as it was specifically a validation study of a fatigue severity scale. Of the remaining 36 studies, 16 exclusively looked at family members, 12 specifically at the patient-family dyad and 3 at the family-health professional dyad. Whilst the latter two types of studies did not concentrate solely on family concerns, we decided to include them in the analysis, because these findings further contribute to the limited number of studies in this field. Thirty-six studies were included in the review. Both J.L. and G.S. first went through the remaining 36 studies independently and extracted the following information for each study: the number of carers in the study sample, the RRT population they were caring for, authors’ definition of a carer, demographic details of the sample, patients’ dialysis history, caring history, study design, outcome measures used and main findings. J.L. and G.S. then met together to discuss these findings and obtain an initial consensus before meeting with A.B. and L.J. to obtain a final consensus. We undertook an exploration of the aims of these studies, their study design, the sample of participants and the outcome measures highlighted in the quantitative studies. The three main themes explored were (a) the impact of caring for a patient with ESKD on dialysis on close persons, in particular quality of life, psychological morbidity, close person responsibilities—which authors often referred to as ‘burden’ or ‘carer burden’—and their life situation; (b) the coping strategies employed by these close persons and (c) factors that influence psychological morbidity. No studies of health provision for close persons of patients with ESKD were identified. Four studies looking at end of life issues explored the following themes for close persons: (a) their perceptions of patients’ terminal symptoms; (b) their reasons for why patients decided to stop dialysis; (c) the long-term impact of patient death following dialysis cessation and (d) their perceptions of advance directives. End of life care may be provided by the renal multi-disciplinary team alone, or it may involve referral for specialist palliative care advice. Such advice is likely to include symptom control, attention to spiritual and psychological issues for patients and, where possible, involvement of their families in decision-making. Whilst most studies were interested in the direct impact on close persons only, one triangulated close person data with patient data. The majority of studies reviewed used a cross-sectional design; there was only one longitudinal study. Whilst most were quantitative (24/36), there were some qualitative studies (11/36) and one used a mixed methods approach. The total sample was predominantly female, with mean ages ranging from 41 to 68 years (analysis possible in only 18 studies). Sample sizes also tended to be small, with a median sample of 55 participants for the quantitative and 15 participants for the qualitative studies. Most of the sample was recruited in studies where associated patients were undergoing haemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis. Three studies also involved kidney transplant patients. Only five studies looked at close persons dealing with end of life issues or with patients withdrawing from dialysis. Many studies did not focus on close persons in their potential role as ‘informal carers’. Thirteen studies actively sought close persons who also considered themselves to be informal carers, of which eight provided full definitions of what they meant by this term. All studies included spouses as part of their sample, of which eight specifically concentrated on this group alone. Adult children were included in seven of these studies and parents in five. A wide variety of outcome measures were used to rate health-related quality of life, anxiety, depression, coping strategies and patient disease severity. Some studies used standardized outcome measures; others used simple self-rated tools. The most commonly used standardized measures were the Zarit Burden Interview [22] to evaluate the sense of carer responsibility (3/8), the Beck Depression Scale [23] to evaluate depression (2/5), SF-36 [24] to evaluate health-related quality of life (3/8), Jalowiec Coping Scale [25] to evaluate close persons’ use of coping strategies (3/3) and End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index [26] to evaluate patients’ disease severity (2/4). A breakdown of the country of origin for each study showed that over half originated from either the USA (11/36) or Canada (7/36), with five originating from Australia and only seven from the European Union, of which only one was conducted in the UK. The remaining six studies came from the following countries: Japan (2/36), Brazil (2/36), China (1/36) and Turkey (1/36). The 36 studies have shown mixed results. They have mainly explored the following areas associated with caring for an ESKD patient: the impact on close persons and their social life and the factors affecting close persons’ psychological health. There have been very few studies looking at palliative care issues and these have primarily concentrated on dealing with end of life issues rather than the provision of supportive care in the pre-terminal phase. In only one study, close persons rated their quality of life as excellent and reported few pressures resulting from their carer responsibilities [27], whilst in all others, ESKD and dialysis were shown to increase the close person's sense of responsibility and lead to a poorer quality of life when compared with age-matched controls [28]. Close persons found living with an ESKD patient on dialysis stressful [29] and experienced increased fatigue [30]. The dominating effect of caring for an ESKD patient often led close persons to neglect their own health. For those who took time to have a break from their carer responsibilities, there were health benefits [31]. Other issues that close persons reported included isolation through the loss of social activity [30–36], life restrictions [36–38], increased workload, negative economic consequences [39,40], changed relationship with the patient [30,34] and sexual problems for spouses [41]. Impact on family life (quantitative and mixed methods studies) CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; FES = Family Environment Scale; HD = Haemodialysis; IIRS = Illness Intrusiveness Ratings Scale; MAES = Marital Attitudes Evaluation Scale; NGQ = Norris & Groves Questionnaire; PAF = Physicians’ Assessment Form; PAIS = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness Scale; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; SwQoL = Swedish Health-Related Quality of Life Survey; VAS = Visual Analogue Scale; ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Impact on family life (quantitative and mixed methods studies) CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; FES = Family Environment Scale; HD = Haemodialysis; IIRS = Illness Intrusiveness Ratings Scale; MAES = Marital Attitudes Evaluation Scale; NGQ = Norris & Groves Questionnaire; PAF = Physicians’ Assessment Form; PAIS = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness Scale; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; SwQoL = Swedish Health-Related Quality of Life Survey; VAS = Visual Analogue Scale; ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Impact on family life (qualitative studies) CAPD = continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis; HD = haemodialysis; PD = peritoneal dialysis. Impact on family life (qualitative studies) CAPD = continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis; HD = haemodialysis; PD = peritoneal dialysis. The treatment modality may also have an impact on family members. Studies have highlighted that spouses of transplant patients were more assertive, self-sufficient and able to handle the physical, social and existential aspects of the illness better than dialysis spouses [33,42]. Despite these pressures, close persons recognized that they play a positive role in promoting patients’ well-being [11,43]. They recognized that health care professionals were important in providing support to discuss their problems [39] and would like to have more information about the care being provided to patients [44]. However, they also reported poor communication with professionals, felt that their needs were not always addressed [30,39,45] and felt themselves uneducated and poorly equipped to deal with the regimented lifestyle associated with the dialysis regimen [14]. Whilst some studies have shown that close persons display few signs of psychological distress [40,46–49], others have identified the following: Caring and psychological health ABS = Affect Balance Scale; BDI = Beck Depression Inventory; BI = Barthel Index; CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CAS = Clinical Anxiety Scale; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; CBS = Caregiver Burden Scale; CES-D = Center for Epidemiologic Studies Depression Scale; CID = Cognitive Index of Depression; DAS = Adjustment Scale; = = Anxiety and Scale; = Questionnaire; = Depression Questionnaire; = Questionnaire; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity = Family Questionnaire; = Scale; = = Index; HD = haemodialysis; = Scale; = Impact on Family Scale; = Jalowiec Coping Scale; = Scale; = of control of = Marital Adjustment = Marital Questionnaire; = Scale of = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness PD = peritoneal dialysis; = Scale; = for and Family Scale; = Quality of Life Index; = Scale; = Inventory; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; = = Anxiety Inventory; = with Life Scale; = ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Caring and psychological health ABS = Affect Balance Scale; BDI = Beck Depression Inventory; BI = Barthel Index; CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CAS = Clinical Anxiety Scale; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; CBS = Caregiver Burden Scale; CES-D = Center for Epidemiologic Studies Depression Scale; CID = Cognitive Index of Depression; DAS = Adjustment Scale; = = Anxiety and Scale; = Questionnaire; = Depression Questionnaire; = Questionnaire; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity = Family Questionnaire; = Scale; = = Index; HD = haemodialysis; = Scale; = Impact on Family Scale; = Jalowiec Coping Scale; = Scale; = of control of = Marital Adjustment = Marital Questionnaire; = Scale of = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness PD = peritoneal dialysis; = Scale; = for and Family Scale; = Quality of Life Index; = Scale; = Inventory; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; = = Anxiety Inventory; = with Life Scale; = ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. A negative between close persons’ psychological health and their sense of carer responsibility their use of coping strategies strategies that the symptoms of the of the the close person's age and the social and changes as a result of ESKD A positive between good mental health and the following a of of dialysis the of dialysis patients are on of social support and sense of carer responsibility The sense of carer responsibilities are if patients are in of living have less or comorbidity This was further in studies in patients home haemodialysis or transplant where close persons not anxiety or depression felt less by their carer responsibility and a quality of life to the age-matched population were found between levels of responsibility and other outcomes such as quality of life and The use of coping was found to have a negative with a positive with the number of years on dialysis Close persons were more likely to have negative towards patients if they no of the dialysis and a high of involvement with the caring whilst living in a We identified five studies that explored end of life only one specifically on close persons. This study the long-term impact of death on families when dialysis was found that most families felt that patients a good death as at and with close people and most family members showed only levels of However, carers and those with levels of caring responsibility for the did End of life care HD = End of life care HD = The remaining four studies on patient outcomes such as reasons for withdrawing from dialysis the quality of death the of close persons in ESKD patients’ to and care and use of advance as a in advance by patients, which the of treatment to be by health care a patient is to provide to that person's of These studies found that close persons that whilst most patients a many patients were to be in and from fatigue care family members in that patients’ were and most recognized the of living which they felt were health care professional Close persons were poorly for caring for a dialysis and patients did not to be a on their families [14]. They were also poor at both patients’ and for or dialysis No studies were identified for carers of patients with supportive care those on maximum conservative management The main of most studies included in this review is the of and of the demographic over half of the studies demographic details of close persons’ ages and or details of their relationship to patients of other relevant demographic such as employment status or social is and only seven studies the time that close persons as Whilst all studies the of dialysis half reported the of time a patient has been on with very few patients’ functional although carer studies in other that this has an impact on carers’ quality of life In only 18 9 qualitative and mixed methods study details of their sample of the quantitative studies included in the used cross-sectional and were predominantly Such studies are in exploring between are limited as they not to be only five studies provide the full details of sample it is therefore not possible to rates or the sample The sample sizes were with a median of 55 and details of were reported in only one study. the of the used to the different outcomes it to between the different studies. We identified that most studies poor of their methods and a of of their data Most used of family members with five studies using only one details of their studies with their studies with their one a of their their approach. One study no details of their the studies were poorly that the was and authors were as to to use qualitative data with the and of the qualitative data demographic of data and poor use of supporting This study reviewed the literature exploring the of close persons of patients with ESKD, from which can be the quality of and for the of in this Firstly, studies exploring end of life issues are with only four identified. these four studies are they that health are the time for informal carers to discuss patients’ about end of life care and, long-term distress of close persons resulting from the patients’ However, about such end of life issues close persons, and we studies in this Secondly, definitions of close persons were there were some differences identified between the different groups. the literature the that most close persons are to patients, the in to patients who were and those with family and relationship were not not all close persons to on the role of the informal carer, and the of this role can be a as illness review did not identify differences between informal carers and family carers in the outcome measures used included both the of differences may in their with ‘informal carers’ a more members’ may be as being more this needs further issues that need to be addressed the use of methodology were identified in the Most quantitative studies were and with no intervention studies being identified. Studies of demographic details and rates and all were cross-sectional with sample sizes that used standardized Whilst the use of standardized measures the of the the findings from cross-sectional studies are limited in that they can only between We the use of longitudinal methods in that would that between key be explored in more This would also into the long-term of close persons. In those studies using qualitative most used with poor and of demographic and social and Many authors used the ‘burden’ or ‘carer such terms may influence of the relationship between close person and was not they were by close persons to use the ‘burden’ or it was a by the authors to describe the responsibilities of Such and the of study findings the half of the studies originated from either the USA (11/36) or Canada This it to the results of these studies their to in the of health care provision in other there is evidence that the psychological health of close persons them to to care which in can the mental health of patients, we to identify studies in review that looked specifically at health close persons of patients with ESKD. review has identified in the literature that need to be is therefore to the relationship between health and close persons in to We would like to acknowledge for this review and for support in this of

Clinical Kidney Journal · editorial or comment · 83 citationsread the source →

Understanding nutrition, depression and mental illnesses

INTRODUCTION Few people are aware of the connection between nutrition and depression while they easily understand the connection between nutritional deficiencies and physical illness. Depression is more typically thought of as strictly biochemical-based or emotionally-rooted. On the contrary, nutrition can play a key role in the onset as well as severity and duration of depression. Many of the easily noticeable food patterns that precede depression are the same as those that occur during depression. These may include poor appetite, skipping meals, and a dominant desire for sweet foods.[1] Nutritional neuroscience is an emerging discipline shedding light on the fact that nutritional factors are intertwined with human cognition, behavior, and emotions. The most common mental disorders that are currently prevalent in numerous countries are depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, and obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD).[2] The dietary intake pattern of the general population in many Asian and American countries reflects that they are often deficient in many nutrients, especially essential vitamins, minerals, and omega-3 fatty acids.[3] A notable feature of the diets of patients suffering from mental disorders is the severity of deficiency in these nutrients.[3] Studies have indicated that daily supplements of vital nutrients are often effective in reducing patients' symptoms.[4] Supplements containing amino acids have also been found to reduce symptoms, as they are converted to neurotransmitters which in turn alleviate depression and other mental health problems.[4] On the basis of accumulating scientific evidence, an effective therapeutic intervention is emerging, namely nutritional supplement/treatment. These may be appropriate for controlling and to some extent, preventing depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, eating disorders and anxiety disorders, attention deficit disorder/attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADD/ADHD), autism, and addiction.[4] Most prescription drugs, including the common antidepressants lead to side effects.[4] This usually causes the patients to skip taking their medications. Such noncompliance is a common occurrence encountered by psychiatrists. An important point to remember here is that, such noncompliant patients who have mental disorders are at a higher risk for committing suicide or being institutionalized. In some cases, chronic use or higher doses may lead to drug toxicity, which may become life threatening to the patient.[4] An alternate and effective way for psychiatrists to overcome this noncompliance is to familiarize themselves about alternative or complementary nutritional therapies. Although further research needs to be carried out to determine the best recommended doses of most nutritional supplements in the cases of certain nutrients, psychiatrists can recommend doses of dietary supplements based on previous and current efficacious studies and then adjust the doses based on the results obtained by closely observing the changes in the patient.[4] When we take a close look at the diet of depressed people, an interesting observation is that their nutrition is far from adequate. They make poor food choices and selecting foods that might actually contribute to depression. Recent evidence suggests a link between low levels of serotonin and suicide.[5] It is implicated that lower levels of this neurotransmitter can, in part, lead to an overall insensitivity to future consequences, triggering risky, impulsive and aggressive behaviors which may culminate in suicide, the ultimate act of inwardly directed impulsive aggression. Depression is a disorder associated with major symptoms such as increased sadness and anxiety, loss of appetite, depressed mood, and a loss of interest in pleasurable activities. If there is no timely therapeutic intervention, this disorder can lead to varied consequences. Patients who are suffering from depression exhibit suicidal tendency to a larger degree and hence are usually treated with antidepressants and/or psychotherapy.[6] Deficiencies in neurotransmitters such as serotonin, dopamine, noradrenaline, and γ-aminobutyric acid (GABA) are often associated with depression.[6–11] As reported in several studies, the amino acids tryptophan, tyrosine, phenylalanine, and methionine are often helpful in treating many mood disorders including depression.[12–17] When consumed alone on an empty stomach, tryptophan, a precursor of serotonin, is usually converted to serotonin. Hence, tryptophan can induce sleep and tranquility. This implies restoring serotonin levels lead to diminished depression precipitated by serotonin deficiencies.[8] Tyrosine and sometimes its precursor phenylalanine are converted into dopamine and norepinephrine.[18] Dietary supplements containing phenyl alanine and/or tyrosine cause alertness and arousal. Methionine combines with adenosine triphosphate (ATP) to produce S-adenosylmethionine (SAM), which facilitates the production of neurotransmitters in the brain.[19–22] The need of the present paradigm is, more studies shedding light on the daily supplemental doses of these neurochemicals that should be consumed to achieve antidepressant effects. Researchers attribute the decline in the consumption of omega-3 fatty acids from fish and other sources in most populations to an increasing trend in the incidence of major depression.[23] The two omega-3 fatty acids, eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA) which the body converts into docosahexanoic acid (DHA), found in fish oil, have been found to elicit antidepressant effects in human. Many of the proposed mechanisms of this conversion involve neurotransmitters. For instance, antidepressant effects may be due to bioconversion of EPA to leukotrienes, prostaglandins, and other chemicals required by the brain. Others hypothesize that both EPA and DHA influence neuronal signal transduction by activating peroxisomal proliferator-activated receptors (PPARs), inhibiting G-proteins and protein kinase C, in addition to calcium, sodium, and potassium ion channels. Whichever may be the case, epidemiological data and clinical studies have clearly shown that omega-3 fatty acids can effectively treat depression.[24] In depressed patients, daily consumption of dietary supplements of omega-3 fatty acid that contain 1.5-2 g of EPA has been shown to stimulate mood elevation. Nevertheless, doses of omega-3 higher than 3 g do not show better effects than placebos and may be contraindicative in cases, such as those taking anticlotting drugs.[25] In addition to omega–3 fatty acids, vitamin B (e.g., folate) and magnesium deficiencies have been linked to depression.[26–28] Randomized, controlled trials that involve folate and vitamin B12 suggest that patients treated with 0.8 mg of folic acid/day or 0.4 mg of vitamin B12/day will exhibit decreased depression symptoms.[27] In addition, the results of several case studies where patients were treated with 125-300 mg of magnesium (as glycinate or taurinate) with each meal and at bedtime led to rapid recovery from major depression in < 7 days for most of the patients. Previous research has revealed the link between nutritional deficiencies and some mental disorders.[232529–32] The most common nutritional deficiencies seen in patients with mental disorders are of omega–3 fatty acids, B vitamins, minerals, and amino acids that are precursors to neurotransmitters.[20232427283033] Accumulating evidence from demographic studies indicates a link between high fish consumption and low incidence of mental disorders; this lower incidence rate being the direct result of omega–3 fatty acid intake.[233132] One to two grams of omega-3 fatty acids taken daily is the generally accepted dose for healthy individuals, but for patients with mental disorders, up to 9.6 g has been shown to be safe and effective.[34–36] Majority of Asian diets are usually also lacking in fruits and vegetables, which further lead to mineral and vitamin deficiencies. The significance of various nutrients in mental health, with special relevance to depression has been discussed below. CARBOHYDRATES Carbohydrates are naturally occurring polysaccharides and play an important role in structure and function of an organism. In higher organisms (human), they have been found to affect mood and behavior. Eating a meal which is rich in carbohydrates triggers the release of insulin in the body. Insulin helps let blood sugar into cells where it can be used for energy and simultaneously it triggers the entry of tryptophan to brain. Tryptophan in the brain affects the neurotransmitters levels. Consumption of diets low in carbohydrate tends to precipitate depression, since the production of brain chemicals serotonin and tryptophan that promote the feeling of well being, is triggered by carbohydrate rich foods. It is suggested that low glycemic index (GI) foods such as some fruits and vegetables, whole grains, pasta, etc. are more likely to provide a moderate but lasting effect on brain chemistry, mood, and energy level than the high GI foods - primarily sweets - that tend to provide immediate but temporary relief. PROTEINS Proteins are made up of amino acids and are important building blocks of life. As many as 12 amino acids are manufactured in the body itself and remaining 8 (essential amino acids) have to be supplied through diet. A high quality protein diet contains all essential amino acids. Foods rich in high quality protein include meats, milk and other dairy products, and eggs. Plant proteins such as beans, peas, and grains may be low in one or two essential amino acids. Protein intake and in turn the individual amino acids can affect the brain functioning and mental health. Many of the neurotransmitters in the brain are made from amino acids. The neurotransmitter dopamine is made from the amino acid tyrosine and the neurotransmitter serotonin is made from the tryptophan.[5] If there is a lack of any of these two amino acids, there will not be enough synthesis of the respective neurotransmitters, which is associated with low mood and aggression in the patients. The excessive buildup of amino acids may also lead to brain damage and mental retardation. For example, excessive buildup of phenylalanine in the individuals with disease called phenylketonuria can cause brain damage and mental retardation. ESSENTIAL FATTY ACIDS Omega-3 fatty acids The brain is one of the organs with the highest level of lipids (fats). Brain lipids, composed of fatty acids, are structural constituents of membranes. It has been estimated that gray matter contains 50% fatty acids that are polyunsaturated in nature (about 33% belong to the omega-3 family), and hence are supplied through diet. In one of the first experimental demonstrations of the effect of dietary substances (nutrients) on the structure and function of the brain, the omega-3 fatty acids (specially alpha-linolenic acid, ALA) were the member to take part. An important trend has been observed from the findings of some recent studies that lowering plasma cholesterol by diet and medications increases depression. Among the significant factors involved are the quantity and ratio of omega-6 and omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFA) that affect serum lipids and alter the biochemical and biophysical properties of cell membranes. It has been hypothesized that sufficient long chain PUFAs, especially DHA, may decrease the development of depression.[37] The structural and functional components of membrane in cells of brain which is a lipid-rich organ, include polar phospholipids, spingolipids, and cholesterol. The glycerophospholipids in brain consist of high proportion of PUFA derived from the essential fatty acids (EFAs), linoleic acid and α-linolenic acid. The main PUFA in the brain are DHA, derived from the omega-3 fatty acid α-linolenic acid, arachidonic acid (AA) and docosa tetraenoic acid, both derived from omega-6 fatty acid linoleic acid. Experimental studies have revealed that diets lacking omega-3 PUFA lead to considerable disturbance in neural function.[38] Studies by Marszalek and Lodish indicate that despite their abundance in the nervous system, DHA and AA cannot be synthesized by mammals de novo and hence they or their precursors have to be supplied through the diet and transported to the brain. During late gestation and the early postnatal period, neurodevelopment occurs at significantly rapid rates which make the supply of adequate quantity of PUFAs, particularly DHA, imperative to ensure neurite outgrowth in addition to appropriate development of brain and retina.[39] Bruinsma and Taren of University of Arizona College of Public Health, Tucson, USA explored the involvement of dieting-related psychological factors as potential confounders.[40] They discussed studies that have both supported and contested the proposition that lowering plasma cholesterol by diet and medications contributes to depression. Research findings point out that an imbalance in the ratio of the EFAs, namely the omega-6 and omega-3 fatty acids, and/or a deficiency in omega-3 fatty acids, may be responsible for the heightened depressive symptoms associated with low plasma cholesterol. These relationships may explain the inconsistency in the results of trials on cholesterol-lowering interventions and depression. On similar lines, dieting behaviors have been associated with alterations in moods.[41] Dietary omega-3 fatty acids play a role in the prevention of some disorders including depression. Their deficiency can accelerate cerebral aging by preventing the renewal of membranes. However, the respective roles of the vascular component on one hand (where the omega-3s are active) and the cerebral parenchyma itself on the other, have not yet been clearly resolved. The role of omega–3 in certain diseases such as dyslexia and autism is suggested. It was omega–3 fatty acids that participated in the first coherent experimental demonstration of the effect of dietary substances (nutrients) on the structure and function of the brain. Experiments were first of all carried out on x-vivo cultured brain cells (1), then on in vivo brain cells (2), finally on physicochemical, biochemical, physiological, neurosensory, and behavioral parameters (3). These findings indicated that the nature of polyunsaturated fatty acids (in particular omega–3) present in formula milks for infants (both premature and term) determines the visual, cerebral, and intellectual abilities.[16] VITAMINS B-complex vitamins Nutrition and depression are intricately and undeniably linked, as suggested by the mounting evidence by researchers in neuropsychiatry. According to a study reported in Neuropsychobiology,[42] supplementation of nine vitamins, 10 times in excess of normal recommended dietary allowance (RDA) for 1 year improved mood in both men and women. The interesting part was that these changes in mood after a year occurred even though the blood status of nine vitamins reached a plateau after 3 months. This mood improvement was particularly associated with improved vitamin B2 and B6 status. In women, baseline vitamin B1 status was linked with poor mood and an improvement in the same after 3 months was associated with improved mood. Thiamine is known to modulate cognitive performance particularly in the geriatric population.[43] Vitamin B12 (Cynocobalamin) Clinical trials have indicated that Vitamin B12 delays the onset of signs of dementia (and blood abnormalities), if it is administered in a precise clinical timing window, before the onset of the first symptoms. Supplementation with cobalamin enhances cerebral and cognitive functions in the elderly; it frequently promotes the functioning of factors related to the frontal lobe, in addition to the language function of people with cognitive disorders. Adolescents who have a borderline level of vitamin B12 deficiency develop signs of cognitive changes.[43] Folate It has been observed that patients with depression have blood folate levels, which are, on an average, 25% lower than healthy controls.[44] Low levels of folate have also been identified as a strong predisposing factor of poor outcome with antidepressant therapy. A controlled study has been reported to have shown that 500 mcg of folic acid enhanced the effectiveness of antidepressant medication.[45] Folate's critical role in brain metabolic pathways has been well recognized by various researchers who have noted that depressive symptoms are the most common neuropsychiatric manifestation of folate deficiency.[46] It is not clear yet whether poor nutrition, as a symptom of depression, causes folate deficiency or primary folate deficiency produces depression and its symptoms. MINERALS Calcium A recent study showed that selective serotonin uptake inhibitors (SSRIs) inhibit absorption of calcium into bones. In addition to this, the SSRIs can also lower blood pressure in people, resulting in falls which may lead to broken bones. Indiscriminate prescription of SSRIs by doctors and ingestion by patients at risk of depression or other mental health problems may put them at increased risk of fractures. Compounded by the fact that they may be aging and already taking other medications, may also predispose them to osteoporosis.[47] Chromium Many studies on the association of chromium in humans depression have been recorded[4849] which indicate the significance of this micronutrient in mental health. Iodine Iodine plays an important role in mental health. The iodine provided by the thyroid hormone ensures the energy metabolism of the cerebral cells. During pregnancy, the dietary reduction of iodine induces severe cerebral dysfunction, eventually leading to cretinism. Iron Iron is necessary for oxygenation and to produce energy in the cerebral parenchyma (through cytochrome oxidase), and for the synthesis of neurotransmitters and myelin. Iron deficiency is found in children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity Iron in the are critical during the development of the and in with the in the with its associated deficiency is associated with disturbance in the development of cognitive Research findings out that as many as men are This in and more with of more depression than during other times in their These indicate the of in the of depression since its deficiency is known to cause and depression. Iron deficiency is for instance, with depression, and rapid a was first and by in while an of the mineral The role of has been well known in a into its its for bipolar disorder with and The therapeutic use of also its as an in depression, disorder, disorder, eating disorders, and in certain of adequate has to be taken while the mood in the can be used in patients with and The use of during and in and geriatric population needs observation about its In a of the of identified at studies, which indicate that low intake is associated with mood studies with with other populations that mood and in the of studies have shown that levels are lower in those with clinical intervention research that can influence the effectiveness of antidepressant also the brain cells the potential damage by studies have revealed the potential of the for physical development and mental development may be due to deficiency of When children and with poor nutritional status are to alterations of mental and behavioral they can be by dietary but to certain It has been observed that, of diet and meal pattern can have or immediate or effects. Dietary deficiencies of and nutrients vitamins, and such as during aging may precipitate brain which may be due to for of diet and depression which is a of to a factor that is often linked to increased and premature of aging may play an important role in this, by reducing food intake or reducing food intake in to such factors as in and poor use of prescription drugs, and and occurring in the in both and due to to They suggest changes associated with mental disorders such as dementia and depression, and and as to the of depression, people are the alternative and complementary are by the for and as a of and health and that are not currently to be a part of health need to be aware that it is likely that a of their patients with bipolar disorder might use these interventions to be and safe or to research in and brain indicates the of pathways that can provide a of the association between nutritional nervous system, and function an psychological health status. These findings may lead to of the therapeutic of dietary intervention health and health depression and other psychological disorders.

Indian Journal of Psychiatry · editorial or comment · 409 citationsread the source →

Depression, post-traumatic stress disorder, and functional disability in survivors of critical illness in the BRAIN-ICU study: a longitudinal cohort study.

Background: Critical illness is associated with cognitive impairment, but mental health and functional disabilities in survivors of intensive care are inadequately characterised. We aimed to assess associations of age and duration of delirium with mental health and functional disabilities in this group. Methods: In this prospective, multicentre cohort study, we enrolled patients with respiratory failure or shock who were undergoing treatment in medical or surgical ICUs in Nashville, TN, USA. We obtained data for baseline demographics and in-hospital variables, and assessed survivors at 3 months and 12 months with measures of depression (Beck Depression Inventory II), post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD, Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder Checklist-Event Specific Version), and functional disability (activities of daily living scales, Pfeffer Functional Activities Questionnaire, and Katz Activities of Daily Living Scale). We used linear and proportional odds logistic regression to assess the independent associations between age and duration of delirium with mental health and functional disabilities. This study is registered with ClinicalTrials.gov, number NCT00392795. Findings: We enrolled 821 patients with a median age of 61 years (IQR 51-71), assessing 448 patients at 3 months and 382 patients at 12 months after discharge. At 3 months, 149 (37%) of 406 patients with available data reported at least mild depression, as did 116 (33%) of 347 patients at 12 months; this depression was mainly due to somatic rather than cognitive-affective symptoms. Depressive symptoms were common even among individuals without a history of depression (as reported by a proxy), occurring in 76 (30%) of 255 patients with data at 3 months and 62 (29%) of 217 individuals at 12 months. Only 7% of patients (27 of 415 at 3 months and 24 of 361 at 12 months) had symptoms consistent with post-traumatic distress disorder. Disabilities in basic activities of daily living (ADL) were present in 139 (32%) of 428 patients at 3 months and 102 (27%) of 374 at 12 months, as were disabilities in instrumental ADL in 108 (26%) of 422 individuals at 3 months and 87 (23%) of 372 at 12 months. Mental health and functional difficulties were prevalent in patients of all ages. Although old age was frequently associated with mental health problems and functional disabilities, we observed no consistent association between the presence of delirium and these outcomes. Interpretation: Poor mental health and functional disability is common in patients treated in intensive-care units. Depression is five times more common than is post-traumatic distress disorder after critical illness and is driven by somatic symptoms, suggesting approaches targeting physical rather than cognitive causes could benefit patients leaving critical care. Funding: National Institutes of Health AG027472 and the Geriatric Research, Education and Clinical Center (GRECC), Department of Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Tennessee Valley Healthcare System.

The Lancet. Respiratory medicine · 454 citationsread the source →

Prediction and prevention of schizophrenia: what has been achieved and where to go next?

Since the traditional clinical paradigm has been replaced by the modern molecular one, medicine set off into new directions. “Prediction”, “prevention” and “personalization” are the programmatic key words of this new approach. Like other medical disciplines, psychiatry has broadened its focus from diagnosis and treatment to the detection and estimation of the risk of disease development, the prediction of its onset and strategies to avoid its manifestation 1,2,3,4. Although treatment of schizophrenia has greatly advanced over the last decades, a significant number of patients continue to take an unfavorable chronic course 5,6. This makes schizophrenia the leading cause for permanent occupational disability among people under 40 years of age in Germany 7, and the 8th most common cause for disability adjusted life years (DALYs) lost among the 15 to 34-year olds worldwide 8, despite its low prevalence. Moreover, schizophrenia involves tremendous direct and indirect societal costs 9 and a huge burden on patients and their families 8,10. It is becoming increasingly clear that schizophrenia is a complex disorder with polygenic heredity and that its pathogenesis is greatly influenced by interactions between different genes and between genes and environment. Associations to variants of the genes for dysbindin and neuregulin-1, the genetic locus G72 and the DAOA (D-amino acid oxidase activator) gene have now been repeatedly confirmed. As with all other complex diseases, research is focusing now on characterizing the polygenetic predisposition and clarifying its influence on the development of the phenotype 11. Research methods range from molecular genetics via proteome research to cell biology, neurophysiology, brain structural and functional imaging and neuropsychology. With all these methods, several indicators for an increased risk of schizophrenia have been identified. However, the currently recognized neurobiological risk factors are not sufficiently predictive to allow the development and application of “selective” prevention measures targeting asymptomatic persons at risk. For neuro-psychological risk factors, this has just become evident in the large-scale attempt of the North American Prodrome Longitudinal Study (NAPLS) group to improve their multivariate model by integrating the examined neurocognitive variables 12. There are also established environmental risk factors for schizophrenia, such as pregnancy or birth complications, growing up in a large city, IQ low but normal and drug consumption. However, with odds ratios around 2, each of these factors appears to increase the lifetime risk of the disease only slightly 13. Thus, the currently known risk factors, either alone or taken together, cannot be used for prediction and prevention without knowledge of the complete predispositional basis and the gene-gene and gene-environment interactions, which are probably numerous. In view of this situation, it may be argued that the current efforts towards prediction and prevention are still premature and that further progress of etiological research is needed. However, a different perspective has emerged from the work of the centers for early recognition and prevention, established first in Melbourne, Australia and in Cologne, Germany in the mid 1990s, and later on in many other places around the world. This resulted from retrospective research of the early course of psychosis, in which the pathophysiologically active disturbances in brain development extend beyond early abnormalities in behavior into psychopathologically definable early risk and ultra high risk (UHR) symptoms, depending on the individual combination of stressors and resilience factors. First episode psychosis (FEP) research has shown that the outbreak of the disease is preceded in about 70% to nearly 100% of cases by an initial prodrome, which lasts for an average of five to six years. Even in highly developed health care systems, an average of one year thereafter elapses from the first manifestation of psychotic positive symptoms to the initiation of adequate treatment 14,15. The period over which the FEP remains untreated (duration of untreated psychosis, DUP) correlates with: delayed and incomplete remission of the symptoms; necessity of more protracted treatment and greater risk of relapse; lower compliance, greater burden on the family, and a higher level of “expressed emotion”; increased risk of depression and suicide; greater impact on the individual's employment or education; increased drug abuse and delinquent behavior; markedly increased costs of treatment 16. These correlations have recently been confirmed by a meta-analysis 17, with coefficients ranging from 0.285 to 0.434 (95% CI). This does not only provide strong arguments in favor of treating the FEP as early as possible, but has also led to a systematic effort to decrease the incidence of psychosis through indicated prevention. Two important studies concerning the early stage prior to the conversion to FEP have demonstrated that the earliest and most common symptoms, which generally dominate during the prodrome, are unspecific and cannot be distinguished from impairment in mood, drive, contact, and concentration of depressive episodes. These are the Age-Beginning-Course (ABC) study of schizophrenia, a retrospective study with optimized methods 14, and the Cologne Early Recognition (CER) Study, a long-term prospective study with an average follow-up period just below 10 years 18. These studies also found striking cognitive impairments in the form of self-experienced disturbances in thought, speech, and perception processes. This subgroup of so-called basic symptoms, which were found in more than a quarter of patients, had high specificity and a high positive predictive power, accompanied by only low rates of false positive predictions 19,20,21. Basic symptoms were first operationalized in the Bonn Scale for the Assessment of Basic Symptoms (BSABS). Shorter versions of the scale for adults and for children and adolescents — the Schizophrenia Proneness Instrument, Adult version (SPI-A) and the Schizophrenia Proneness Instrument, Child and Youth version (SPI-CY) — were later developed from dimensional analyses 22,23,24. While the BSABS only allows an assessment of the current state, the SPI-A and the SPI-CY also allow severity ratings according to the maximum frequency of occurrence within the past 3 months. In the CER study, 385 patients who were presumably in the prodromal phase of schizophrenia were followed up for an average of 9.6 (±7.6) years past baseline. Twenty percent of the initial criterion-positive cases (1 of 66 basic symptoms) who agreed to be followed up developed schizophrenia after 12 months, a further 17% after 24 months, a further 13% after 36 months, and finally a total of 70% after an average of 4.5 years. Thus, only 30% did not convert to schizophrenia. The overall presence/absence of at least one basic symptom correctly predicted presence/absence of a subsequent transition to schizophrenia in 78.1% of cases. From further analyses, two partially overlapping basic symptom criteria for defining at risk mental states (ARMS) for psychosis, primarily schizophrenia, were developed (Table 1). The first criterion, which consists of ten cognitive-perceptive basic symptoms and is abbreviated as COPER, was based on findings concerning the predictive accuracy of individual basic symptoms 18,25. The second was based on a methodological re-analysis of the same data set, in which a cluster of nine cognitive basic symptoms had repeatedly been selected as the most predictive. This cluster was called “cognitive disturbances” (COGDIS). In terms of general predictive accuracy, the two criteria slightly differed in the CER study, as COGDIS tended to be more conservative than COPER, i.e. to perform better in ruling in subsequent schizophrenia at the cost of performing worse in ruling it out. The transition rate throughout the average follow-up period of roughly 10 years was 65% for COPER and 79% for COGDIS, with the majority of transitions occurring within the first 3 years past baseline. In a second prospective study 26, conducted with the SPI-A and with a systematic follow-up of 24 months, 38% of the initially included 146 at-risk subjects developed a frank psychosis, mainly schizophrenia, within 12.3 (±10.4) months on average (1–48; median=9) according to COPER. Thus, the positive results of the CER study were confirmed. Again, COGDIS appeared to be more specific but less sensitive than COPER. As a consequence of these findings, predictive basic symptoms have been established as a set of criteria for risk assessment in international research on the early recognition of psychosis. In particular, the German Research Network on Schizophrenia used these symptoms, together with a combined criterion of functional deterioration and biological risk, in defining an “early at-risk of psychosis state” (ERPS), thereby suggesting a clinical risk staging model (Figure 1). Early and late initial prodromal state: a clinical staging approach The positive symptoms typical of schizophrenia — such as delusions, hallucinations or formal thought disorders — often first appear in an attenuated or transient form during the initial prodromal phase. These symptoms provide a valid prediction of conversion into FEP, particularly in the short term. Warning signs of this sort have been used as ultra-high risk (UHR) criteria 27,28. Notwithstanding their differences across studies, these criteria are generally composed of three alternative elements: attenuated positive symptoms (APS), brief limited intermittent psychotic symptoms (BLIPS), or a combination of one or more risk factors (always including genetic risk) and functional decline within a certain recent period. For the ascertainment of the UHR criteria, the Melbourne group gradually developed a specific instrument, the Comprehensive Assessment of At Risk Mental States (CAARMS) 29. Based on the Australian definition of the UHR criteria, the Structured Interview for Prodromal Syndromes (SIPS), the Scale for Prodromal Syndromes (SOPS) and, subsequently, the Criteria of Prodromal Syndromes (COPS) were developed 30,31. Different UHR-related approaches to an early detection of FEP, particularly schizophrenia, were developed by the Hillside Recognition and Prevention (RAP) program in New York 32 and the Basel Früherkennung von Psychosen (FEPSY) study 33. There have been at least 15 prediction studies using UHR criteria, some of which with large samples 34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41. The 12-month rates of transition into FEP published so far range between approximately 13% and 50%. A substantial variance is even observed with comparable observation periods in the same center 34,35. Yet, as the annual incidence for all forms of psychosis in the general population is only about 0.034% 42, even the lowest conversion rates still indicate a dramatic increase in the relative risk of illness, at least in the help-seeking samples of specialized centers. Table 2 depicts the predictive accuracy measures published so far, with the last five listed studies representing secondary predictor analyses of samples meeting at risk criteria. As a result, in the German Research Network on Schizophrenia, the UHR approach was combined with the basic symptom approach and applied in a slightly modified form for the definition of “late at-risk of psychosis state” (LRPS) (Figure 1). This clinical staging model, which suggests a syndromal sequence for the development of FEP progressing from unspecific prodromal symptoms to predictive basic symptoms, and then to APS, to BLIPS and to full-blown psychotic symptoms, was recently strongly supported 15. Universal or selective prevention measures target healthy population groups or clinically still healthy risk carriers, respectively 43. Indicated prevention, instead, targets individuals with basic symptoms and UHR symptoms. Even at the early stages when these individuals seek advice and help at the early recognition and prevention centers, they must be regarded as ill and in need of treatment. Furthermore, the impending deterioration of psychosocial performance in schizophrenia often already occurs in the initial prodromal phase, even prior to the conversion into FEP 14,15. These clinical and psychosocial impairments justify defining the interventions in EPRS and LPRS as indicated prevention, pursuing the following three objectives: a) improvement in the current burden of prodromal symptoms; b) avoidance or perhaps delay in the development of psychosocial handicap; c) prevention of or at least delay or attenuation of psychosis. Five international intervention studies have attempted to find out whether or to what extent these three objectives can be reached 44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51 (Table 3). The preventive measures used were either cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), adapted to the requirements of the persons at risk, or atypical antipsychotics (risperidone, olanzapine, and amisulpride). These were randomized controlled studies, but there were problems with the blinding condition in the two CBT interventions. This and other methodological shortcomings currently limit conclusions and have encouraged the research groups working in this area to set up new, optimized intervention studies. For example, the protocol of the ongoing parallel group PREVENT study includes careful comparative analyses and superiority and inferiority tests of the psychological and pharmacological treatments 52. A staging of risk, thereby implying a temporal dimension, was considered for the first time in the two intervention studies of the German Research Network on Schizophrenia. One of these studies covered ERPS and only offered CBT as a preventive measure 49,50. The other study was designed for LRPS and used only preventive treatment with amisul-pride 51. When the symptom development in the initial prodromal state follows the sequence shown in Figure 1, it would be beneficial for scientific and especially ethical reasons to focus on psychological interventions in ERPS, which are well tolerated and highly accepted. As soon as the first attenuated or transient psychotic symptoms occur, it seems justifiable to apply well tolerated antipsychotics with few side effects. This differential prevention strategy is now pursued in all German early recognition centers and is also increasingly gaining support in other countries. Another pharmacological option is aripiprazole, tested in a pilot study in UHR states 53. Its possible preventive effects are currently being analyzed in the PREVENT study. Antidepressants were used in a naturalistic, non-randomized observational study of an adolescent sample employing only the APS criterion for inclusion, but, for methodological reasons, this study does not allow any conclusion about differential preventive effects of these medications 54. A critical evaluation of the achievements over the past 15 years through continuous efforts to enhance prediction and prevention of psychoses, particularly of schizophrenia, reveals quite impressive results. However, the results achieved thus far need to be evaluated in the light of the ambitious, initially mentioned objectives of modern predictive and preventive medicine. Once predictive basic symptoms and UHR symptoms have occurred, the underlying pathophysiological process might have already progressed. For such a complex disease with a long-term course and a pre-dispositional basis, this kind of risk identification and risk-oriented prevention may possibly come too late. A more substantial reduction in incidence could be reached with selective and universal prevention measures. Therefore, symptom-based prediction and prevention need to be further developed into the direction of selective prevention for symptom-free risk carriers. In the future, it is necessary to strive for: a) an improvement of risk enrichment with the inclusion of biological risk factors; b) a stronger individualization of the risk estimation by stratification; c) the inclusion of sub-psychotic mental states, as cross-sectionally by current at risk criteria, in the the application of prevention strategies more with the of the the initial prodromal phase for as as then most of the follow-up periods shown in Table 2 are not to the transition A significant number of later may be as and, the predictive of the risk may be 12. Therefore, the first and most important is to out new, optimized large-scale studies with follow-up periods the of the initial prodromal phase, as in the CER study 18. The risk enrichment can also be advanced through the inclusion of following the of recent research on the prediction of through the cognitive impairment This condition a risk for with a conversion rate comparable to the risk for the patients certain imaging and the predictive risk enrichment may be possible for using brain but also impairments of and which are with the psychosis risk and are more and in cases with a later transition to schizophrenia and other new large-scale studies with sufficiently observation periods could whether the risk enrichment can be achieved by of such The of this strategy is on the progress of research on biological and environmental risk factors and their interactions, as is currently attempted in the Network of schizophrenia study In other medical disciplines, such as or a risk which does not in a of is using for multivariate clinical staging by risk In the of study, this approach was into psychosis prediction research for the first time A clinical model was developed based on a including six variables positive disturbances Assessment of in the past and years of Based on the individual a multivariate for further the risk of transition to psychosis into risk was each a increased relative risk to the general with each This model was argued to improve the prediction of psychosis by a of the individual risk in terms of and a more risk estimation or clinical staging of risk, in studies, could the development of risk adapted inclusion criteria for randomized preventive In the first application of this approach in the only clinical and variables were It remains to be whether a model including or environmental variables would increase the predictive accuracy even In studies have to whether such can also be applied to the prediction of psychosis within different time The currently ongoing of the has a about the inclusion of a risk for psychosis in to prevention initially argued this and to the that the application of as criteria could that the high rate of predictions in would be to increase up to in general This is and prior to whether to the in the of the The on the predictive of at risk criteria, thereby the persons meeting at risk criteria already from mental and functional for which they seek Moreover, they psychological and cognitive with and functional the majority of help-seeking at risk persons general criteria for mental disorder a clinically significant behavioral or psychological with disability and have to be considered as i.e. as people with the need and to be these in there are reasons for the inclusion of a clinical in the as by current at risk criteria, not as a prodromal risk for first psychosis, but as an to medical the of such an diagnosis would have the of the by the current mental state to a and Although an increased risk of psychosis would continue to be a of such a the psychological and medical focus would be from an to and At this current state of the criteria would be the for the inclusion of this A for the and of a new of international and studies would be with this inclusion in and later on also in A new prevention approach is by the of and studies a of the onset of psychosis the with the first results are for and The transition rate was lower in an group of UHR adolescents than in a group and this was at a an was evaluated in 10 patients in an pilot and a significant improvement in different was In an study, time was in an UHR group with as with a group suggesting a of This was the first study imaging data on effects in individuals at risk. The preventive of is currently in the process of in the Australian Prodrome study With the of schizophrenia is the first mental disorder to which the prediction and prevention program of modern medicine has been The results are and justify the that in the years to come it be possible to provide preventive strategies to the individual risk of of each In to a reduction in risk assessment has to be by neurobiological and psychosocial risk factors, and indicated prevention has to be further developed towards selective prevention. This a new of large sample studies for prediction as well as prevention, with observation In these studies, of risk selected to predictive must be psychological and pharmacological interventions need to be on a long-term basis, more prevention strategies have to be In to be to and such studies, it would be to mental states, as by the currently used risk symptoms, in the of the

World Psychiatry · 127 citationsread the source →

Decisions to limit life-sustaining treatment for critically ill patients who lack both decision-making capacity and surrogate decision-makers.

Objective: Many intensive care unit (ICU) physicians have withdrawn life-support from a patient who lacked decision-making capacity and a surrogate decision-maker, yet little is known about the decision-making practices for these patients. We sought to determine how often such patients are admitted to the ICU of a metropolitan hospital and how end-of-life decisions are made for them. Design: Prospective, observational cohort study. Patients and setting: Consecutive adult patients admitted to the medical ICU of a metropolitan West Coast hospital during a 7-month period in 2003 to 2004. Measurements: Attending physicians completed a questionnaire about the decision-making process for each patient for whom they considered limiting life-support who lacked decisional capacity and a legally recognized surrogate decision-maker. Main results: Of the 303 patients admitted during the study period, 49 (16%; 95% confidence interval [CI], 12-21%) lacked decision-making capacity and a surrogate during the entire ICU stay. Compared with all other ICU patients, these patients were more likely to be male (88% vs. 69%; p = .002), white (42% vs. 23%; p = .028), and > or =65 yrs old (29% vs. 13%; p = .007). Physicians considered withholding or withdrawing treatment from 37% (18) of the 49 patients who lacked both decision-making capacity and a surrogate decision-maker. For 56% (10) of these 18 patients, the opinion of another attending physician was obtained; for 33% (6 of 18), the ICU team made the decision independently, and for 11% (2 of 18), the input of the courts or the hospital ethics committee was obtained. Overall, 27% of deaths (13 of 49) during the study period were in incapacitated patients who lacked a surrogate (95% CI, 15-41%). Conclusions: Sixteen percent of patients admitted to the medical ICU of this hospital lacked both decision-making capacity and a surrogate decision-maker. Decisions to limit life support were generally made by physicians without judicial or institutional review. Further research and debate are needed to develop optimal decision-making strategies for these difficult cases.

Critical care medicine · 88 citationsread the source →

Prevalence of psychiatric morbidity and psychological adaptation of the nurses in a structured SARS caring unit during outbreak: a prospective and periodic assessment study in Taiwan.

To assess the rapidly changing psychological status of nurses during the acute phase of the 2003 SARS outbreak, we conducted a prospective and periodic evaluation of psychiatric morbidity and psychological adaptation among nurses in SARS units and non-SARS units. Nurse participants were from two SARS units (regular SARS [N=44] and SARS ICU [N=26]) and two non-SARS units (Neurology [N=15] and CCU [N=17]). Participants periodically self-evaluated their depression, anxiety, post-traumatic stress symptoms, sleep disturbance, attitude towards SARS and family support. Results showed that depression (38.5% vs. 3.1%) and insomnia (37% vs. 9.7%) were, respectively, greater in the SARS unit nurses than the non-SARS unit nurses. No difference between these two groups was found in the prevalence of post-traumatic stress symptoms (33% vs. 18.7%), yet, three unit subjects (SARS ICU, SARS regular and Neurology) had significantly higher rate than those in CCU (29.7% vs. 11.8%, respectively) (p<0.05). For the SARS unit nurses, significant reduction in mood ratings, insomnia rate and perceived negative feelings as well as increasing knowledge and understanding of SARS at the end of the study (all p<0.001) indicated that a gradual psychological adaptation had occurred. The adjustment of nurses in the more structured SARS ICU environment, where nurses care for even more severely ill patients, may have been as good or better than that of nurses in the regular SARS unit. Occurrence of psychiatric symptoms was linked to direct exposure to SARS patient care, previous mood disorder history, younger age and perceived negative feelings. Positive coping attitude and strong social and family support may have protected against acute stress. In conclusion, the psychological impact on the caring staffs facing future bio-disaster will be minimized with lowered risk factors and a safer and more structured work environment.

Journal of psychiatric research · 317 citationsread the source →

An attachment perspective on psychopathology

Attachment theory 1,2,3 has proven to be a very fruitful framework for studying emotion regulation and mental health. In particular, research on adult attachment processes and individual differences in attachment orientations has provided strong evidence for the anxiety-buffering function of what Bowlby 2 called the attachment behavioral system and for the relevance of attachment-related individual differences to coping with stress, managing distress, and retaining psychological resilience 4. In this paper, we offer a brief overview of the attachment perspective on psychopathology. Following a brief account of attachment theory's basic concepts, we review research findings showing that attachment insecurities — called attachment anxiety and avoidance in the theory — are associated with mental disorders, and that increases in attachment security are an important part of successfully treating these disorders. Bowlby 2 claimed that human beings are born with an innate psychobiological system (the attachment behavioral system) that motivates them to seek proximity to significant others (attachment figures) in times of need. Bowlby 1 also outlined major individual differences in the functioning of the attachment system. Interactions with attachment figures who are available in times of need, and who are sensitive and responsive to bids for proximity and support, promote a stable sense of attachment security and build positive mental representations of self and others. But when a person's attachment figures are not reliably available and supportive, proximity seeking fails to relieve distress, felt security is undermined, negative models of self and others are formed, and the likelihood of later emotional problems and maladjustment increases. When testing this theory in studies of adults, most researchers have focused on the systematic pattern of relational expectations, emotions, and behavior that results from one's attachment history — what Hazan and Shaver 5 called attachment style. Research clearly indicates that attachment styles can be measured in terms of two independent dimensions, attachment-related anxiety and avoidance 6. A person's position on the anxiety dimension indicates the degree to which he or she worries that a partner will not be available and responsive in times of need. A person's position on the avoidance dimension indicates the extent to which he or she distrusts relationship partners’ good will and strives to maintain behavioral independence, self-reliance, and emotional distance. The two dimensions can be measured with reliable and valid self-report scales (e.g., 6), and they are associated in theoretically predictable ways with relationship quality and adjustment 4. Mikulincer and Shaver 4 proposed that a person's location in the two-dimensional conceptual space defined by attachment anxiety and avoidance reflects both the person's sense of attachment security and the ways in which he or she deals with threats and distress. People who score low on these dimensions are generally secure and tend to employ constructive and effective affect-regulation strategies. Those who score high on either the attachment anxiety or the avoidance dimension (or both) suffer from insecurity and tend to rely on what Cassidy and Kobak 7 called secondary attachment strategies, either deactivating or hyperactivating their attachment system in an effort to cope with threats. According to Mikulincer and Shaver 4, people scoring high on avoidant attachment tend to rely on deactivating strategies — trying not to seek proximity, denying attachment needs, and avoiding closeness and interdependence in relationships. These strategies develop in relationships with attachment figures who disapprove of and punish closeness and expressions of need or vulnerability 8. In contrast, people scoring high on attachment anxiety tend to rely on hyperactivating strategies — energetic attempts to achieve proximity, support, and love combined with lack of confidence that these resources will be provided and with resentment and anger when they are not provided 7. These reactions occur in relationships in which an attachment figure is sometimes responsive but unreliably so, placing the needy person on a partial reinforcement schedule that rewards persistence in proximity-seeking attempts, because they sometimes succeed. Individual differences in attachment styles begin in interactions with parents during infancy and childhood (e.g., 9). However, Bowlby 3 claimed that meaningful relational interactions during adolescence and adulthood can move a person from one region to another of the two-dimensional conceptual space defined by attachment anxiety and avoidance. Moreover, a growing body of research shows that attachment style can change, subtly or dramatically, depending on current context, recent experiences, and recent relationships (e.g., 10,11). According to attachment theory, interactions with inconsistent, unreliable, or insensitive attachment figures interfere with the development of a secure, stable mental foundation; reduce resilience in coping with stressful life events; and predispose a person to break down psychologically in times of crisis 3. Attachment insecurity can therefore be viewed as a general vulnerability to mental disorders, with the particular symptomatology depending on genetic, developmental, and environmental factors. Mikulincer and Shaver 4 reviewed hundreds of cross-sectional, longitudinal, and prospective studies of both clinical and non-clinical samples and found that attachment insecurity was common among people with a wide variety of mental disorders, ranging from mild distress to severe personality disorders and even schizophrenia. Consistently compatible results have also been reported in recent studies. For example, attachment insecurities (of both the anxious and avoidant varieties) are associated with depression (e.g., 12), clinically significant anxiety (e.g., 13), obsessive-compulsive disorder (e.g., 14), post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) (e.g., 15), suicidal tendencies (e.g., 16), and eating disorders (e.g., 17). Attachment insecurity is also a key feature of many personality disorders (e.g., 18,19). However, the specific kind of attachment insecurity differs across disorders. Anxious attachment is associated with dependent, histrionic, and borderline disorders, whereas avoidant attachment is associated with schizoid and avoidant disorders. Crawford et al 18 found that attachment anxiety is associated with what Livesley 20 called the “emotional dysregulation” component of personality disorders, which includes identity confusion, anxiety, emotional lability, cognitive distortions, submissiveness, oppositionality, self-harm, narcissism, and suspiciousness. Crawford et al 19 also found that avoidant attachment is associated with what Livesley 20 called the “inhibitedness” component of personality problems, including restricted expression of emotions, problems with intimacy, and social avoidance. Another related issue concerning the associations between attachment insecurities and psychopathology is the extent to which attachment insecurities are a sufficient cause of mental disorders. In our view, beyond disorders such as separation anxiety and pathological grief, in which attachment injuries are the main causes and themes, attachment insecurities per se are unlikely to be sufficient causes of mental disorders. Other factors (e.g., genetically determined temperament; intelligence; life history, including abuse) are likely to converge with or amplify the effects of attachment experiences on the way to psychopathology. Consider, for example, the relation between attachment-related avoidance and psychological distress. Many studies of large community samples have found no association between avoidant attachment and self-report measures of global distress 4. However, studies that focus on highly stressful events, such as exposure to missile attacks, living in a dangerous neighborhood, or giving birth to a handicapped infant, have indicated that avoidance is related to greater distress and poorer long-term adjustment 4. Life history factors are also important. For example, the association between attachment insecurity and depression is higher among adults with a childhood history of physical, psychological, or sexual abuse (e.g., 21). Stressful life events, poverty, physical health problems, and involvement in turbulent romantic relationships during adolescence also strengthen the link between attachment insecurity and psychopathology (e.g., 22). The causal links between attachment and psychopathology are also complicated by research findings showing that psychological problems can increase attachment insecurity. Davila et al 23, for example, found that late adolescent women who became less securely attached over periods of 6 to 24 months were more likely than their peers to have a history of psychopathology. Cozzarelli et al 24 found that women who moved in the direction of insecure attachment over a 2-year period following abortion were more likely than other women who had an abortion to have a prior history of depression or abuse. Solomon et al 25 assessed attachment insecurities and PTSD symptoms among Israeli ex-prisoners of war (along with a matched control group of veterans) 18 and 30 years after their release from captivity. Attachment anxiety and avoidance increased over time among the ex-prisoners, and the increases were predicted by the severity of PTSD symptoms at the first wave of measurement. Overall, attachment insecurities seem to contribute nonspecifically to many kinds of psychopathology. However, particular forms of attachment insecurity seem to predispose a person to particular configurations of mental disorders. The attachment-psychopathology link is moderated by a large array of biological, psychological, and socio-cultural factors, and mental disorders per se can erode a person's sense of attachment security. If attachment insecurities are risk factors for psychopathology, then the creation, maintenance, or restoration of a sense of attachment security should increase resilience and improve mental health. According to attachment theory, interactions with available and supportive attachment figures impart a sense of safety, trigger positive emotions (e.g., relief, satisfaction, gratitude, love), and provide psychological resources for dealing with problems and adversities. Secure individuals remain relatively unperturbed during times of stress, recover faster from episodes of distress, and experience longer periods of positive affectivity, which contributes to their overall emotional well-being and mental health. In some of our studies, we have examined the effects of increased security on various indicators of mental health by experimentally activating mental representations of supportive attachment figures (e.g., 26,27). These research techniques, which we 11 refer to as “security priming”, include subliminal pictures suggesting attachment-figure availability, subliminal names of people designated by participants as security-enhancing attachment figures, guided imagery highlighting the availability and supportiveness of an attachment figure, and visualization of the faces of security-enhancing attachment figures. Security priming improves participants’ moods even in threatening contexts and eliminates the detrimental effects of threats on positive moods (e.g., 26). Mikulincer et al 28 found that subliminal priming with security-related words mitigated cognitive symptoms of PTSD (heightened accessibility of trauma-related words in a Stroop-color naming task) in a non-clinical sample. Admoni 29 found that priming the names of each participant's security providers mitigated two cognitive symptoms of eating disorders (distorted body perception and heightened accessibility of food-related words in a Stroop task) in a sample of women hospitalized for eating disorders. There is also preliminary evidence that a sense of security provided by a psychotherapist improves a client's mental health. In a study based on data from the multi-site National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) Treatment of Depression Collaborative Research Program, Zuroff and Blatt 30 found that a client's positive appraisals of his or her therapist's sensitivity and supportiveness predicted relief from depression and maintenance of therapeutic benefits over an 18-month period. The results were not attributable to patient characteristics or severity of depression. In a one-year prospective study of the effectiveness of residential treatment of high-risk adolescents, Gur 31 found that staff members’ provision of a sense of attachment security in the adolescents resulted in lower rates of anger, depression, and behavioral problems. Although these preliminary findings are encouraging, there is still a great need for additional well-controlled research examining the long-term effects of security-enhancing therapeutic figures on clients’ mental health. According to attachment theory 3, the linkage between attachment insecurities (whether in the form of anxiety, avoidance, or both) and psychopathology is mediated by several pathways. In this section, we will review the most important of these pathways. According to attachment theory and research, lack of parental sensitivity and responsiveness contributes to disorders of the self, characterized by lack of self-cohesion, doubts about one's internal coherence and continuity over time, unstable self-esteem, and over-dependence on other people's approval (e.g., 32,33). Insecure people are likely to be overly self-critical, plagued by self-doubts, or prone to using defenses, such as destructive perfectionism, to counter feelings of worthlessness and hopelessness (e.g., 34). These dysfunctional beliefs about oneself increase insecure people's risk for developing mental disorders. Attachment research has also shown that attachment insecurities are associated with pathological narcissism (e.g., 35). Whereas avoidant attachment is associated with overt narcissism or grandiosity, which includes both self-praise and denial of weaknesses 36, attachment anxiety is associated with covert narcissism, characterized by self-focused attention, hypersensitivity to other people's evaluations, and an exaggerated sense of entitlement 36. According to attachment theory, interactions with available attachment figures and the resulting sense of attachment security provide actual and symbolic supports for learning constructive emotion-regulation strategies. For example, interactions with emotionally accessible and responsive others provide a context in which a child can learn that acknowledgment and display of emotions is an important step toward restoring emotional balance, and that it is useful and socially acceptable to express, explore, and try to understand one's feelings 37. Unlike relatively secure people, avoidant individuals often prefer to cordon off emotions from their thoughts and actions. As a result, they tend to present a façade of security and composure, but leave suppressed distress unresolved in ways that impair their ability to deal with life's inevitable adversities. This impairment is particularly likely during prolonged, demanding stressful experiences that require active coping with a problem and mobilization of external sources of support (e.g., 38). People who score high on attachment anxiety, in contrast, often find negative emotions to be congruent with their attachment-system hyperactivation. For them, “emotion regulation” can mean emotion amplification and exaggeration of worries, depressive reactions to actual or potential losses and failures, and PTSD intrusion symptoms following traumas. Attachment anxiety is also associated with socially destructive outbursts of anger and impulsive, demanding behavior toward relationship partners, sometimes including violence 4. According to attachment theory, recurrent failure to obtain support from attachment figures and to sustain a sense of security, and the resulting reliance on secondary attachment strategies (hyperactivation and deactivation), interfere with the acquisition of social skills and create serious problems in interpersonal relations. Bartholomew and Horowitz 32, using as an assessment device the Inventory of Interpersonal Problems 39, found that attachment anxiety was associated with more interpersonal problems in general. Secure individuals did not show notable elevations in any particular sections of the problems circle, but avoidant people generally had problems with nurturance (being cold, introverted, or competitive), and anxious people had problems with emotionality (e.g., being overly expressive). These problems seem to underlie insecure individuals’ self-reported loneliness and social isolation (e.g., 40) and their relatively low relationship satisfaction, more frequent relationship breakups, and more frequent conflicts and violence 4. Attachment insecurities are associated with a wide variety of mental disorders, ranging from mild negative affectivity to severe, disorganizing, and paralyzing personality disorders. The evidence suggests that insecure attachment orientations (whether anxious or avoidant) are fairly general pathogenic states. Although many of the research findings supporting these ideas are correlational, several studies show a prospective connection between attachment insecurities and vulnerability to disorders. From a therapeutic standpoint, we have reviewed preliminary evidence that situationally heightening people's sense of attachment security reduces the likelihood and intensity of psychiatric symptoms (e.g., PTSD, eating disorders). This evidence underscores the soothing, healing, therapeutic effects of actual support offered by relationship partners, including therapists, and the comfort and safety offered by mental representations of supportive experiences and loving and caring attachment figures. The research evidence causes us to be optimistic about the utility of clinical interventions that increase clients’ sense of attachment security. In the long run, research on attachment security and insecurity, and on the connections between insecurity and psychopathology, should contribute to a strongly social conception of the human mind and its vulnerability to pathologies. In a pioneering chapter on the social neuroscience of attachment processes, Coan 41 proposed what he calls social baseline theory. According to this theory, the human brain evolved in a highly social environment, and many of its basic functions rely on social co-regulation of emotions and physiological states. This means that, rather than conceptualizing human beings as separate entities whose interactions with each other need to be understood, it makes more sense to consider social relatedness and its mental correlates as the normal “baseline” condition. Using this as a starting point helps us to see why experiences of separation, isolation, rejection, abuse, and neglect are so psychologically painful, and why dysfunctional relationships are often the causes or amplifiers of mental disorders.

World Psychiatry · 939 citationsread the source →

Maternal depression and child development

Maternal depression is considered a risk factor for the socioemotional and cognitive development of children [1]. The current prevalence of depression in Canada averages at 6%, which is similar to the rates in other western countries [2] (the female-to-male ratio average is 2:1 [3]). However, the prevalence of postpartum depression is approximately 13% [4]. Women of childbearing age are particularly at risk for depression, and many of them experience high levels of social morbidity and depressive symptoms that are often unrecognized and untreated. Mothers already at risk for depression are particularly fragile during the first months postpartum. Maternal depression has consequences on the child’s development. Because physicians who care for infants and children encounter mothers repeatedly, it is important that they have the knowledge and skills for the detection of symptoms of maternal depression. The objectives of this statement are: To review the present knowledge on the consequences of maternal depression on the development of children at various ages; To review the evidence-based literature on the treatment of maternal depression and its impact on newborns, infants and children; and To review the role of the child’s physician in the detection of symptoms of maternal depression, and the coordination of appropriate support and management. A literature search for the past 15 years was conducted using the MEDLINE database, and by reviewing the bibliographies of the retrieved articles. Of particular interest were the prospective longitudinal cohort studies in which mothers were recruited during their pregnancy or postpartum period, and the children were assessed at regular intervals. Postpartum psychiatric disorders are generally divided into three categories: postpartum blues, postpartum psychosis and postpartum depression. Postpartum blues is a relatively common emotional disturbance with crying, confusion, mood lability, anxiety and depressed mood. The symptoms appear during the first week postpartum, last for a few hours to a few days and have few negative sequelae. At the other end of the spectrum, postpartum psychosis refers to a severe disorder beginning within four weeks postpartum, with delusions, hallucinations and gross impairment in functioning. Postpartum depression begins in or extends into the postpartum period and core features include dysphoric mood, fatigue, anorexia, sleep disturbances, anxiety, excessive guilt and suicidal thoughts [5]. The diagnosis requires that symptoms be present for at least one month and result in some impairment in the woman’s functioning [6]. Women who have experienced postpartum depression have a 50% to 62% risk for future depressions [7]. Other risk factors for postpartum depression include a history of mood disorders, depression symptoms during the pregnancy and a family history of psychiatric disorders [4]. Stress factors, such as negative life events, poor marital relationships, having a special needs infant or medically ‘fragile’ infant, lack of social support, drug abuse, and personal and family psychopathology, have been associated with postpartum depression in some studies, but other studies have found no association [6]. Postpartum depression tends to be milder than episodes of depression that occur at other times, with lower levels of anxiety, agitation, insomnia and somatic symptoms [8]. However, the duration seems to be the same in postpartum and nonpostpartum depression, and lasts several months [6]. The consequences on the child of maternal postpartum depression are not restricted to infancy, but can extend into toddlerhood, preschool age and even school age. Maternal depression that occurs later influences the development of the school-age child and the adolescent. Table 1 summarizes the consequences of maternal depression from prenatal issues to adolescence. Consequences of maternal depression Consequences of maternal depression The associations between maternal depression, maternal behaviour and child outcomes are complex, and not all studies have found a relationship between maternal depression and indicators of poor parenting. Variations in the type, severity, chronicity and timing of maternal depression [9], heterogeneity in sampling (community versus high-risk multiproblem samples), and potentiating risk factors, such as family adversity, low social support and financial stress [10], all contribute to differences in outcomes in children. On the other hand, stress factors can be responsible for adverse child outcomes in the absence of maternal depression. On a daily basis, infants repeatedly participate in interactive routines with their mothers. Maternal depression compromises the dyad’s capacity to mutually regulate the interaction, through two interactive patterns, intrusiveness or withdrawal. Intrusive mothers display a hostile affect, and disrupt the infant’s activity. The infants experience anger, turn away from the mother to limit her intrusiveness and internalize an angry and protective style of coping. Withdrawn mothers are disengaged, unresponsive, affectively flat and do little to support the infant’s activity. The infants are unable to cope or self-regulate this negative state, and develop passivity, withdrawal and self-regulatory behaviours (eg, looking away or sucking on thumb) [11],[12]. Infants of postnatally depressed mothers have been reported to show patterns of dysregulated attention and arousal. In a study by Murray [13], cognitive performance regarding the independent existence of objects was worse for infants of 61 postnatally depressed mothers than the infants of 42 nondepressed mothers, even after adjustment for contextual adversity. Depressed mothers are less likely to offer contingent stimulation to their infants [14], and this disrupts their performance on nonsocial learning tasks [15]. Another factor that may interfere with learning is the negative affect shown by infants of depressed mothers, even when they are interacting with nondepressed adults [16]. It has been documented that an infant’s own negative affect interferes with learning and the ability to process information [17]. Depressed mothers generally show less attentiveness and responsiveness to their children’s needs. They are also poor models for negative mood regulation and problem solving. Longitudinal studies have compared the behaviours of depressed and nondepressed mothers, and the outcome of their children. They showed that depressed mothers were less likely to set limits on their children and to follow through if they did set limits [18]. Children of depressed mothers appeared more passively noncompliant, with less mature expressions of age-appropriate autonomy [19]. They were rated by their dysphoric mothers as being more vulnerable, and having more internalizing (depressed) and externalizing problems (aggressive and destructive), which are associated with lower interaction ratings [20]. They were also more likely to respond negatively to friendly approaches, more likely to engage in low-level physical play and less likely to engage in individual creative play than control children [21]. These aspects of child behaviour were associated with postnatal depression, even when taking adverse situations such as marital conflict, and demographic variables, such as maternal age, ethnicity, socioeconomic status, marital status, child’s age and number of siblings, into account. Studies on large samples all agree on the negative impact of maternal postpartum depression on a child’s cognitive development. Early experience with insensitive maternal interactions (as in maternal postpartum depression) appears to be predictive of poorer cognitive functioning [22]. Boys may be more sensitive than girls to the effects of the mother’s illness. In a study by Sharp et al [23], only boys showed a decrease on standardized tests of intellectual attainment (mainly on indexes of abstract intelligence, reasoning about opposites and analogies) and the “draw-a-child” task. Other aspects of cognitive development, such as cognitive-linguistic functioning [24], have also been shown to be negatively affected, and there were also deficits on the perceptual and performance scale [25]. Outcome effects were independent of birth order, maternal education, family income, marital status and social support. Various studies have shown that school-age children of depressed mothers display impaired adaptive functioning, including internalizing and externalizing problems. Although the studies reviewed by Beardslee et al [26] were uncontrolled studies, a more recent review by Downey and Coyne [27] included studies using control groups (matched for age of parents, occupational status, ethnicity, marital status, and number and age of children), standardized diagnostic criteria to identify parental depression and valid measures of psychological functioning in children. Billings and Moos [28] showed that family stress and low support added to the prediction of child disturbance beyond that accounted for by having a depressed parent. However, the study of Lee and Gotlib [29] comparing children of depressed psychiatric mothers and nondepressed psychiatric mothers showed that the child’s adjustment was more strongly related to the severity of maternal psychopathology than to diagnosis status. Children of depressed parents are also at higher risk of psychopathology, including affective (mainly depression), anxiety and conduct disorders. Hammen et al [30] compared children from four groups of mothers (mothers with unipolar disorder, bipolar disorder and chronic medical illness, and normal mothers) with no differences in ethnicity, age, socioeconomic status or educational level. They showed that, even with the effects of chronic stress statistically controlled, there were still differences in the psychosocial outcome variables among groups, and there was particular impairment in children of unipolar mothers [30]. Other studies [31]–[34], in which there were no demographic differences (age, marital status and socioeconomic level) between depressed and nondepressed parents, have confirmed an increased risk of psychopathology in the children of depressed parents. It seems that onset of a major depression disorder before 30 years of age in parents increases the risk of their children developing depression quite early during childhood [33],[34]. It is somewhat difficult to delineate which behavioural disorders are due to maternal depression and other environmental factors, and which are due to genetic susceptibility. There seems to be an association between attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) in children and maternal mental health, as shown by a cross-sectional study by Lesesne et al [35]. Using the 1998 National Health Interview Study on 9529 mother-child dyads, they found an association between an activity-limiting depression, anxiety or emotional problem in mothers, and ADHD in their children aged four to 17 years, even after adjusting for the child’s age, sex, race, household income and type of family structure [35]. In a longitudinal study of 132 children by Hay et al [36], lower IQ scores, attentional problems, difficulties in mathematical reasoning and special educational needs were significantly more frequent in children whose mothers were depressed at three months postpartum than in controls. In addition, boys were more affected than girls. However, academic difficulties in children of depressed mothers were not mediated by parental IQ, sociodemographic variables or the mother’s mental health after the postpartum depressive episode. Generally, adolescence is a vulnerable period for affective illness and major depressive disorder, which are observed twice as often in girls than in boys [37]. Two cross-sectional studies showed that adolescents with a depressed parent suffered from psychosocial maladjustment [38] and experienced a significantly higher rate of affective disorder than adolescents of nonaffective psychiatric control parents [39]. Longitudinal studies have consistently reported higher rates of major depression and other psychopathology (anxiety disorders, conduct disorders and substance abuse disorders) in adolescents with an affectively ill parent than in control families with similar demographic characteristics (age, ethnicity, socioeconomic status and educational level). Hammen et al [40] followed a cohort of 92 children/adolescents between the ages of eight and 16 years over a three-year They found that children/adolescents with mothers from unipolar depression higher rates of affective disorders, with frequent the disorders in children/adolescents with mothers from bipolar depression were less et al families with children between and years over a They observed higher rates of major depression, disorder and in the of depressed parents than in the major depression onset was between the ages of 15 and Beardslee et al at an of a health with children between the ages of and At the of the children/adolescents with an affectively ill parent at least one of an affective illness compared with in the control years the rates of affective disorders were and and of affectively ill parents onset and a number of in school-age ADHD and learning into adolescence [35]. It has been in many studies that some children with depressed do not display behavioural and that some factors may or the effects of parental depression contextual risk factors, marital life social support lower social and lower maternal are factors that may parental depression and parenting. In a study of mothers with major depressive disorder the child’s et al showed that contextual risk factors mediated the between maternal depression and child behaviour problems. The role of and in child development are to be on mothers, the for the infant is the However, in their study of to et al showed that infants of depressed mothers with their nondepressed who the effects of the mother’s depression on infant interaction In addition, a cross-sectional study of families with children between the ages of and years showed that in families in which the mother was children showed lower social and emotional if the also a psychiatric The role of has been in the of marital to a review by Downey and Coyne marital to children externalizing problems, and increases their risk for depression by and parental depression. differences have been in some studies with boys being more vulnerable and by maternal depression than girls. of the child also to the of parental depression. It has been shown that mothers more negative of their child’s less in their parental and more often A child with a more and be more to their depressed mother’s negative behaviour and not show a of Other of in children include social and cognitive skills that them attention from adults other than their depressed parents and their depressed of and It seems that an of the illness and by the child that or is not to for the behaviour is important to the development of in a child Although the interaction between parents and their child is beyond the of the present it has been that parents of children higher depression than control parents and that is a of maternal depression Because many depressive episodes occur during childbearing years, the to be between the mother’s and a who from depression with is at high risk of [7]. during pregnancy is associated with prenatal poor higher low birth substance abuse and The morbidity of depression during pregnancy be the risk of have been by that are associated with a low risk of and the However, et al did not in major or in taking compared with controls. Another study on taking showed an in when the was during the In the period, it seems that behavioural and rate to are in infants to in et al compared children of mothers with a during children of mothers with and control children of nondepressed mothers who did not during adjusting for the duration and severity of maternal depression, duration of number of depressive episodes after maternal IQ and socioeconomic status, the study showed that and no adverse effects on the IQ, development or behaviour of children between 15 and months of age In a et al compared children to depressed mothers who not to during pregnancy and children to mothers with Although the on the indexes were similar in groups of children to children to lower on the indexes and the factors of the of the of is the of It is important that a depressed mother who to be the is in the postnatal period, there is a risk of with negative consequences on the emotional and behavioural development of the On the other hand, all are in of the information from and to a review by and the and are the of or have been in children or through To infant when postpartum depressed mothers, it is important to all maternal of and and to the of environmental and maternal illness is interaction with the infant or other it is to on the of treatment it is to the of the be on the mother’s and experience of adverse effects with a particular risk of interactions with and adverse effects associated with a particular on mothers and their Maternal be to for the that control of the depressive is and the in pregnancy be in the postnatal The infant’s to can be by the of and it and approximately to after the mother has the Although there is no on the of during pregnancy and be considered in the of a as by the of et al be considered in who have to severe symptoms and who have not to show that and appear to be quite during pregnancy and the postnatal period, and may be during pregnancy and Because of the consequences of maternal depression on an infant’s development, many studies have postnatal mothers. have on the mother’s mood state, her to or of the infant’s and the negative about the infant’s behaviours [16]. to the of by mothers to their infants or by mothers to and their attention support and have been in depressed and as as their and development treatment have been an interactive treatment at problems by the mother in the of her infant that support, and education, with of depressed mothers and their a and in a infant over a period to of months mothers from the showed more interaction and their infants and scores, as as more interaction behaviours than in the control children and adolescents from families with a depressed parent may from a on about the illness within the family and on the development of in the In a study by Beardslee et al families who an to child and a parent with an affective disorder were to a or a parents information about the and symptoms of childhood and depression, and the for within the However, the cognitive to the life of the in the showed more behaviour and among parents and including higher levels of from parents to children about the illness and by the child of the affective illness et al compared with interaction The treatment on the mother’s of her infant and her relationship with the infant, and aspects of the mother’s own childhood and early already the interaction to identify behaviours and to of an infant’s a of there was a in The sleep and difficulties maternal to increased and control In addition, maternal and infants more less and showed more on and problems experienced by depressed postpartum mothers. In a study of depressed postpartum depressive symptoms and social adjustment in the compared with the control on the has also been in the of postpartum depression in with at least one risk factor for postpartum depression and are and is the in Canada seems to be for to depression, it has many drug interactions There are no on its and it be as during pregnancy on its during are a it was observed that was in at a low and the lower limit of in the infant’s A prospective study of found no differences in the of in over the first of life compared with a control to the of the on the Health to of for depression using the Health or the of of from the Health However, it is strongly that a high of for depression among their In their statement the adults for depression in that have in to treatment and of of In their for the of on the that the physical and mental health of the parents in their and review the of attention to their own mental health needs. In a of three et al reported that more than of mothers the impact of depression on the child’s health and and that more than of mothers the role in and to However, a recent study showed that maternal depression was by health care et al reported that in their ability to maternal depression and their of knowledge and The role in maternal depression be one of followed by for and There be a about family history of depression and about episodes of maternal depression. have been and to postpartum depression of that may information about postpartum depression are in Table depression is the can and with the mother’s physician or an appropriate to psychiatric between the mother’s physician and the child’s physician is to information about postpartum depression are about being a that is or difficult to care are in is the past have often been by depressed or the past have often been by having little interest or in are about being a that is or difficult to care are in is the past have often been by depressed or the past have often been by having little interest or in to information about postpartum depression are about being a that is or difficult to care are in is the past have often been by depressed or the past have often been by having little interest or in are about being a that is or difficult to care are in is the past have often been by depressed or the past have often been by having little interest or in many mothers, care may be their with health care The child’s physician may be the first to of the and difficulties of a the child’s physician can the depressed mother her mood affect her and contribute to the child’s problems. of include infant sleep problems, child social and family It is important to a high of of maternal depression when child behaviour problems are during a medical for the depression of the mother over behavioural for the Because postpartum depression can have effects on mothers and children and its prevalence occurs at approximately three it has been to for postpartum depression at the and care In school-age children and the of difficulties in child adjustment and impaired functioning at and in school the physician to the of maternal depression. in families with a history of depression, one in that may depressed or display other psychopathology, at adolescence. These often and for a for the The child’s physician has a role in to the appropriate for the and the parent. that children of depressed mothers are at risk for and behavioural problems, as as their for developing a depressive disorder the physician conduct regular of the offer and them early for more and of and behavioural disorders. Postpartum depression occurs in approximately 13% of and often it is there is often a of between and psychiatric and treatment of the lack of The infant of a depressed mother is at risk for developing negative affect and dysregulated attention and arousal. and of depressed mothers are at risk for developing poor internalizing and externalizing problems, and difficulties in cognitive functioning and in social interactions with parents and and children of depressed parents are at risk for impaired adaptive functioning and psychopathology, including conduct disorders, affective disorders and anxiety disorders. They are also at risk for ADHD and learning risk factors such as marital and life may parental depression and child behaviour problems. On the other hand, some children develop through an social cognitive skills and of the illness. with during pregnancy and is but no major or physical and to the or the infant have been The of the mother’s depression to the low of on the or the the of the and development of infants and the physician to of mother-child interaction and behavioural and problems in the such they in the of maternal depression, a few and with the mother’s physician or psychiatric Mothers who have during pregnancy be that of the to that there is no increased risk of or Mothers who have during pregnancy be about the of their child studies have not shown adverse for differences whose to be Mothers who have during be that of the to that there are no or in children to such through Mothers be that on are and that such not be during pregnancy and on of and of of The in this statement do not an of treatment or to be taking into individual may be are current at of

Paediatrics & Child Health · 312 citationsread the source →

Characteristics and outcome of 27 elbow periprosthetic joint infections: results from a 14-year cohort study of 358 elbow prostheses.

Elbow arthroplasty is increasingly performed in patients with rheumatic and post-traumatic arthritis. Data on elbow periprosthetic joint infection (PJI) are limited. We investigated the characteristics and outcome of elbow PJI in a 14-year cohort of total elbow arthroplasties in a single centre. Elbow prosthesis, which were implanted between 1994 and 2007 at Schulthess Clinic in Zurich, were retrospectively screened for infection. PJI was defined as periprosthetic purulence, the presence of sinus tract or microbial growth. A Kaplan-Meier survival method and Cox proportional hazard analysis were performed. Of 358 elbow prostheses, PJI was identified in 27 (7.5%). The median patient age (range) was 61 (39-82) years; 63% were females. Seventeen patients (63%) had a rheumatic disorder and ten (37%) had osteoarthritis. Debridement and implant retention was performed in 78%, followed by exchange or removal of the prosthesis (15%) or no surgery (7%).The relapse-free survival (95% CI) was 79% (63-95%) after 1 year and 65% (45-85%) after 2 years. The outcome after 2 years was significantly better when patients were treated according to the algorithm compared to patients who were not (100% vs. 33%, p <0.05). In 21 patients treated with debridement and retention, the cure rate was also higher when the algorithm was followed (100% vs. 11%, p <0.05). The findings of the present study suggest that the treatment algorithm developed for hip and knee PJI can be applied to elbow PJI. With proper patient selection and antimicrobial therapy, debridement and retention of the elbow prosthesis is associated with good treatment outcome.

Clinical microbiology and infection : the official publication of the European Society of Clinical Microbiology and Infectious Diseases · 48 citationsread the source →

A social neuroscience perspective on clinical empathy

Clinical empathy is an important element of quality health care. Empathic communication is associated with improved patient satisfaction, increased adherence to treatment, and fewer malpractice complaints 1. Patients' perceptions of their physicians' empathy are positively related to more favorable health outcomes 2-4. In addition to improving patient outcomes, clinical empathy is associated with increased overall well-being for the physician 5. High levels of practitioner empathy have been associated with decreased burnout, personal distress, depression and anxiety, along with increased life satisfaction and psychological well-being 6, 7. Despite increasing appreciation of the value of empathy, medical educators continue to struggle with how best to educate students and residents on empathy maintenance. There have been several promising creative approaches that have shown demonstrable short-term success 8. However, there is a lack of evidence for enduring success, that is, for interventions during medical education that will enable physicians to sustain empathy throughout their careers. A more comprehensive and precise understanding of the subcomponents of empathy and how they are influenced by stress and anxiety is needed in order to design targeted interventions. Empathy is difficult to define, and an operational definition remains elusive. In medicine, empathy has often been conceptualized as consisting of two primary features: cognitive empathy, defined as the ability to recognize and understand another's experience, to communicate and confirm that understanding with the other person, and to take effective action to then act appropriately in a helpful manner 9, and affective empathy, defined as emotional resonance with the patient 10. Cognitive empathy has been singled out as beneficial in the clinical relationship, while affective empathy has been viewed as interfering with the physician's ability to make effective diagnoses and facilitate better outcomes. This has resulted in the teaching and practice of “detached concern”, a process where physicians establish a certain emotional distance from their patients in order to maintain objectivity and limit exposure to the negative emotions routinely experienced by those patients 11. However, recent research has demonstrated that the underlying rationale for implementing a “detached concern” approach is no longer tenable. First, affective engagement contributes to empathy, improving cognitive accuracy as well as affective understanding 12. Second, patients respond differently to emotionally engaged physicians. Patients who perceive their physicians as emotionally attuned or genuinely concerned disclose more, are more adherent to treatment, and show greater agency in addressing serious health problems such as cancer 11. Furthermore, there is now convincing empirical evidence that cognitive and affective aspects interact in the experience of empathy 13. Finally, the primary motivation behind the “detached concern” approach, that emotional connection will necessarily lead individuals into emotional turmoil, is not supported by the literature 14. Despite the clear importance of empathy in clinical settings, many physicians experience difficulty empathizing with their patients. For instance, a study which coded interviews between physicians and lung cancer patients found that, out of 384 empathic opportunities – defined as patients' statements including an explicit description of emotion or patients' statements or clues that indicated an underlying emotion – physicians responded empathically to only 39 (10%), most often reacting with little emotional support and shifting to biomedical questions and statements 15. Using patient-physician interaction videos where students are taught to identify and code these types of empathic opportunities, as well as what would be appropriate empathic responses, could help them more effectively address those opportunities. Additionally, sustaining empathy during distressing moments begins with doctors learning to take their own emotional temperatures, so that they can notice when they are anxious and take a deep breath or count to ten before responding to the patient. Both implementing mindfulness skills 16 and learning to return focus on the patient by becoming curious about what the patient is most concerned about at that moment can help physicians maintain empathy 11. Intensive training in mindful communication has been shown to reduce psychological distress and burnout, and increase empathy 17. The vast majority of individuals have the capacity for empathy, and research suggests that medical students start school with similar or higher levels of empathy compared to an age-matched control group 18. However, empathy significantly declines over the course of medical school 10. The precise underlying causes of this decline are not well understood, and multiple factors likely play a role. The decrease has been attributed to a curriculum that promotes the objectification of the patient 19, increasing workload, mistreatment by supervisors, and lack of emotional support 6, 20. High levels of burnout, personal distress, depression and anxiety have also been found to contribute to the erosion of empathy in medical school 7, 20. Notably, the decline in empathy is not consistent across students. A longitudinal study of 446 medical students found two distinct groups, with 70% showing a significant decline on the Jefferson Scale of Physician Empathy, and 30% seeming to have protective factors that neutralize the erosion of empathy 10. This study demonstrated that individuals in patient oriented specialties showed less decline in empathy than those in technology oriented specialties, and suggested that students with individual traits that protect against empathy erosion self-select into the more patient focused specialties 10. This could be the case, or it could be that training for patient focused areas places more emphasis on skills such as listening to the patient and how to counteract objectification of the patient, important to maintaining empathy in a patient-physician interaction. Additionally, greater perceived social support from faculty and greater satisfaction with the learning quality of the environment have been associated with increased resilience to burnout, and high levels of stress and fatigue have been associated with decreased resilience to burnout 21. As increased burnout has previously been associated with decreased empathy in medical students 22, it is possible that these protective factors might also contribute to maintaining empathy. Empathy is a natural socio-emotional competency that has evolved with the mammalian brain to form and maintain social bonds, and which encompasses different components 13. Affective sharing, the first element of empathy to appear during ontogeny, refers to the unconscious sharing of the affective state of another, which can be assessed by measures of concordance of skin conductance (an index of autonomic arousal) between two individuals 23. Empathic understanding entails the conscious awareness of the emotional state of another person. Empathic concern refers to a motivation to care for someone in need. Successful emotion regulation enables the control of emotion, drive and motivation in the service of adaptive behavior. Even though these components are intertwined and not independent of one another, it is helpful to consider them separately, as each contributes to various aspects of the experience of empathy, and could be the target of specific interventions to promote clinical empathy in medical students 24. Recent work in social neuroscience using functional neuroimaging demonstrates that the affective, cognitive and regulatory components of empathy involve interacting neural circuits 25. Empathic arousal is mediated by strong bidirectional connections between the brainstem, amygdala and sensory cortices, as well as connections with the hypothalamus, insula and somatosensory cortex 13, 24. The cognitive aspects of empathy, such as emotion understanding and emotion regulation, are closely related to processes involved in perspective taking, self-regulation, and executive attention subserved by the medial prefrontal cortex, dorsolateral prefrontal cortex and temporo-parietal junction. Finally, the ability to feel concern and care for others has deep evolutionary roots that likely evolved in the context of parental care 26. Its neural underpinnings are found in subcortical neural systems similar to those known to regulate maternal behavior, especially the hypothalamus and orbitofrontal cortex 27. These components differently contribute to the experience of clinical empathy. Affective sharing may act as a gain antecedent to empathic understanding, while cognitive components are important for representing the mental states of self and other, necessary to make decisions in a medical context 24. Importantly, the type of emotion regulation an individual employs largely determines whether cognitive resources are drained or primed 28. Specifically, research shows that a detached perspective can quickly dampen emotional reactions or filter out emotional information. This can be adaptive to a surgeon while operating on his anesthetized patient, but maladaptive when the same physician interacts with his patient after the surgery 28. This example illustrates the flexibility of emotion regulation in clinical settings, depending on both the physician's goals and the patient's needs. The perception of pain in others acts as an empathic signal, alerting individuals that another person is at risk, attracting their attention and motivating social behaviors. The neural response to the pain and distress of others, a situation familiar to physicians, has been used in social neuroscience research as a window into the neurobiological underpinnings of empathy. Several regions involved in the experience of physical pain, including the anterior cingulate cortex, insula, periaqueductal gray, orbitofrontal cortex and amygdala, are activated by the perception or even the imagination of another individual in pain 29. Importantly, the pattern of neural response is highly flexible and can be modulated by a number of contextual, cognitive, social and interpersonal factors 25. In the context of medicine, two neuroimaging experiments examined the neurophysiological response to the perception of pain in physicians 30, 31. Physicians as well as matched non-physician controls underwent functional magnetic resonance imaging while watching videos of needles being inserted into another person's body parts (face, hands and feet), as well as videos of the same areas being touched by a cotton bud 30. Physicians showed significantly less activation in brain areas involved in empathy for pain (anterior cingulate cortex, insula) than did non-physicians. In addition, physicians showed significantly greater activation in areas involved in executive control, self-regulation, and mental states understanding. These findings suggest less empathic arousal and greater cognitive regulation of an emotional response among the physicians, and indicate that physicians' down-regulation of the pain response dampens their negative arousal to the pain of others. This may have beneficial consequences by freeing up cognitive resources necessary for being of assistance and perhaps even for expressing empathic concern. These results may also inform individual differences in empathic decline and professional distress. Meta-analyses show that clinicians' distress is a key determinant of empathy decline 6. Medical students who are most vulnerable to professional distress, which may lead to emotional exhaustion, detachment and a low sense of accomplishment, may be those who have difficulties regulating their negative emotions. On the other hand, students with overly suppressed pain responses and insufficient negative arousal will also have problems with empathy. Some modicum empathic arousal (or affective sharing) may be necessary to help physicians attune to and empathically understand patients' emotions. A positive emotional reappraisal requires emotional content from the patient to be reinterpreted, molding potentially important information once it is available 28. Empathic disposition varies across individuals, and these differences are likely in part accounted for by interactions between an individual's life history, psychological traits and genetic makeup. Attachment is one construct, first proposed by Bowlby 32, which appears to reside at the interface of all three of these determinants. Attachment theory offers a compelling framework for understanding one's capacity to connect with others and develop supportive relationships as coping resources, and predicts individual differences in empathy 33. Security of attachment correlates with the individual degree of empathy and successful emotion regulation, and is inversely related to pain report and emotional distress 34. Empirical research also indicates that attachment security provides a foundation for empathic concern and caregiving 35. Importantly, these attachment styles are relatively stable across the lifespan. In recent years, a great deal of work has begun to reveal some of the underlying neuroanatomical and neurochemical foundations of attachment-related processes and the variance in such attributes both between and within species 36. Such research has identified a number of neuropeptides that are clearly involved in an array of attachment-related social behaviors, including opioids, vasopressin and oxytocin. Oxytocin, for example, has been demonstrated to play a central role in the initiation of maternal behaviors, social recognition and pair bonding in rodents 37. Studies in humans have demonstrated that oxytocin infusion can modulate a number of attachment-related behaviors, including trust, generosity, empathic concern, and empathic accuracy 38. Oxytocin administration selectively reduces emotional arousal to threatening social images 39 and differentially modulates visual attention toward social signals of positive approach 40. Moreover, it appears that individuals lacking high quality social connections show significantly reduced responses to oxytocin administration 39, which may reflect reduced receptor sensitivity. Research into the influence of genetic variation within the oxytocin receptor has provided converging evidence of the role that oxytocin plays in human social behavior. Polymorphisms within the oxytocin receptor have been shown to be related to affiliative behavior, behavioral and dispositional empathy, and perceived social connectedness 41. Similarly, genetic variation in the oxytocin receptor is related to decreased neuroendocrine and autonomic reactivity to social stress and interacts with perceived social support to dampen physiological reactivity to social-evaluative threat 41. Importantly, this does not suggest that empathy-related behaviors are genetically determined. Particular alleles in the oxytocin receptor system (or vasopressin or opioid systems) previously considered “vulnerability genes” can actually be viewed as “plasticity genes” in that they allow some individuals to be more sensitive to the social environment in general 42. This is consistent with the observation of large individual differences in what can be viewed as a “biological sensitivity to context”, in which people are especially interpersonally adept in socially supportive environments and especially anxious and withdrawn in noxious environments 43. A meta-analysis of studies that evaluated various contextual influences on patient outcomes found that physicians who adopted a reassuring warm and friendly approach were more effective than those employing detached concern 44. Empathic medical care may provide patients with a sense of personal connection and perceived control over their health that results in more effective coping strategies, influencing health outcomes through chronic modulation of physiological stress responses. In fact, a quarter century of research in neuroendocrinology and stress physiology has clearly demonstrated that the perception of social support and stressor controllability can have profound influences on the hormonal, cardiovascular and immunological response to a broad array of physiological responses in both humans and non-human animal models 45. Indeed, perceived controllability over a stressor is associated with prefrontal cortex mediated regulation of limbic (amygdala and hypothalamus) and brainstem (dorsal raphe nucleus) structures associated with neuroendocrine and autonomic nervous system reactivity 45. This provides a direct pathway through which the perception of one's ability to control aspects of his/her disease is capable of regulating physiological processes ranging from glucose metabolism and blood pressure to immunomodulation and neurogenesis 46. Physicians routinely present information to their patients capable of generating substantial physiological stress responses. In many such cases, the physician-patient relationship represents the front line in the battle against disease, as it has the potential to shape the endogenous responses to illness-related stress that, in some cases, can have effects similar to pharmacological interventions 3. Empathic concern, as opposed to detached concern, allows physicians to better understand their patients and modify their approach to fit the individuals they are attempting to treat. Given the past quarter century of work showing that quality emotional connection has comparable influences on health outcomes as obesity and hypertension 47, it is clear that empathic approaches are needed for patient care. The current view of empathy in clinical practice is limited and focused primarily on self-reports of physicians, with little understanding of the mechanisms which contribute to declining empathy during medical school and a lack of empathy generally within the medical field. A better scientific understanding of the connections between the mechanisms involved in interpersonal sensitivity, empathy, and care-giving behavior is needed to help physicians maintain high levels of empathy in clinical practice while limiting burnout and personal distress 48. This understanding should be incorporated into research on the organizational and contextual factors that shape medical professionalization. It is now possible to bring to the study of clinical empathy a risk-vulnerability approach that promises to be both more precise and more comprehensive than previous research. This approach will increase our capacity to design better institutions and educational interventions to support empathy within clinical practice and to protect against its decline. Some interventions to improve empathy and communication between physicians and patients have already shown positive effects on both physicians' professional satisfaction and well-being. There is a need, however, for dedicated research to respond to the vital call for empathy enhancement in medicine with programs using social neuroscience-based knowledge. The writing of this paper was supported by grants from the John Templeton Foundation (The Science of Philanthropy Initiative and Wisdom Research at the University of Chicago) and from National Institutes of Health (R01MH087525; R01MH084934) to J. Decety.

World Psychiatry · 97 citationsread the source →

Adjustment disorders: the state of the art

The diagnostic category of adjustment disorder was introduced in the DSM-III-R 1. Prior to that, it was called transient situational disturbance. The DSM-IV 2 and ICD-10 3 descriptions of adjustment disorder are broadly similar. The main features are the following: a) the symptoms arise in response to a stressful event; b) the onset of symptoms is within 3 months (DSM-IV) or 1 month (ICD-10) of exposure to the stressor; c) the symptoms must be clinically significant, in that they are distressing and in excess of what would be expected by exposure to the stressor and/or there is significant impairment in social or occupational functioning (the latter is mandatory in ICD-10); d) the symptoms are not due to another axis I disorder (or bereavement in DSM-IV); e) the symptoms resolve within 6 months once the stressor or its consequences are removed. Adjustment disorders are divided into subgroups based on the dominant symptoms of anxiety, depression or behaviour. Since its introduction, the category of adjustment disorder has been the subject of criticism on three fronts. The first was that it constituted an attempt to medicalize problems of living and did not conform to the criteria for traditional disorders such as having a specific symptom profile 4. The second was that it was a “wastebasket diagnosis” which was assigned to those who failed to meet the criteria for other disorders 5. The third was on its diagnostic instability 6 and that its main utility was to serve as a “justification” for diagnosis-based reimbursement operating in the healthcare system of the US. Despite this, the category has been retained in the further classifications, in large measure due to its clinical utility. Adjustment disorder continues to be diagnosed in a range of clinical settings. Consultation-liaison psychiatry is the context in which the diagnosis is most likely to be made. Around 12% of referrals are so diagnosed in university hospitals in the US 7, a figure that resembles that in European hospitals 8. Nevertheless, the frequency with which adjustment disorder is now diagnosed seems to be declining, in parallel with an increase in the diagnosis of major depression 9, possibly due to the availability of psychotropic drugs, especially selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), that are safer in those who are medically ill than the older agents. So, changes in the prevalence of adjustment disorders may reflect a change in the “culture of prescribing”, stimulating changes in the “culture of diagnosis” 10. Adjustment disorder has been reported to be almost three times as common as major depression (13.7 vs. 5.1%) in acutely ill medical in-patients 11 and to be diagnosed in up to one third of cancer patients experiencing a recurrence 12. In obstetric/gynaecology consultation-liaison 13, adjustment disorders predominated over other mood disorders. Among those assessed in an emergency department following self harm, a diagnosis of adjustment disorder was made in 31.8% of those interviewed, while a diagnosis of major depression was made in 19.5% of cases 14. None of the major epidemiological studies carried out in the community, such as the Epidemiological Catchment Area Study 15, the National Comorbidity Survey Replication 16 or the National Psychiatric Morbidity Surveys 17 included adjustment disorder among the conditions examined. An exception was the Outcome of Depression International Network (ODIN) study 18, which found a prevalence of only 1% for adjustment disorder in five European countries. A possible reason for this was that mild depression was included in the depressive episode category, inflating that category at the expense of adjustment disorder. By contrast, a study of elderly people from the general population 19 found the prevalence of adjustment disorder to be 2.3%, similar to that of major depression. Adjustment disorder is reported to be very common in primary care, but relevant epidemiological studies in this setting are rare and report rates of the disorder range from 1 to 18% 20,21 among consulters with mental health problems. Concerning psychiatric settings, a study of intake diagnoses into outpatient clinics 22, combining clinical evaluation and the use of the Structured Clinical Interview for DSM-IV (SCID, 23), found that adjustment disorder was the most common clinical diagnosis, made in 36% of patients, whereas the diagnosis was made in about 11% of cases using SCID. Among psychiatric inpatients, 9% of consecutive admissions to an acute public sector unit were diagnosed with adjustment disorder 24. Quantifying the prevalence of adjustment disorder in child and adolescent populations is difficult, due to changes in the diagnostic criteria over time 25. In the younger age groups, unlike adults, adjustment disorder carries with it significant morbidity and a poor outcome, frequently developing into major psychiatric illness 25,26. A general population study in Puerto Rico 27 found a rate of 4.2% among 14–16 year old people, while the total psychiatric morbidity was 17.8%. A similar rate was found in children aged 8–9 in Finland 28. Among outpatients, figures of 5.9–7% have been reported 29,30. In child liaison psychiatry, over one third of those with recent onset diabetes were so diagnosed 31, making it the most common psychiatric disorder to follow this well defined stressor. The current diagnosis of adjustment disorder assumes that there is a stressor which acts as a trigger and that the condition is self-limiting. So, adjustment disorder is closer to the definition of a discrete disorder as proposed by Kendell 32 than most other disorders in psychiatry, since its etiology and course are encapsulated within the diagnosis, while the definition of many other mental disorders is cross-sectional and based on symptoms alone. Yet, the current classifications impose a hierarchical model that assumes equivalence in how adjustment disorder and other diagnoses are construed. As currently classified, adjustment disorder is a sub-threshold diagnosis, that is trumped once the symptom threshold for another diagnosis is met. There is an inherent belief that a sub-threshold condition is less severe than a full-blown disorder such as major depression, the diagnosis by which adjustment disorder is most often superseded. Yet, the evidence for this is lacking, and there is empirical data 33 that, when measures of symptom severity or social functioning are examined, there is no difference between those with mood disorders and adjustment disorder. Furthermore, up to 25% of adolescents with a diagnosis of adjustment disorder engage in suicidal behaviour 34, while among adults with this disorder the figure is 60% 35. Adjustment disorder is the diagnosis in up to one third of young people who die by suicide 36, while among all suicide deaths in the developing world it is the most common diagnosis 37. These data show that, far from being a mild condition, adjustment disorder has a significant impact on behaviour. On the other hand, the current classifications fail to distinguish between adaptive and maladaptive reactions to stress. The DSM-IV tries to address this problem by stating that a diagnosis of adjustment disorder is only made when the distress is of clinical significance 38. There are two components to this: the distress must be in excess of what would normally be expected and/or there is an impairment in social or occupational function. In relation to the first of these, one of the most insightful critics of the DSM-IV, J. Wakefield 39, points out that it would allow the top third in the normal distribution of mood reactivity to be classified as disordered, and that it does not take into account the contextual factors that might cause this excess in distress. For example, the loss of a job for one person might be manageable while for another it could heap poverty on a family resulting in distress that might not be inappropriate under the circumstances. Cultural differences in the expression of emotion also need to be considered. In liaison psychiatry, where the diagnosis of adjustment disorder is most frequently made, a knowledge of “normal” coping with illness in that specific culture is essential and the diagnostic process will be guided by the extent to which an individual's symptoms are in excess of this. Some might argue that the fact of visiting a doctor indicates abnormal distress, yet the tendency to consult is also determined by factors additional to illness, including cultural and personal attitudes to symptoms. So, the mere fact of a consultation should not of itself be taken as a proxy measure of excessive distress. Neither should the decision to refer to psychiatric services, since this too is governed by factors that are not always related to symptom severity (e.g., a wish “to do something” under pressure from a patient in the face of continuing distress). Because adjustment disorder is a diagnosis made in the context of a stressor, there is a danger that any distress following such an event might be labelled as a disorder 40. Clinical judgement, therefore, plays a large part in making the diagnosis of adjustment disorder in the current criterion vacuum and future classifications should accord weight to culture, context and personal circumstances in differentiating normal from pathological distress. The second criterion, requiring impairment in functioning, is arguably a more robust indicator of disorder, since it is this which leads to treatment seeking. For example, the inability to work is potentially a significant indicator of impairment. However, there may be situations where functioning is reduced in the presence of non-pathological reactions. For instance, if the circumstances are especially traumatic, such as the loss of a child, the period of impaired function may be longer than anticipated in those with non-pathological responses. The evaluation of functioning in children places special demands on the assessor, since it has to be set against the demands of the developmental stage, and the degree of dependency and autonomy in key relationships. The presence of pre-existing impairment and extant vulnerabilities, such as learning disability and developmental disorders, must also be considered when making the evaluation. The ICD-10, contrary to the DSM-IV, requires the presence of both excessive symptoms and functional impairment for the diagnosis of adjustment disorder, thus narrowing the application of this category. Because of the hierarchical nature of ICD-10 and DSM-IV, adjustment disorder cannot be diagnosed once the criteria for another condition are met. The condition that most frequently trumps adjustment disorder is major depression/depressive episode. This is evident from studies that compare the clinical with the research approach. For example, in a study of those presenting because of self-harm, a clinical diagnosis of adjustment disorder was made in 31.8% and one of major depression in 19.5% of cases, but using SCID the proportions changed to 7.8% and 36.4% respectively 14. However, there is a point of departure between the two conditions when other variables are considered. Suicidal behaviour occurs earlier in the course of adjustment disorder as compared to major depression 41 and the interval from suicidal communication to completion of suicide is shorter 42. The socio-demographic profile and childhood risk variables differ between the two groups 41. Among adolescents dying by suicide, there is much less evidence of prior emotional or behavioural problems 42. In addition, the readmission rates for those with adjustment disorder are significantly lower than for those with major depression, generalized anxiety or dysthymia 43 and hospitalization is also shorter 6. This highlights the need for the clearer operationalization of adjustment disorder in future classifications. A further but lesser area of potential overlap is with post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD). The conflation is not so much related to the symptoms of these disorders but to the stressors themselves. There has been an expansion in the stressors that are deemed to trigger PTSD, from those that are potentially life threatening, as originally described, to events that are less traumatic, such as financial problems or watching distressing images on television – a phenomenon called “criterion creep” 44. In clinical practice, a diagnosis of PTSD is often made reflexively 45 once such an event is identified, although adjustment disorder might be a more appropriate diagnosis. Overall, it is clear from the data available that adjustment disorder is sufficiently severe and distinct from other disorders, especially major depression, to from its to that of a full-blown and mental disorder. for the DSM-IV have been The Clinical Interview and the International Interview do not adjustment disorder at The for Clinical in do adjustment disorder, but only at the of the in 13, which with and This the criteria for all other disorders have been and there are no specific with to adjustment disorder to the on clinical The SCID also a with adjustment disorder, but the to that this diagnosis is not made if the criteria for any other mental disorder are with the of it to a In of the very threshold for major depression, in studies using SCID and to be of adjustment disorder, major depression will often adjustment disorder, of the context in which the symptoms have The International Interview also a on adjustment disorder as in that disorder is trumped when any other diagnosis is made. So, while have epidemiological research in psychiatry, the that they are having been for use by cannot be This is especially for a diagnosis such as adjustment disorder, which on clinical judgement, context and course than symptoms alone. As a of the problems with the current of diagnostic have been made to for adjustment disorder. Because there is symptom overlap with major depression, there is a that which for depression might people with adjustment disorder. A of have been for this including the Depression which has been to be an for adjustment disorder and major depression but when compared to SCID has and A study of health with an diagnosis but one which the of adjustment disorder most found with the to a using a coping measure have also been The and Depression has been for in cancer patients, but it does not distinguish between major depression and adjustment disorder problems when the Interview and the were for to for adjustment disorder. The of might have a in adjustment disorder from major depression and has been in one study that disorder more symptoms and a to the mood changes compared to disorder of this is Adjustment disorder cannot be diagnosed in the of a stressor. The event must be and in time to the onset of symptoms. The longer the time period between the event and the onset of the less likely is the diagnosis to be adjustment disorder. For this a period between the event and symptom onset of 3 months in DSM-IV and 1 month in ICD-10 is must be when this is for two those who are often significance to that in were in at the in an at may to an of the The 3 month may to be and it is to the empirical data on which this is Concerning the of there is to the in adjustment disorder from major depression. of those with a diagnosis of adjustment disorder have recent life of those with major depression also report such with more related to problems and to occupational or family stressors in the adjustment disorder while significant, are to be clinically in an since they are not as to major depression or adjustment disorder. the events range in severity from those that are as such as a with a to those that are more This will be by In the to the on adjustment disorder, the ICD-10 that and risk plays a than in other such as PTSD or acute stress reactions. However, it is on what evidence this is By contrast, the DSM-IV is on this The that a model is of and is arguably the most There have been studies adjustment disorder against other disorders to allow about the of and is in the current of The relevant studies be classified in two those adjustment disorder and those diagnoses to adjustment disorder. The prevalence of disorder among those with adjustment disorder in to those with other depressive disorders seems to be not although studies are and Among as a to adjustment disorder in a has also been examined, and was found to be a risk for adjustment disorder while was with the severity of the disorder using that a diagnosis of adjustment disorder, such as or depression, are also of although there is a that these conditions may not be to adjustment disorder due to differences in the in the earlier classifications. such study found that the was between and a symptom and evidence of The in relation to and a of symptoms were by in studies of and The of clear criteria for adjustment disorder in DSM-IV or ICD-10 that weight is to clinical than in most other current of anxiety, poor having onset following a recent stressful event are likely of a diagnosis of adjustment disorder, although it must be in that major depression also is often more when the person is with the such as when about while at other times mood is normal and The of the person from the stressful is with a general in symptoms. In the of those who adjustment disorder in response to illness, changes in mood are related to changes in the illness The more the symptoms are loss of mood reactivity the less likely is the diagnosis of adjustment disorder. A family of depression might also a depressive episode. to the symptom threshold for major depression, it is to a diagnosis of this condition than adjustment disorder. the National for Clinical on depression a period of so as to allow for the of under pressure from the patient and or the “to do a diagnosis of major depression (or generalized may be made and also arise when the stressor, and the is and has of may be on as there is no of if the symptoms are likely to or if they are now of the trigger and major depression. The of a response to should the that this is an adjustment disorder, so that are than in of A further is that what to be a stressor (e.g., a diagnosis of a may be with symptoms as of the diagnosis the patient (e.g., the of treatment to that stressors symptoms might to an diagnosis of major depression. The of the consequences of the stressor in symptoms is in the DSM-IV definition of adjustment disorder. on the of adjustment disorder are by DSM-IV and ICD-10 The are broadly similar in the two classifications from adjustment disorder with they have The is the most common in adults, while the with of or of and are more diagnosed among children and The between adjustment disorder and a normal stress response is based on the severity of symptoms and the impact on functioning into account the nature of the stressor; the personal and context in which it has cultural with to such responses. PTSD and acute stress disorder the presence of a stressor of a that would be for almost and the symptom is also although both of these have been 40. not to such events by developing PTSD and the that other disorders follow to be considered. For those not the PTSD diagnostic but with significant symptoms and/or functional adjustment disorder should be considered a possible may to be an adjustment disorder, because of the sub-threshold of the symptoms or the of functional might be an axis I disorder in that only as a a period of the of an diagnosis of adjustment disorder may be at especially if there are symptoms in of of the stressor. studies have the disorders that are with adjustment disorder, an that is by the fact that the criteria for this disorder axis I Yet, a recent study 19 found that almost of patients with major depression or and adjustment disorder were not significantly The between and adjustment disorder is also of since it may the instability of the adjustment disorder diagnosis. may be for of symptoms such as anxiety and depression, which are in adjustment disorder. such as are and may with mood changes to This may in one study 6 patients with an diagnosis of adjustment disorder were on as having a primary diagnosis of The evidence for the treatment of adjustment disorder is due to the of A further problem is that these are so that of may fail to any due to In are as being the most with the exception that, when stressors are measures may be However, there is a for children and adolescents diagnosed with adjustment disorder, since there is evidence that a of adolescents major mental disorders. measures may be to the person in the stressful A person being at work might to an system or may the of the A person in an might a A person on too much work may from family such as social or in a or may distress. or in groups, the range including and symptoms of the of and and the that the stressor has for the might also symptoms. In who engage in self-harm, in that do not may be of and to behaviour has the evidence was found to be of in older patients a including and was in patients with adjustment disorder to was when to patients with adjustment disorder who stress and among with adjustment disorder In a study of cancer patients similar were found in those with adjustment disorder and other psychiatric Some of these have been in specific medically ill groups, such as those with or in coping have been it is if adjustment disorder, were studies (e.g., and and of life than symptoms were the measures in (e.g., The of adjustment disorder of treatment of anxiety and The use of to these is common are by especially if there has been no from there is evidence to Nevertheless, those with and anxiety may have a when are such as in those with a of There are to the treatment of adjustment disorder and these are on with the anxiety A study a with a found that the of were although more to the including from and other and a on symptoms. A study found that and were while a study of cancer patients with and mood found to a study in primary the response of patients with major depression and with adjustment disorder to using reported changes in functional disability based on Overall, the adjustment disorder was as likely to to However, as this was a the of the is study compared and in with adjustment disorder assigned to an a or and found that all significantly Overall, these studies for the of and arguably for any specific in the of adjustment disorder, but further studies are Adjustment disorders are common mental disorders, especially in consultation-liaison prevalence seems to be in children and in they are with significant morbidity and a than in Suicidal behaviour is common in both adolescents and adults with these disorders, and adjustment disorder is the diagnosis in up to one third of young people who die by There are major problems with the diagnostic criteria for adjustment disorder in both ICD-10 and The most of these is the as This has in being the subject of Furthermore, current classifications fail to on these disorders from normal adaptive reactions to and the diagnosis of major depression in people with reactions to for adjustment disorders are although are likely to be the

World Psychiatry · 157 citationsread the source →

Early intervention in psychosis: concepts, evidence and future directions

Psychotic disorders and particularly schizophrenia are serious and sometimes fatal illnesses which typically emerge during the sensitive developmental period of adolescence and emerging adulthood 1. For over a century, a corrosive blend of pessimism, stigma and neglect have confined therapeutic efforts to delayed and inconsistent palliative care. Much of this can be attributed to the conceptual error underpinning the concept of schizophrenia, namely that a true disorder could be validly defined by its (poor) outcome. This error was, in turn, a legacy of the 19th century degeneration theory, which has been allowed to influence the field well beyond its use-by date 2. Although Kraepelin himself and some of his contemporaries ultimately recognized the fallacy, his dichotomy (between dementia praecox and manic depressive insanity) has withstood several challenges and has been strongly reinforced with the advent of operational diagnostic systems. This has not only hampered neurobiological research, but has caused widespread iatrogenic harm and inhibited early diagnosis because of an exaggerated fear of the expected outcome. Until recently, apart from transient and illusory optimism generated by the mental hygiene movement in the 1920s, early intervention for psychotic disorders has been the furthest thing from the minds of clinicians and researchers. Ironically, however, since the early 1990s, this hitherto barren landscape has seen the growth of an increasingly rich harvest of evidence, and widespread national and international efforts for reform in services and treatment approaches, setting the scene for more serious efforts in early intervention in other mental disorders 3–5. Building on seminal research on first episode psychosis from the 1980s 6–8, frontline early psychosis clinical services were established, first in Melbourne 9 and soon after in many key locations in the UK, Europe, North America and Asia 10. There are now hundreds of early intervention programs worldwide, of varying intensity and duration, which focus on the special needs of young people and their families. International clinical practice guidelines and a consensus statement have been published 11 and clinical practice guidelines for the treatment of schizophrenia now typically have a major section on early psychosis 12,13. The International Early Psychosis Association (www.iepa.org.au), an international organization which seeks to improve knowledge, clinical care and service reform in early psychosis, has been in existence for over ten years, led by a highly collegial leadership group of clinicians and researchers. This association has over 3000 members from over 60 different countries, and by 2008 will have held six international conferences, stimulating and capturing a large volume of research and experience. In recent months, responding to the widespread international momentum, the US National Institute of Mental Health has announced a large new funding initiative to study and promote the development of better services for patients with first episode psychosis (www.nimh.nih.gov). The advent of preventive thinking has required a shift in the way schizophrenia and other psychotic disorders are viewed. Rather than seeing them as having inevitably poor prognoses with deterioration in social and functional outcome as the norm, more recent thinking backed up by evidence from large international studies 14–25 views the course of these disorders as much more fluid and malleable. Examination of risk factors which can influence outcome has revealed that many of these may be reversible. For example, disruption of peer and family networks and vocational drop-out commonly occur around and even before the onset of a first psychotic episode. Attention to these areas as part of treatment has the potential to limit or repair the damage. Comorbid depression, substance use, personality dysfunction and post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) are all factors which may influence outcome in a person with first episode psychosis. Again, early and vigorous management of these problems can result in better outcomes 26. Early intervention is a potentially confusing term. Because there is no aetiopathological basis for diagnosing psychotic disorders, they can only be diagnosed by symptoms or combinations of symptoms. In addition, we have no known malleable causal risk factors which predict onset of psychotic disorder with any specificity. Thus, it seems that primary prevention is currently out of our reach. Early intervention, therefore, means early secondary prevention. In keeping with the clinical staging model 27 articulated below, early intervention in psychosis can be defined as comprising three foci or stages: ultra-high risk, first episode, and the recovery or critical period. The principal reason for making such distinctions relates to the underlying risk of chronicity, and specifically the timing and duration of prescription of antipsychotic medication, since psychosocial interventions are needed at all stages, though these interventions too vary by stage. Clinicians and researchers have debated whether to focus on the preventive target of schizophrenia or of psychotic disorders more broadly. There are several reasons for stepping out of the current diagnostic silos and preferring a relatively broad target. As described above, schizophrenia is conceived and defined in part as an outcome as much as a diagnosis. While it is very stable once applied 28–31, it is intrinsically difficult to apply until the patient has been ill for a prolonged period of time. Within a sample of ultra-high risk cases (already defined in order to preferentially predict transition to non-affective psychosis), only 75% of those who go on to develop a first episode psychosis will progress to a schizophrenia diagnosis 32. So, the false positive rate is higher for schizophrenia than for first episode psychosis. Even within a first episode psychosis sample, only 30–40% will meet criteria for schizophrenia, and this percentage will increase over time with additional diagnostic flux. Thus, some cases of first episode psychosis which do not meet criteria for schizophrenia can be seen as being at risk for this in the future 33. Schizophrenia, therefore, is to some extent a more distal target than psychosis, which is a better and broader initial waystation for critical treatment decisions. An even earlier and broader point for intervention is the ultra-high risk clinical stage, where there is a need for care prior to the positive psychotic symptoms having become severe and sustained. In addition, due to fear and stigma derived from the notion of intrinsic poor prognosis, clinicians are reluctant to use the label “schizophrenia” early on anyway, justifiably concerned about iatrogenic effects on hope and the potential for recovery 34. This has led some countries, such as Japan, to change their diagnostic terminology and eschew the word “schizophrenia” 35. Our preferred alternative is to retain it for the time being, as one subtype of psychotic disorder outcome, admittedly a major one, among a small range of distal targets. Psychosis itself is a variable syndrome, defined by the presence of positive psychotic symptoms, especially delusions and hallucinations, and typically features one or many comorbidities, including negative symptoms, mood syndromes, personality disorders, substance use disorders, medical diseases and PTSD. The relative prominence of the positive symptoms and comorbidities varies, and this leads to a more hetero-geneous group of patients. As a consequence of this, a broader range of clinical skills will be required in early psychosis programs than in narrower schizophrenia programs. Some have argued that the schizophrenia focus allows the other psychotic disorders, especially psychotic mood disorders and psychoses associated with certain personality disorders and PTSD, to be treated in more appropriate settings. However, provided there is a flexible attitude and a broad range of clinical expertise available, both groups of patients benefit more from this broad, early, and inclusive focus on the spectrum of psychosis. It provides a good balance between specialization and addressing common needs, and also facilitates both clinical and aetiological research, which increasingly needs to transcend traditional diagnostic barriers. Many of the problems of categorical diagnosis flow from a telescoping of syndromes and stages of illness which conceals and distorts the natural ebb and flow of illness, remission and progression. In addition to augmenting categorical approaches with symptom dimensions, consideration needs to be given to the dimensions of time, severity, persistence and recurrence. The notion of staging can be borrowed and adapted from mainstream medicine to assist us here. A clinical staging model provides a heuristic framework allowing the development and evaluation of broad and specific interventions as well as the study of the variables and processes underlying the evolution of psychiatric disorder 27,36. Clinical staging is simply a more refined form of diagnosis 37,38. Its value is recognized in the treatment of malignancies, where quality of life and survival rely on the earliest possible delivery of effective interventions. However, it also has applicability in a diverse range of diseases. Clinical staging differs from conventional diagnostic practice in that it defines the extent of progression of disease at a particular point in time, and where a person lies currently along the continuum of the course of illness 36. The differentiation of early and milder clinical phenomena from those that accompany illness extension, progression and chronicity lies at the heart of the concept. It enables the clinician to select treatments relevant to earlier stages, and assumes that such interventions will be both more effective and less harmful than treatments delivered later in the course. While staging links treatment selection and prediction, its role in the former is more crucial than in the latter, particularly since early successful treatment may change the prognosis and thus prevent progression to subsequent stages. In addition to guiding treatment selection, a staging framework, which moves beyond the current diagnostic silos to encompass a broader range of clinical phenotypes, and which at the same time introduces subtypes along a longitudinal dimension, has the potential to organize endophenotypic data in a more coherent and 36. In other medical clinical stages are defined by the of progression and of illness in the which in with This a to as well as the or extent of the disease In clinical this could not only a clinical but a of extent or progression. in addition to the severity, persistence and of symptoms, volume and the social of the disorder the social and could also be the a model could the clinical stages to progression of disease a framework for the evaluation of interventions. The key positive outcomes are prevention of progression to more stages, or to an earlier stage. This an of those broad and risk and factors which influence progression from one to the we need to the relative of these risk factors and which of them may be to current interventions. While some factors may several or all may be for substance or stress may be especially harmful in onset of the first episode of illness, be less and these where variables such as substance psychosocial and social may with and other risk factors an aetiological over a century of research with traditional diagnostic of psychosis and severe mood disorders has to these to any A clinical staging which allows the of to of illness to be may to the of current or defined clinical processes from and and to be better and In psychotic disorders, an early is known to one in which much of the psychosocial is known to occur This earliest in be the the of the psychotic stage. However, since we can only apply the with the psychotic such as the or have been to that psychosis is not and that false positive cases also This is the earliest point at which preventive interventions for psychosis can be conceived The in such a is to the clinical for earliest intervention and for which the between and a of clinical and other need to be defined which a at risk for psychotic This is a and the key have been in many recent to the diagnosis of schizophrenia in the in the century in and though their that they on A operational of a or mental which could be to a risk of psychosis within a and in the early This has the of the field and has been the focus of much subsequent research, on prediction, treatment and neurobiological criteria do predict an group for early transition to psychosis to a relative risk of to the rate of psychotic disorders in the However, there is a false positive rate of though they typically are or out to be true for other disorders, and While the for psychosis can be by the use of key variables such as risk, depression, functional and substance use this is of due to the This means that the positive value the and percentage of cases that can So, the sample is one is on but cases who do go on to develop the disorder are due to the narrower focus that cases of first episode psychosis are by There have been a of clinical of relatively small sample both as preventive treatment for ultra-high risk patients that and may prevent or at the onset of psychotic disorder and A of clinical has been with for a range of psychosocial and including and However, young people in the some that patients be to and potentially harmful This has in the US in particular around this of This in has led to being preferred the traditional the that this thinking have allowed the same treatments that could not be of within a to be label in a widespread and in these the a since the natural course may be by studies that use of antipsychotic seems to be common in clinical in the by with delayed and treatment of first episode and psychotic disorders Clinical data is crucial to the and of of treatment in a new clinical focus and for an This is the to on widespread and potentially harmful and use of antipsychotic in The or ultra-high risk field in clinical since we do not which treatments will be and to and in which or or data can be in the and in the of a large clinical with an than and a intervention to which to can be can that and and such as and are to be but their use in research be within study In the the international clinical practice guidelines on early psychosis which a to the use of antipsychotic and more use of psychosocial be This to treatment of ultra-high risk is even more as it has been that the of early transition to first episode psychosis have been in the more with a much higher rate of being these This may be due to earlier of ultra-high risk or of interventions provided This in transition rate and over treatment in the ultra-high risk group has led to about of and intervention with these patients defined by the ultra-high risk criteria for first episode psychosis are at risk not only for schizophrenia or psychosis but for other mental outcomes may need to an even broader initial clinical with a range of possible or target we have our clinical and research with the development of a broader and more of clinical care for those in the of risk for all of mental disorders and with the of a clinical staging model for mood and disorders This enables a to to that the transition in ultra-high risk and the false positive rate can be in future clinical and that other syndromes and remission and can be us to beyond some of the to early diagnosis and namely the potential problems with the of and of specificity. As we this the problems with our and the need to the more The a therapeutic focus on the period after the onset of psychosis known as episode This is the period before psychosis is and the period after the or can be even in even psychosis is the of effective treatment may be The is to this duration of psychosis the intervention are and of and psychosocial interventions at and functional recovery and the prevention of are delivered during the early and of The the of and treatment in first episode psychosis seems to have been the of some key and recent longitudinal studies have now that is both a and risk for poor outcome. The Early and of Psychosis study in has the possible that leads to early in risk and of illness at initial treatment and in of negative symptoms and social The between and outcome is being over many of However, these studies do though being a malleable risk for a relatively of outcome the of treatment and quality during the early of There is an to the of care of the first psychotic episode. This is in the International Clinical for Early Psychosis published in the growth in research in this has This has led to the of the The large has that in the treatment of first episode and disorders, or have some While patients well to both and with no and were for This true even with very While the and were the of the of the with those of the Clinical of study in schizophrenia, where no were for outcome The data the of the International Clinical in Early Psychosis which the use of as first because of better crucial in first episode and risk for However, some have a particularly risk of and and these need to be and A recent however, that is a in the first of for first episode patients on both and with the key being the rate at which it treatments in early psychosis have been and there are positive to the value of in and and functional recovery there has been to the that in do by to a to This has led to an focus on the need to social recovery especially and vocational the of effective psychosocial interventions with There is also an focus on to limit the of that is as illness has in the of evidence but also the of early diagnosis. we we have effective interventions in psychosis, it is to that delayed treatment is being a is In the the key of intervention are and are as the data from and other studies have both are in it is possible to very of of a also result in a less and of care and patients to be a of positive symptoms or being required to or highly service systems. be in all and a of all mental systems. In of the specific of first episode psychosis intervention, a of have that in are for first episode patients where and are at a though some may be out on these in many patients. The recent study is especially The of new and needs to be as well as that of such as and and vocational are the key psychosocial interventions in early psychosis and need to be much more and treatment for the of patients is interventions are also an of even though the evidence is not This the critical early beyond the first episode, which can be as the critical period in this are the management of effective and the use of effective psychosocial interventions to the development of and of concept is now for these However, there a large in between and is available, even in and in the and the first episode, we that the first are crucial in setting the for recovery and outcome. This is the period of risk for and as well as with the major developmental challenges of a stable peer vocational and It that a of care on young people and on this of illness is required to the of of appropriate to family and vocational recovery and the evidence from and studies strongly the value of early psychosis programs in outcome in the these programs are only provided for years, there is also evidence that some of the are for a at early psychosis care needs to be provided for a up to in many cases The evidence that care provides outcomes in the to to care While this may be to meet the such evidence, with and has been to mental and service in hundreds of locations to and this The have only of this with a treatment model being the Even the are positive for the first of care. It seems for a at these are to be the early psychosis model be for up to this illness and may be in a much percentage of needs may be well by more traditional mental services for This may be a much better point to care. The of reform is typically in care. While early intervention in psychosis has progress in recent years, in many Many and have no progress at and even those which have have only have on this and some of the reasons for it can be seen as a blend of care and in which evidence is only one of a range of from a and the as and to flow of evidence This has been as since and and the of change and reform are other key on is a as well as a of reform and the by setting and by the once evidence is can be as a to and reform in a that be in other of medicine In better this it is to on and reform in care of is a major in all from to The study of of has a in the social Many have and to and promote this in care There are many factors but there are also of and care which influence the we of the There be the be with the and needs of those It be or of in the of it is that be adapted and in to there are several groups of in the of The are the group and the and are who form national and international networks or and they in these may be of as in a The early are a group of who on the and with one are to a range of new and have the and risk to new they are by the the early who are more in their focus and more risk The early to the early for about is to The the are even more and to the early an only it to be the new we have the members of a point of is the be this their since they point to the need to retain some of current and prior However, they are also the and and of evidence before the evidence for are applied to the which in mental at is typically less than the new This is and by the of to and after of the progress in early intervention, the have been in the early intervention While medicine is by the for and potentially and in of change have been to the to change which is and in the of the There is about where the of lies in such and other than evidence influence especially where have such as care and early it is that the relative value of early diagnosis and palliative which is where has out that the of has a point around once the early have in an the are to to as This is a that can be by several by example, and early with and time, making the of early highly and as a form of than of Many of the to early intervention are the same which progress in mental more as in the on Mental Health pessimism, the that the and a to and need to the of and treated mental A key which is to be recognized is that mental disorders are the diseases of the young mental disorders substance use and personality disorders have their onset and in adolescence and early A broader focus for early intervention many of the order by the early psychosis reform such as diagnostic a need for stigma and and be more effective in for and reform in mental This is in and and is in a of other countries, along the of the described It currently a and for early in to

World Psychiatry · 580 citationsread the source →

The Ethics of Childhood Obesity Treatment - from the Childhood Obesity Task Force (COTF) of European Association for the Study of Obesity (EASO)

With the American Medical Association's recent declaration that obesity is a serious disease [1], a critical consideration of the ethics of treating childhood obesity is especially timely. Although data suggest that the childhood obesity epidemic has stabilized in some countries [2], the levels remain too high; 18-49% of European children are overweight [3]. Consequently there is an immense and urgent need for the effective treatment of this complex disease. Unfortunately, the most recent Cochrane review concludes that, although family-based interventions can reduce excess weight in children and adolescents, long-term, effective and sustainable interventions for childhood obesity have yet to be identified [4]. Childhood obesity is a complex disease caused by a multitude of factors and it is associated with a wide range of co-morbidities. This complexity makes it challenging to design interventions and test the treatment approaches - particularly with regard to which outcome(s) should be used as the criteria for success. Most childhood obesity treatments occur in healthcare settings. As such, the randomized controlled trial (RCT), which is the ‘gold standard' of the medical/clinical research tradition, has been used to evaluate whether a given obesity treatment protocol is safe and effective. It is questionable however, if the RCT is the optimal study design to address this complex issue. Researchers investigating childhood obesity treatments face difficulties in deciding which outcomes best reflect the impact of treatment and, if a RCT is conducted, what type of treatment should it be randomized against. In light of the widespread childhood obesity epidemic, this paper will explore the ethical implications of these issues. Pediatric obesity research is conducted in a vulnerable group of patients and families. Many children who are obese suffer from significant psychological problems including anxiety, depression, attention-deficit hyperactivity as well as emotional and eating disorders [5,6]. Added to this, obesity carries a social stigma that adversely affects children as well as their families. There has been - and still is - considerable debate as to who bears the responsibility for the development of excess weight in the child and who bears the responsibility for alleviating the condition at the individual and the societal levels [7,8]. In recognition of these issues, there are discussions surrounding the ethics of community-based approaches of treating childhood obesity [9] and about mechanistic clinical studies aimed at understanding the pathophysiology of morbid obesity in children without a direct aim of reducing weight or the degree of obesity [10]. Less attention, however, has been given to the ethics of studying the individual treatment of the condition. The vast majority of childhood obesity therapy research is conducted at hospitals and their associated clinics or at universities. In this framework, treatment protocols are examined and approved by ethical review committees; thus it can be assumed that the basic premises of these studies are ethically acceptable. Nonetheless, investigators are obliged to ensure that their research fulfils the four basic principles of ethical research: respect for autonomy, beneficence, non-maleficence, and justice [11]. In the context of childhood obesity research, this can be challenging. Children who are obese and their families are often desperate for treatment because existing programs can have long waiting lists or be out of reach due to cost, time, and transportation factors. Given these circumstances, investigators must carefully consider if their protocol provides a situation in which they can scientifically test their hypotheses and balance this with creating a situation in which children and families freely make the choice to enter the study (autonomy), that the child receives a net benefit through participation in a timely manner (beneficence and non-maleficence), and that the exclusion criteria for participation are reasonable (justice). With these principles in mind, it becomes apparent that the development of treatment protocols must recognize the need for effective treatment along with consideration for the well-being of the child and his or her parent(s). The majority of childhood obesity treatments use the reduction of weight, BMI (kg/m2), waist circumference, and/or body composition as the primary outcome. These studies usually evaluate the change over a period of a few months to a maximum of a couple of years. Although weight loss or stabilization represents a reasonable target, it may be overly simplistic since childhood obesity is a complex phenotype that is associated with multiple concurrent co-morbidities. Clinical studies suggest that almost 50% of children who are obese exhibit pre- or grade 1 or 2 hypertension [12,13], another 29% have dyslipidemia [14], 44% have more than 5% fat in their livers [15], and 74% exhibit more than 5% fat in their muscles [16]. Additionally, children who are obese are at risk of serious cardiovascular [17,18], endocrinological [17,19], orthopedic [20,21] and psychological [5,6] complications that are present or not yet clinically apparent. Other complications progress silently and appear during late adolescence and young adulthood. Furthermore, future health risks loom, and a significantly increased risk of coronary heart disease [22], metabolic disease [23], and cancer [24,25] is non-ignorable in adulthood. Thus given the wide range of these co-morbidities and their potential for current and future harm to the child's health, addressing these problems individually without reducing the degree of obesity may be an acceptable and positive outcome of an obesity treatment. The reversal of adverse cardiovascular risk markers, such as increased blood pressure or dyslipidemia, is a clinical success, even without a reduction of obesity. Focusing the definition of ‘success' on the isolated outcome of a statistically significant reduction in some aspect of body size ignores the patient's well-being, emotional status, and the plethora of other obesity-associated problems that are relevant for the health of the child. In biomedical research, study designs can be ranked according to the strength of the evidence they can provide. Depending on the purpose - whether it is providing rapid treatment to a patient or to guiding a systematic review - there are different guidelines available [26]. One commonly used hierarchy ranks study designs based upon their internal validity [27]. Often depicted as a pyramid, RCTs are at the top, cohort studies are in the middle, and at the bottom are case reports [27]. In this scheme, controlled prospective trials in which subjects are not randomly allocated to the intervention but are compared with a control group fit somewhere just below RCTs. Although hierarchies of evidence are convenient groupings of types of studies, they can be overly simplistic and cannot be applied to all situations. For example, it has been shown that well designed observational studies can achieve the same results as a RCT aimed at answering the same question, yet at a lower cost and with faster data collection and analysis [28]. Further, no matter how strong a study design is, the conclusions drawn from it arise from the scientific rigor applied to examining and ruling out other potential causes of the intervention effect. Similarly, even though these hierarchies are useful, they do not imply that the RCT is the best design for all research questions from scientific, practical or even ethical points of view. In biomedical research and for validation purposes before regulatory authorities, the RCT study design is viewed as the superior approach to establish whether an intervention is efficacious or not. Most commonly, one group is assigned to receive the intervention in question, whereas the other group receives a placebo or another treatment modality available in a common setting representing the current ‘standard of care.' The RCT is well suited to studies of readily identifiable end points, such as pharmaceutical testing and surgical procedures. The design has high internal validity as well as the advantages of minimizing confounding, information and selection bias, and ruling out chance in the findings. Another advantage of this design is that it enhances the comparability of study results, especially if they are reported according to guidelines such as the CONSORT 2010 statement [29]. Inherent to the RCT design, however, is a limited generalizability of the results; a successful study in one setting does not guarantee that it can be replicated under normal conditions in another setting. Despite randomization, this study design does not eliminate confounding, but rather it allows for the measurement of the probability of confounding and thus an assessment of its effect on the outcomes of interest. Further, the RCT is a costly study design, which often limits the number of patients that can be included. This limitation has two consequences. First, a limited number of patients may be insufficient to actually test the effect of the intervention, and second, the inclusion of relatively small numbers of patients reduces the likelihood of observing side effects or complications of the treatment. Consequently, large-scale RCTs are difficult to finance. These limitations of the RCT design are especially relevant in the area of childhood obesity treatment where both the disease and its treatment are complex. In the case of testing childhood obesity treatment programs, the traditional RCT study design is not optimal and may even fail. Allocation into simple treatment modalities does not reflect clinical practice or the true effects of treatment. Childhood obesity is a chronic disease without a well-defined clinical endpoint to evaluate; simply moving from a classification of obese to overweight, reducing BMI z-score, or losing some weight does not represent the end of a treatment requirement by the child. The RCT is not well suited for assessing this type of long-term outcome. In terms of generalizability, there are methodological problems regarding eligibility criteria since most children and youth selected for RCT-based childhood obesity treatment are highly motivated and thus are not comparable to the general population of children and youth who are obese. In addition, recruitment into such studies may be limited by cultural and societal beliefs as well as the level of education of parents [30,31]. Moreover, these studies are typically performed in referral centers that treat children who are severely obese and may not be representative of the typical child who is ‘mildly obese' or without a myriad of co-morbidities. Aside from the limitations of the traditional RCT design in testing the efficacy of childhood obesity treatment protocols, it also presents an ethical dilemma of what care the control group should receive. In many childhood obesity interventions, the control group receives no treatment, is registered on a waiting list, or receives the standard care that is available at a given time (if indeed such a standard exists). From an ethical perspective, these approaches are problematic. In the era of the childhood obesity epidemic, it is questionable if randomization to no treatment is acceptable. The Helsinki declaration of 2008 states that ‘… The benefits, risks burdens and effectiveness of a new intervention must be tested against those of the best current proven intervention except in the following circumstances: The use of placebo, or no treatment, is acceptable in studies where no current proven intervention exists …' [32]. Narrowly interpreted, as there are not yet proven long-term, effective and sustainable interventions for the treatment of childhood obesity [33], a non-treatment control group could be considered as acceptable. Viewed from a broader perspective, however, as there are interventions which produce the target outcome of weight loss or maintenance, even if it is not sustained for the long-term [4], the use of a non-treatment group is not acceptable. If one considers traditional diseases, most ethical committees would object to studies that randomize patients with diseases with known beneficial treatment options (such as cancer, diabetes, tuberculosis etc.) to no treatment. Yet, somehow, these standards are often not applied to childhood obesity. However, in recent years, given the extensive scope of the obesity epidemic and that children are becoming obese at progressively younger ages, many clinicians find this increasingly unethical and thus a violation of the Oath of Hippocrates. As an alternative, subjects in the non-treatment arm of a childhood obesity treatment study should receive, at a minimum, standard care. In this context, since a universally accepted treatment has not been developed, providing it is a challenge. A justifiable approach to treating childhood obesity can consist of a familial approach, using behavior changing techniques, as well as simple advice concerning healthy nutrition and physical activity or inactivity [4,34,35]. The behavioral approach must be accompanied by medical intervention(s) for specific obesity-related co-morbidities, where appropriate. Nonetheless, the definition of standard care remains vague as these elements are often delivered in varying combinations and intensities and in different settings (personal, group, familial approach, or separation of the treatment modalities between patient and family etc.). Further compounding the problem is that in many settings even a minimal level of care for the obese child does not exist - in developed, let alone developing countries. In the evaluation of childhood obesity treatments, an implicit assumption is made that if an intervention is to be declared successful, it should result in a sustained treatment effect. In contrast, this requirement is not met by treatments given for nearly all other pediatric chronic diseases such as asthma, diabetes, or epilepsy. Patients with these serious chronic diseases tend to have relapses, which occur even with continuous medical care, but more rapidly without. Additionally, another challenge in the evaluation of chronic care models is that patients receive complex and individually tailored treatment designs (with varying visit intervals, focus of attention, use of different types of health professionals etc.) that are difficult to evaluate using current designs. Moreover, interventions designed for clinical trials may be much more intensive and costly than what is possible and attainable in normal clinical settings, particularly with regard to time, usage, and funding. The success of interventions such as these, due to their lack of ‘real life' practicality, can result in frustration for practitioners who are unable to use these methods in their own setting. Unlike typical chronic medical conditions (such as hypertension or type 2 diabetes), the concept of childhood obesity may have cultural elements that should be incorporated and adapted into country-specific treatment and prevention programs - yet this significantly limits head-to-head evaluation of such interventions across Europe in empiric clinical trials. When considering what standard care should consist of, it is worthwhile to remember that childhood obesity is a long-term condition with associated co-morbidities, many of which are not always readily identifiable. It is clear that children with chronic diseases need a relevant diagnosis followed by regular visits to monitor the progression, the emergence of complications, and the treatment responses alongside the continuous treatment given. Such standards are fundamental in good clinical practice. Chronic diseases demand chronic treatment models and need to be evaluated using study designs that can accommodate the complexity of both the disease and its treatment. These prerogatives are obvious and universally accepted in terms of chronic diseases in pediatrics, but not so in relation childhood obesity per se. Therefore, just as with the intervention arm of a trial, the care provided to these children should address these co-morbidities in addition to weight loss or maintenance. If we are to move beyond viewing the traditional RCT as the ‘gold standard' in the evaluation of childhood obesity treatment programs, other designs must be explored. Such studies do not utilize a traditional RCT design, but rather employ a controlled trial design in which the comparison group is not randomly assigned and is often drawn from a source outside of the study. In this design, the most common sources of control subjects are: i) waiting lists, ii) usual care patients, and iii) a non-treatment group. Although appealing, many of these designs may not yield the comparison group that is expected by the researcher and each has ethical concerns, primarily that children who need treatment do not receive it. Another alternative is ‘The large simple trial' [36]. In this design, many institutions/doctors join together in different settings so that thousands of patients can be included in a study at a lower cost and with better coverage of potential side effects (than compared with studies of hundreds of patients) [36]. In this case, a detailed recording of the therapeutic approaches, the duration and frequency of visits, health personals involved, and measurement methods have to be performed in order to compare treatments. Thus, to move forward in an ethically responsible manner, RCT trials testing childhood obesity treatments should be based upon comparisons between different therapeutic modalities. Multiple observational studies have been published regarding childhood obesity interventions. Despite the known limitations and biases of such studies, large observational sample evaluations can be used to analyze the effectiveness of pre-defined interventions for specific populations. Based on investigations in other medical fields, using this approach prudently can yield conclusions that are quite similar to those derived from large RCTs [28]Given the ethical considerations, the diversity in the obesity phenotypes that require complex and individualized treatment strategies as well as the long-term follow-up, the traditional RCT is not ideally suited for testing the efficacy of childhood obesity treatments. It is timely that the research community shift towards accepting study designs that demonstrate the plausibility of an intervention rather than just a probability statement derived from a RCT. ‘Plausibility' refers to whether the intervention had an effect beyond what can be attributed to other external factors [37]. To make a strong plausibility statement, a control group still is required for comparison, but there is not a requirement that subjects are randomized to it. The commonly used sources (e.g. historical cohorts, waiting lists) can be used. A weaker statement can be made even if a control group is not used. Plausibility statements arise from the scientific rigor applied to examining and ruling out other potential causes for the treatment effect. Equally, the transparency of reports must increase, and the use of the CONSORT 2010 statement [29] would achieve this. Childhood obesity is a complex condition with a multitude of causes and complications (some of which are not readily identifiable); thus relying only upon tests of probability as the sole criteria for establishing that an intervention was successful is not reasonable. It is time that results derived from adequately designed studies that use observational designs aimed at making causal statements are accepted. Given these constraints, this study design may be the only practical and ethical design option to answer clinical questions relevant to specific populations in obesity is a chronic condition with late clinical many of are to the effectiveness of interventions in This can be using RCTs and is unethical for the arm of such In the evaluation of childhood obesity treatments it is time to move beyond viewing the RCT as the study design in terms of treatment of clinically relevant childhood obesity. It is not well suited to test the complex and chronic care required to treat these and if the control group is randomized to no treatment at it is The time has to standard care to all children who are obese and to evaluate treatment protocols by in terms of their children and who are obese both need and care. of to

Obesity Facts · 594 citationsread the source →

Cancer mortality in India: a nationally representative survey.

Background: The age-specific mortality rates and total deaths from specific cancers have not been documented for the various regions and subpopulations of India. We therefore assessed the cause of death in 2001-03 in homes in small areas that were chosen to be representative of all the parts of India. Methods: At least 130 trained physicians independently assigned causes to 122,429 deaths, which occurred in 1·1 million homes in 6671 small areas that were randomly selected to be representative of all of India, based on a structured non-medical surveyor's field report. Findings: 7137 of 122,429 study deaths were due to cancer, corresponding to 556,400 national cancer deaths in India in 2010. 395,400 (71%) cancer deaths occurred in people aged 30-69 years (200,100 men and 195,300 women). At 30-69 years, the three most common fatal cancers were oral (including lip and pharynx, 45,800 [22·9%]), stomach (25,200 [12·6%]), and lung (including trachea and larynx, 22,900 [11·4%]) in men, and cervical (33,400 [17·1%]), stomach (27,500 [14·1%]), and breast (19,900 [10·2%]) in women. Tobacco-related cancers represented 42·0% (84,000) of male and 18·3% (35,700) of female cancer deaths and there were twice as many deaths from oral cancers as lung cancers. Age-standardised cancer mortality rates per 100,000 were similar in rural (men 95·6 [99% CI 89·6-101·7] and women 96·6 [90·7-102·6]) and urban areas (men 102·4 [92·7-112·1] and women 91·2 [81·9-100·5]), but varied greatly between the states, and were two times higher in the least educated than in the most educated adults (men, illiterate 106·6 [97·4-115·7] vs most educated 45·7 [37·8-53·6]; women, illiterate 106·7 [99·9-113·6] vs most educated 43·4 [30·7-56·1]). Cervical cancer was far less common in Muslim than in Hindu women (study deaths 24, age-standardised mortality ratio 0·68 [0·64-0·71] vs 340, 1·06 [1·05-1·08]). Interpretation: Prevention of tobacco-related and cervical cancers and earlier detection of treatable cancers would reduce cancer deaths in India, particularly in the rural areas that are underserved by cancer services. The substantial variation in cancer rates in India suggests other risk factors or causative agents that remain to be discovered. Funding: Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation and US National Institutes of Health.

Lancet (London, England) · 296 citationsread the source →